JP7359480B1 - game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

The present invention relates to a game machine typified by a reel game machine (slot machine) and a pinball game machine (pachinko machine), and provides a game machine that is characterized by setting suggestion performance. [Solution] The plurality of setting values include a first setting value (setting b) with the lowest ball output rate among the plurality of setting values, and a second setting value with a higher ball output rate than the first setting value. (Setting 1) and a third setting value (Setting 2) having a higher ball payout rate than the second setting value, If the setting value is changed to the third setting value, the first setting suggestion effect (setting increase suggestion effect) may be executed (5% probability shown in FIG. 35(b)). When the setting value is changed to the second setting value, there is no possibility of executing the first setting suggestion effect (0% probability shown in FIG. 36(b)). [Selection diagram] Figure 35

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine typified by a reel gaming machine (slot machine) and a pinball gaming machine (pachinko machine).

Conventionally, some gaming machines are configured to be able to set one setting value from a plurality of types of setting values having different advantages, and play a game based on a lottery based on the set setting value. Some of these game machines perform a setting suggestion effect that suggests the set value (for example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Patent Application Publication No. 2016-146944

However, in conventional game machines, there is room for improvement in the setting suggestion performance.

In view of the above circumstances, it is an object of the present invention to provide a game machine having a feature of setting suggestion performance.

The gaming machine of the present invention that solves the above object is:
a set value setting control means that can be set to one of the plurality of set values;
A production means capable of executing multiple setting suggestion productions;
A game machine comprising:
The plurality of setting values include a first setting value with the lowest ball payout rate among the plurality of setting values, a second setting value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the first setting value, and a second setting value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the first setting value. a third set value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the second set value, and a fourth set value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the third set value,
One setting suggestion effect among the plurality of setting suggestion effects is a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value setting control means has set a setting value with a higher ball payout rate than the setting value before change. (referred to as "first setting suggestion performance"),
One setting suggestion performance among the plurality of setting suggestion performances is a setting suggestion performance that suggests that the current setting value is the first setting value (hereinafter referred to as "second setting suggestion performance"). and
The production means is
In a game after the setting value is set again from the first setting value to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the third setting value and the setting value is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the second set value is changed to the first set value and set to the first set value by the set value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the setting value is set again from the second setting value to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion effect is executed;
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the third setting value and the setting value is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the first setting value and the setting value is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the setting value is set again from the third setting value to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
The probability of executing the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executable is the probability of executing the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executable. The probability is lower than
It is characterized by

According to the present invention, it is possible to provide a game machine having a feature of setting suggestion performance.

1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. It is a figure which shows an example of a line. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 3 is a diagram for explaining a medal selector 170. FIG. (a) is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293, (b) is a table summarizing differences in performance for each setting value, and (c) to (f) are FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting-related notification (setting suggestion notification, setting confirmation notification). It is a circuit block diagram of a control part. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit main processing. 5 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing. 8 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit initialization processing (step S101) in FIG. 7. FIG. 10 is a flowchart showing the flow of setting change processing (step S1013) in FIG. 9. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the first sub-control unit 400, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. 5 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 400. FIG. (a) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500, (b) is a flowchart of the command reception interrupt process of the second sub-control unit 500, and (c) is a flowchart of the main process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. 3 is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the control unit 500, and (d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500. 12 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by changing settings and the states of related components. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (c) in FIG. 13. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is set to setting b. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop in the state where the payment is made. 16 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 15. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking the settings with setting 1, which is the default setting value, and (b) shows the state when setting 1 is set. 3 is a table summarizing the states of related components when checking settings in power saving mode. 18 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 17. FIG. (a) is a table summarizing the status of related components when checking the settings with setting b set, and (b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting b is set in power saving mode. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when performing confirmation. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage in FIG. 19. FIG. (a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine in this modification, and (b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations that are subject to the lottery in RT1 and the high and low winning probabilities. It is a figure, and (c) is a figure for explaining some of the winning combinations which are objects of winning lottery in RT2, and the height of the winning probability. It is a figure showing an example of payout rate of RT1 and RT2. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. . If the reel is rotated before the front door 102 is closed after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored, the related components This is a table summarizing the status. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. Before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, check the state of the related components in the event that a power outage occurs and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored. This is a summarized table. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting changes. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second gaming state after changing the settings. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. be. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the setting confirmation is performed once, and a game is played once. This is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. Relevant components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on after setting confirmation is performed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a table summarizing the status of . After the settings have been confirmed once, the state of the related components is summarized when a medal is inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and a game is played. This is a table. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect at the end of AT when no setting change is made, and (b) is a diagram showing an AT when setting change is made from setting 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect at the time of termination. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table that determines whether or not to execute a setting suggestion effect, etc. at the end of AT when a setting change is made from setting 2, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table when a setting change is made from setting b. FIG. 12 is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion performance, etc. at the end of AT in a case. (a) is a diagram illustrating a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion performance based on a character's dialogue, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not a setting suggestion performance can be executed during a demonstration performance. It is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect executed as an additional effect on the number of games in the AT state. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the roulette effect shown in FIG. 38. FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a modification of the roulette effect shown in FIG. 38. FIG. It is a diagram showing an example of a defeat rate increasing challenge performance. It is a diagram showing an example of message production. 1 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side. FIG. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine. 1 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of a slot machine 100. FIG. 45 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44; FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the flow of first sub-control unit main processing, first sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, and first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is a flowchart showing the flow of the second sub-control unit main processing, the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and the second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine shown in FIG. be. (a) is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the main control unit of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, and (b) is a diagram illustrating the character accompanying state of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. FIG. 45 is a diagram showing characters displayed on the effect image display device in each character accompanying state of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44; (a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process in the normal state of the advantageous section of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, and (b) is a table showing the CZ transition lottery process in the normal state of the advantageous section of the slot machine shown in FIG. This is a table schematically showing the following. (a) is a diagram showing a time chart and an example of production when the slot machine shifts from the non-accompanied state to the accompanied state and then shifts to the non-accompanied state in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44; 45 is a diagram showing a time chart when the slot machine shown in FIG. 44 shifts from the accompanying state to the non-accompanied state in the advantageous section normal state. This is an example of performance in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. This is an example of performance in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. (a) is a table schematically showing the character arrangement lottery process in the CZ of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, and (b) is a table schematically showing the selected character point lottery process in the CZ of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, and (c) is a table schematically showing AT lottery processing in CZ of the slot machine shown in FIG. 45 is a table showing the lottery probability of the push order bell of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, the maximum number of coins to be paid out in the case of a correct operation, the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content. This is an example of performance in one predetermined game of CZ of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44. (a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process in the normal AT state of the slot machine shown in FIG. It is a table schematically showing the zone lottery process. 45 is a diagram showing a time chart and performance of a game in which the player won the push order bell_LCR in the specialized zone of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44 and obtained an additional number of 123 coins. 45 is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect of a game in which the player wins the push order bell_RLC in the specialized zone of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44 and obtains 231 additional coins. 45 is a diagram showing a time chart and an effect of a game in which the player wins the push order bell_RCL in the specialized zone of the slot machine shown in FIG. 44, wins a prize, and obtains 321 additional coins. (a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestion performance A, and (b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestion performance B. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example in which a setting suggestion effect A is executed after a setting suggestion effect B is executed. (a) is a diagram showing a first modification of the lottery table for setting suggestion performance A, and (b) is a diagram showing a second modification of the lottery table for setting suggestion performance A. It is a figure which shows the 3rd modification of the lottery table of setting suggestion production A. It is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of additional sheets and the display mode in the additional effect 1. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating a specific example of updating interval determination when the first section has 80 images. 71 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the additional effect 1 in which updated display of up to 80 images is performed as explained using FIG. 70. FIG. 72 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 71. FIG. (a) is a diagram illustrating an enlarged/reduced display as a first modification, and (b) is a diagram illustrating an enlarged display as a second modification. It is a figure which shows the example which changed the update interval (addition interval) of the update display in the additional production 1. (a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the final number of additional coins and the display mode in the additional performance 2, (b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the increased value and the display format of the number of additional tickets, and (c) is a diagram showing the relationship between the increase value and the display format of the display of the number of additional tickets. FIG. 7 is a diagram showing a modification example of the display mode of displaying the number of additional sheets. It is a figure which shows the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the additional effect 2 step by step. It is a figure which shows the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the modification of the additional production 2 step by step. 1 is a perspective view showing the appearance of a slot machine according to this example. FIG. 2 is a front view of the slot machine according to the present example with the front door opened. FIG. 2 is a diagram showing the winning line of the slot machine according to the present example, and a diagram showing the operation of the liquid crystal display device. FIG. 3 is a circuit block diagram of a control section of the slot machine according to the present example. FIG. 3 is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel of the slot machine according to the present example. It is a table showing the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content of some of the winning combinations (mainly the pressing combinations) of the slot machine according to the present example. It is a transition diagram of the gaming state of the slot machine according to this example. 3 is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit of the slot machine according to the present example. 86 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pseudo game related processing in step S105 of FIG. 85. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation start process of the pseudo game in step S1002 of FIG. 86. It is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in step S1003 of FIG. 86. 87 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pseudo next game start process in step S1004 of FIG. 86. 86 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of reel rotation start processing in step S107 of FIG. 85. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of random delay rotation start processing in step S1407 of FIG. 90; 7 is a flowchart showing the flow of main control unit timer interrupt processing of the slot machine according to the present example. 2 is a flowchart showing the flow of a first sub-control unit main process, a first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and a first sub-control unit timer interrupt process of the slot machine according to the present example. A flowchart showing the flow of the second sub-control unit main process, second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, and second sub-control unit image control process of the slot machine according to this example. It is. FIG. 6 is a diagram chronologically showing the display mode of the reels and the performance images displayed on the liquid crystal display device in a pseudo game of the slot machine according to the present example. 89 is a flowchart showing in detail step S1203 of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in FIG. 88. FIG. 3 is a diagram chronologically showing the transition of continuous performance when a penalty occurs in the slot machine according to the present example. It is a time chart showing the performance transition of a game in which a penalty does not occur in the slot machine according to the present example. It is a time chart showing the performance transition of a game in which a penalty occurs in the slot machine according to the present example. It is a diagram explaining a penalty game of the slot machine according to the present example. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating a notification mode of recommended operation notification for the slot machine according to the present example. (a) is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device when a power outage/power restoration occurs while the slot machine according to the present example is executing recommended operation notification, and (b) is a diagram showing the operation of the liquid crystal display device thereafter FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device when an error is detected during execution. FIG. 12 is a diagram illustrating another method of dealing with a penalty when a penalty occurs during continuous performance of the slot machine according to the present example. FIG. 3 is a diagram illustrating the display of the number of acquired coins in the AT state of the slot machine according to the present example. It is a graph showing an example of an increase/decrease in the number of differential coins when the AT state is consecutively won in the slot machine according to the present example. FIG. 2 is a diagram illustrating an example of a case where a discrepancy occurs between the progress of the game and the progress of the performance in the related art.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 1 to 43. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 43 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 1 to 43, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 43, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 1 to 43.

FIG. 1 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

The slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 starts rotating when a predetermined number of game media are inserted and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols receive a predetermined rotation start instruction operation. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the success or failure of internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation. If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out a game. Note that this payout of game media may be referred to as profit. Furthermore, something that facilitates the acquisition of profits may be referred to as a benefit.

This slot machine 100 includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. The front door 102 is a door member rotatably attached to the main body 101. The front door 102 is provided with a locking function, so that only an employee of the game parlor can open the front door 102.

Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

A suitable number of each pattern is printed on a strip member at equal intervals, and the strip member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material to form each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the symbol display window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible.

FIG. 2 is a diagram showing an example of a line.

To explain specifically using FIG. 2, the symbols displayed on the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the diagram) are changed to the upper row symbols of the left reel 110 and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the left reel 110 (position 4 shown in the diagram). The displayed symbols are the middle symbols of the left reel, the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel 110 (position 7 shown in the figure) are the lower symbols of the left reel, and the symbols displayed in the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 2 shown in the figure) are the symbols displayed in the lower row of the left reel. The symbol displayed in the middle reel 111 (position 5 in the diagram) is the middle reel symbol, and the symbol displayed in the bottom row of the middle reel 111 (position 8 in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the middle reel 111. The symbol displayed in the lower row of the middle reel 112 (position 3 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the upper row of the right reel, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 6 shown in the diagram) is the symbol displayed in the right reel. The symbols displayed on the middle reel and the lower row of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure) are called right reel lower symbols, and the symbols on each reel 110 to 112 are displayed on each reel 110 through the symbol display window 113 112, three in the vertical direction, nine in total are displayed. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Furthermore, although the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 includes three reels inside the center of the slot machine 100, the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) is arranged on the back of each reel 110 to 112 to illuminate each symbol displayed in the symbol display window 113. The backlight is configured to be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and this optical sensor (index sensor shown in FIG. 4) is provided. A light shielding piece (not shown) of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light projecting part and the light receiving part of 730). The position of the symbols on the reels is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the active line.

The valid line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the line 114 that is valid. The active line is the line on which it is determined whether the symbol combination corresponding to the winning combination has been displayed (the line on which the winning determination is made), and when the symbol corresponding to the internal winning combination stops on this active line, It will be judged as a prize winner. Here, the line is defined as an area corresponding to one symbol for each of the reels 110 to 112 within the area within the display window 113. Note that lines other than valid lines on which winning determination is not made are referred to as invalid lines.

In FIG. 2, there is a middle line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel middle symbol, a right-down line L2 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel lower symbol; A rising right line L3 consisting of a left reel lower symbol, a middle reel middle symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, an upper line L4 consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel upper symbol, and a right reel upper symbol, a left reel lower symbol, Five lines are shown, a lower line L5 consisting of middle reel lower symbols and right reel lower symbols. These lines are just examples, and for example, an area for one symbol is defined for each of the reels 110 to 112, such as a line consisting of a left reel upper symbol, a middle reel lower symbol, and a right reel upper symbol. It is fine as long as it is.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include special winning combinations 1 (BB1), special winning combinations 2 (BB2), replay winning combinations 1 to 3, and small winning combinations 1 to 7 (for example, watermelon, weak cherry, etc.). Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that he or she has internally won a specific winning combination (specifically, a special prize) in an internal lottery, or that the player is in a special gaming state to be described later. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. ing. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot into which the player inserts medals when starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and the term "insertion" includes both. be.

The slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. The storage number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout number display 127 are 7-segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are associated with each reel 110 to 112. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112. Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reels that are stopped in response to these stop operations are referred to as a first stop reel, a second stop reel, and a third stop reel in this order. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. Furthermore, the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the left reel 110 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop operation is an operation to stop the right reel 112 is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". This is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body can be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155.

The front door 102 is also provided with a key hole 142, and when a key is inserted into this key hole 142 and turned clockwise, the door is unlocked, and when turned counterclockwise, the door is locked. The slot machine 100 is provided with an open sensor 294 (see FIG. 3(a)) that detects when the front door 102 is opened. The open sensor 294 detects that the front door 102 is opened by detecting the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened.

Further, a first chance button 165 and a second chance button 166 are provided between the bet button 132 and the medal slot 141. The first chance button 165 has a built-in first effect lamp, and the second chance button 166 has a built-in second effect lamp. Both the first chance button 165 and the second chance button 166 are operation means operated by the player during the performance. Further, a left button 167 is provided on the left side of the second chance button 166, and a right button 168 is provided on the right side. By operating the left button 167 and right button 168, it may be possible to move the cursor displayed on the effect image display device 157, and in such cases, the second chance button 166 functions as a confirmation button. Sometimes.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. This title panel 162 is illuminated from the back side by a title panel lamp 164. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.

The sound hole 145 provided at the bottom is a hole for outputting the sound of the bass speaker 277 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. A top lamp 144T provided on the top of the front door 102, a left side lamp 144L provided on the left side of the front door 102, and a right side lamp 144R provided on the right side are decorative lamps for enlivening the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. This sound hole 143 is a hole for outputting the sound of the upper speaker 272 (see FIG. 3) to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a production image display device 157 disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. There is. In FIG. 1, the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b are opened horizontally outward in front of the effect image display device 157, and the display screen of the effect image display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player side). are doing. Note that although the effect image display device 157 is a liquid crystal display device, it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, and may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display). Display), dot matrix display, organic EL display, plasma display, reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and the entire display screen is configured to be visible to the player. In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Furthermore, although the display screen is a flat surface, it may be a curved surface.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, a rotating device 140, which is an operating means that can be operated by a player, is arranged on the right side of the front door 102. This rotating device 140 has a rotating body 1401 that can be rotated both downward and upward. The default (normal) rotation direction of the rotating body 1401 is downward. As shown in FIG. 1, the rotating body 1401 is marked with an arrow indicating downward rotation.

Note that what has been referred to as a lamp so far is an example of a light emitting means, and in this specification, a lamp whose light source is an LED is also referred to as a lamp, and any device that emits light such as a fluorescent lamp or a cold cathode tube is also referred to as a lamp. Sometimes referred to as a lamp, something that emits light corresponds to an example of a light emitting means.

FIG. 3 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 3(a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. The sub control board storage case 220 is provided with a first selection switch 190. Since this first selection switch 190 is provided inside the main body 101, a person who can unlock the front door 102 (for example, a clerk at a game parlor) cannot open the front door 102. However, the front door 102 is configured so that a person who cannot unlock the front door 102 (for example, a player) cannot operate the front door 102. That is, the first selection switch 190 is provided at a position that cannot be operated by the player. By operating the first selection switch 190, you can change the volume of the sound output from the bass speaker 277 and the upper speaker 272 (for example, BGM, sound effects, error sounds, etc.) or enter the power saving mode. Can be set. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device. This external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with an information output circuit 334 shown in FIG.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the gaming mode (also referred to as setting value) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting value. Here, the set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and will be described in detail later, but for example, the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets when playing games for a predetermined period of time. , a value for adjusting the ratio of the total number of game media paid out by the gaming machine ("payout rate"), etc. is included. This setting value can be set in multiple stages, for example, in six stages.

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the on state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detect off state.

Like the first selection switch 190 described above, the setting key switch 281 is also provided inside the main body 101, so that it can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102. .

Each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 is provided with a monitor LED that lights up when the setting key switch 281 is turned on. Further, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal indicating that the setting key switch 281 is turned on is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to an external device (for example, a hall computer). be done.

Note that the setting key switch 281 may be mounted on the main control board 300B.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in the bucket 181) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and above the hopper unit 180, that is, below the reel unit 700, a power source having a power control board is provided. A device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). Note that the power switch 244 may be mounted on a power control board. The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the hopper unit 180 to accommodate medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and above the symbol display window 113 is provided with a presentation device 160 and a presentation control board for controlling this presentation device 160. (not shown), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the symbol display window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a return passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. There is. This medal selector 170 will be further described later. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the pattern display window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 3(b). Like the setting key switch 281 and the like, the reset switch 291 and setting change button 292 can only be operated by a person who can unlock the front door 102.

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset. Furthermore, by pressing and holding down the reset switch 291 (long-term pressing), the RAM of the main control section can be cleared.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display a display representing the gaming mode (setting value) set by the setting change button 292.

In addition, although the reset switch 291 and the setting change button 292 were provided on the door relay board 290, they may be provided on the main control board 300B. Further, the setting value display 293 may also be provided on the main control board 300B.

A rotation device 140 is arranged on the opposite side of the front door 102 from the hinge device 276.

FIG. 4 is a diagram for explaining the medal selector 170.

FIG. 4 schematically shows the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1. Further, in FIG. 4, the medal selector 170 provided on the back side of the front door 102 and the hopper unit 180 provided inside the main body 101 shown in FIG. 3 are shown by dotted lines. The medal selector 170 has a medal blocker 172 provided in a medal passage 171. The medal blocker 172 distributes medals inserted from the medal slot 141 and passing through the medal passage 171 to either the storage passage 173 or the return passage 266. The medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 4 is in a state of protruding into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are guided (guided) by the medal blocker 172 in the protruding state and pass through the return passage 266. The medals are discharged from the medal payout port 155. On the other hand, if the medal blocker 172 is in a state where it is retracted from inside the medal passage 171, the medals passing through the medal passage 171 pass through the storage passage 173 and are stored in the bucket 181. Projection of the medal blocker 172 into the medal passage 171 and retraction from the medal passage 171 are performed by a blocker solenoid (not shown). That is, when an activation signal (control signal) is output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates (displaces) so as to guide the inserted medals to the storage passage 173. On the other hand, if the activation signal is not output to the blocker solenoid, the medal blocker 172 operates to guide the inserted medals to the discharge passage 19b.

FIG. 5A is a table showing the display order of setting values displayed on the setting value display 293.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, six types of setting values are prepared: setting 1, setting 2, setting 4 to setting 6, and setting b. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293. In other words, the default setting values may be changed immediately after shipping from the factory, after clearing the RAM including the storage area for storing setting values (RAM of the main control unit), or if the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area for storing setting values is lost. Setting 1 is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the setting value, and setting 1 is set as the setting value.

The degree of advantage for the player in obtaining profits is higher in setting 2 than setting 1, higher in setting 4 than setting 2, higher in setting 5 than setting 4, and higher in setting 6 than setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player to earn profits.

In the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1, setting b is provided instead of setting 3. Setting b is a setting that is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's ability to earn profits. In other words, setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player to earn profits. This setting b has a difference of only one segment from setting 6 in the 7-segment LED display, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If an unauthorized person performs an unauthorized operation thinking that the last setting displayed is the most advantageous setting, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display 293, the unauthorized person mistakes the setting as setting 6 and sets it. The setting may be changed to b. In this case, the fraudster can be disadvantaged.

When changing the settings, the display on the setting value display 293 is updated in the order of 1→2→4→5→6→b→1→2, etc. by operating the setting change button 292. Note that the display order other than "Setting 1" that is displayed first may be in any order. For example, the display on the setting value display 293 is 1 → 2 → b → 4 → 5 → 6 → 1 → 2... may be updated.

FIG. 5(b) is a table summarizing the differences in performance for each set value.

Performance A is the payout rate (sometimes called ball payout rate), performance B is the special winning (BB) first hit probability, performance C is the AT (assist time) first hit probability, performance D is the AT continuation probability, Performance E is the expected number of AT acquisitions, performance F is the probability of small role A (for example, watermelon), performance G is the appearance frequency/probability of notifications that suggest setting values (setting suggestion notifications), and performance H is setting suggestions as confirmed notifications. This is the appearance frequency/probability of notifications. Performances A to F correspond to performances that represent the degree of advantage for the player in obtaining profits, and as described above, they have the relationship of setting b < setting 1 < setting 2 < setting 3 < setting 4 < setting 5 < setting 6. .

On the other hand, the ball payout rate may be low and a certain element may be given more preferential treatment than setting 1. For example, setting b may be more likely to hit a bonus or AT than setting 1, but AT may be difficult to continue, and as a result, setting b may have a lower ball payout rate than setting 1. Also, setting b is easier to hit than setting 2 or setting 3 or higher, but it is difficult to continue winning, and as a result, setting b may have a lower ball payout rate than setting 2 or setting 3.

In the performance G setting suggestion notification, the notification suggesting the currently set setting value is the effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, bass speaker 277, etc. This is performed using the upper speaker 272 or the like. The setting suggestion notification mentioned here includes notifications such as simply turning off a lamp or outputting a warning sound, as well as setting suggestion effects such as displaying a setting suggestion animation on the effect image display device 157. It will be done. Further, even if a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a false setting value is suggested (setting-related presentation, setting-related notification). Furthermore, although a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification) is also included. When setting b is set, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off at the start of the demonstration animation (demo animation) on the effect image display device 157, and when setting values other than setting b are set, the demo animation is turned off. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light up at the start of the process. The demo animation starts when a predetermined period of time has elapsed without any medal insertion (bet operation) after the game ends (after the third stop is performed). Also, if the power is restored (power is turned on) with no bet operations being performed at the time of a power outage, the demo animation will start, but if a setting change is started, the demo animation will start after the setting change is finished. is started. Further, when the chance zone ends, the battle performance ends, the BB ends, and the AT ends, setting suggestion notification is performed 100% in a state where setting b is set. On the other hand, in a state where a setting value other than setting b is set, setting suggestion notification is performed with a predetermined probability of less than 100%. Further, in a state where setting b is set, setting b confirmation notification may be performed once every predetermined number of games (for example, 10 games). Note that in a state where setting b is set, setting suggestion notification indicating that setting b may be not performed may be performed, and only setting b confirmation notification may be performed. Furthermore, when setting b is set, the notification mode may include content that suggests that the player is at a disadvantage (for example, text display or audio output such as "A tough battle continues"). . The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting suggestion notification (performance G) explained above is when setting b is set, and when setting values other than setting b (settings 1, 2, 4 to 6) are set. The setting values other than setting b are almost the same.

Regarding performance H, when setting b is set, only setting b is suggested as setting suggestion notification (setting b confirmed notification that does not suggest settings 1, 2, 4 to 6), and settings other than setting b are In a state where the setting value is set, a setting suggestion notification may also be made that suggests a setting value other than the set value. For example, when setting 5 is set, an odd number confirmation notification is sent to notify that the odd setting value is confirmed, and when setting 2 is set, an even number setting value is set. An example of this is an even number confirmation notification that indicates that the current status is confirmed. In addition, when setting 6 is set, a high setting confirmation notification that indicates that a setting value of 4 or more is confirmed, or a setting 4 or more confirmation notification, or a setting value of 2 or more is set. There are also settings 2 or more confirmation notification that informs that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more has been set, and setting 5 or more confirmation notification that notifies that it is certain that a setting value of 5 or more is set. Note that in a state where setting 6 is set, an effect of notifying only setting 6 as setting suggestion notification (setting 6 confirmation notification) may be performed with a lower probability than the execution probability of setting b confirmation notification. The execution probability (frequency of appearance) of the setting confirmation notification (performance H) explained above is highest when setting b is set (for example, 100% or almost 100%), and when setting 6 is set. the next highest (e.g., 50%), and the remaining settings (settings 1, 2, 4, and 5) have approximately the same probability of execution (e.g., 30%), which is lower than the state with setting 6. %).

FIGS. 5(c) to 5(f) show setting-related notifications using the effect image display device 157, which may be performed at the end of the chance zone, the end of the battle effect, the end of BB, or the end of AT. FIG. 7 is a diagram illustrating an example of setting suggestion notification and setting confirmation notification. The setting-related notification here is a type of notification effect.

FIG. 5C is a diagram showing an example of even number setting suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(c), the words "Even number setting may be possible" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "Maybe even number setting" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting), and the line "Maybe even number setting" is shown in Figure 37(a). This corresponds to an example of character dialogue B shown in . Note that this even number setting suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is an even number setting, or may be performed even when the setting value is a setting other than an even number setting (odd number setting). It's okay. In this case, the setting value may be notified more easily when the setting value is an even number setting than when the setting value is an odd number setting.

FIG. 5D is a diagram showing an example of setting 5 or more suggestion notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(d), the words "I want to eat five or more pieces of sugar cane" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. This character display "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" suggests that the setting value is likely to be 5 or 6, and the line "I want to eat 5 or more sugar canes" is This corresponds to an example of the character line G shown in 37(a). Note that this setting 5 or more suggestion notification may be performed only when the setting value is 5 or 6, or may be performed also when the setting value is 4 or less. In this case, notification may be made easier when the setting value is 5 or 6 than when it is 4 or less. Note that when the setting value is 4 or less, setting b may or may not be included.

FIG. 5E is a diagram showing an example of setting 2 or more confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(e), first of all, the words "Ah, business sorting" are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The text "Ah, business sorting" itself is a notification indicating setting 2 or higher, and the line "Ah, business sorting" corresponds to an example of the character line F shown in FIG. 37(a). Thereafter, the aunt's character BBA appears in the lower left portion of the display screen, and business sorting is performed. For the old woman's character BBA, the words ``Does it have to be 1, or can it be 2 or more?'' are displayed as lines for sorting the business. The notification using this line denies that the setting is 1 and confirms that the setting is 2 or higher. Note that the setting 2 or more confirmation notification may be performed only when the setting is 2 or more, or may be performed also when the setting is 1. Alternatively, in the case of setting 1, the aunt character BBA may not appear.

FIG. 5(f) is a diagram showing an example of setting b confirmation notification. In the effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 5(f), first of all, the words ``Ah, God's announcement'' are displayed on the right side of the panda character PND. The words ``Ah, God's announcement'' itself corresponds to an announcement that suggests setting b. After that, the god character KGG appears in the lower left part of the display screen, and a message is issued. God's character KGG displays the words ``A tough battle will continue'' as a warning. This notification is a notification that confirms setting b, and corresponds to an example of the setting suggestion image H shown in FIG. 35 and the like. Note that setting b confirmation notification is performed only when the setting is b, and is not performed for other setting values. However, in the case of setting values other than setting b, the panda character PND and the words ``Ah, God's announcement'' may be displayed, and the God character KGG may not appear.

In the above, various explanations have been given on the assumption that setting suggestion notifications include setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting confirmation effects, but setting suggestion notifications may also be read as setting suggestion effects, and setting confirmation notifications include setting suggestion effects. It may also be read as a confirmed performance.

In addition, the setting value display 293 displays the currently set game mode (setting value ) is displayed as a number, which can be used to check the currently set game mode. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the setting confirmation process that allows checking the set value is executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300. When the setting key switch 281 is inserted and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value change process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the gaming mode (setting value) changes from 1 → 2 → 4 → 5 → 6 → b → 1 → 2 → ・. . , and the desired game mode can be selected. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the game mode (set value) selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

Note that the period of setting value change operation, that is, the period from the first turning of the setting key clockwise to the last turning of the setting key counterclockwise in the setting value changing operation is also called set value change mode, and is called setting value confirmation operation. The period , that is, the period from the first clockwise operation of the setting key to the last counterclockwise operation of the setting key in the setting value confirmation operation is also referred to as the set value confirmation mode. The start and end of the setting value change and setting value confirmation will be described in detail later, but the start and end conditions of the setting value change mode and the setting value confirmation mode, which were explained in detail using FIG. 3, may be applied.

Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described in detail using FIG. 6. Note that this figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400. The main control section 300 controls the progress of the game, and the sub-control section including the first sub-control section 400 and the second sub-control section 500 controls the performance of the game.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used in internal lottery for winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the hopper unit 180, and a medal payout sensor for the left reel 110. The status of the index sensor, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding bet buttons 130 to 132, and are used to input medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects the input operation when inputting. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals dispensed by the hopper unit 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time you do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives a motor provided for each reel 110 to 112 of the reel unit 700, a drive circuit 324 that drives a blocker solenoid provided in a medal selector 170 that sorts inserted medals, and a hopper. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor provided in the unit 180, various lamps 339 (valid line display lamp 120, notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121 , a storage number display 125, a game information display 126, and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied from the power supply device 252 (see FIG. 3) to the main control unit 300. When the voltage value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The ROM 406 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, lighting patterns of the backlight module 740, data for controlling various indicators, and the like.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418. An upper speaker 272 and a bass speaker 277 are installed on this sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier, the upper speaker 272, and the bass speaker 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. An S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored is connected to the sound source IC 418, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp) are connected to the drive circuit 422 via an input/output interface. 144R, title panel lamp 164, bet button lamp 200, backlight module 740, first effect lamp built in the first chance button 165, second effect lamp built in the second chance button 166, etc.) are connected. There is.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the motor of the shutter 163. The motor 163m of the shutter 163 is a stepping motor, and the drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to the motor 160m in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time. Furthermore, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a switch sensor 427, and this switch sensor 427 detects the depression of the first chance button 165. Further, the switch sensor 427 also detects the depression of each button of the second selection switch 194 consisting of the second chance button 166, the left button 167, and the right button 168. Detection signals from the shutter sensor 428 and the switch sensor 427 are output to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 426.

Furthermore, the rotating device 140 shown in FIG. 1 has a built-in sensor that detects the rotation and direction of rotation of the rotating body 1401, and a detection signal from the sensor is sent to the basic circuit 402 by the sensor circuit 429 shown in FIG. is output to. The CPU 404 monitors reception of this detection signal at every interrupt time.

Further, although the first selection switch sensor 190 is directly connected to the basic circuit 402, this first selection switch sensor 190 may also be connected to the basic circuit 402 via the switch sensor 427 and the sensor circuit 426. .

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface.

The second sub-control unit 500 performs various controls of the effect device 160 including display control of the effect image display device 157. The second sub-control unit 500 includes, for example, a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157, a control unit that controls various drive devices for effect (for example, a control unit that controls motor drive of the shutter 163), and a control unit that controls the display of the effect image display device 157. ) may be configured with a plurality of control units.

The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via an input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The ROM 506 stores control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Processing overview>
The processing of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, and second sub-control section 500 will be described below with reference to the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with a startup signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 338 that outputs a startup signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal has been input is reset-started by a reset interrupt and executes the main control section main processing shown in FIG. 7 according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306.

When the power is turned on, first, main control unit initialization processing is performed in step S101. In this main control unit initialization process, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Permit operation and set initial values. Note that details of this processing will be described later using FIG. 9.

In step S103, a game start process is executed. In this process, it is checked whether or not medals have been inserted (handled or operated by bet buttons 130 to 132), and if medals have been inserted, preparations are made to send an insert command indicating this. Note that if the player wins a prize in the replay in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals. Also, it is checked whether the start lever 135 has been operated while the specified number of medals (2 or 3) have been used, and if the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of inserted medals and the valid winning line are checked. Confirm and start playing.

In step S105, various lottery processes including an internal winning combination lottery process and the like are executed.

In step S107, reel stop data corresponding to the first stop operation is prepared based on the result of the internal winning combination lottery. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S109, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started on the condition that the game interval timer (subtracted in a timer update process described later) is 0, and an initial value is set in the game interval timer. Furthermore, when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, preparations are made to send a reel rotation start command to the first sub-control unit 400. After that, when the reels 110 to 112 reach a predetermined rotational speed and the optical sensor provided on each reel detects the symbol position of each reel, the stop operation for the stop buttons 137 to 139 is enabled. Note that the game interval counter ensures the minimum time required for one game (4.1 seconds in this embodiment) and suppresses the gambling nature.

In step S111, reel stop control processing is executed. In this process, when any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is pressed after the stop operation is enabled, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the pressed stop button 137 to 139 are stopped. Specifically, each time a stop operation is performed, a stop table of reel stop data is referred to, and the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop operation are stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop table. Further, for the first stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the second stop operation is prepared, and for the second stop operation, reel stop data corresponding to the third stop operation is prepared. Note that for each stop operation, preparations are made to send the corresponding command (first to third press commands) to the first sub-control unit 400, and each time the reels 110 to 112 stop, the corresponding command (the first to third press commands) is prepared. Preparations are made for transmitting the first to third stop commands) to the first sub-control unit 400. When all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S113.

In step S113, winning determination processing is performed. Here, when a symbol combination corresponding to some winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line, it is determined that the winning combination has been won. Note that after determining the winning combination, preparations are made for transmitting the winning command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S115, if a winning combination with a payout has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination is awarded (paid out), and the number of medals awarded is displayed using the payout number display 127.

In step S117, a state update process for updating various states in the slot machine 100 is executed.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S103 and repeating the above-described process.

<Main control unit 300 timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S203, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S205, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area. Note that the state of the optical sensor is confirmed through this process.

In step S207, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S209, timer update processing is performed. For example, a process of updating various timers in respective time units, such as subtracting a game interval timer, is executed.

In step S211, command setting transmission processing is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission in the main processing, timer interrupt processing, etc. of the main control section 300 are transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the output schedule information sent to the first sub-control unit 400 includes strobe information (when on, it indicates that data is being set), command type (in this embodiment, basic command, input command, and start lever). Reception command, internal winning command, performance command associated with performance lottery processing, reel rotation start command associated with the start of rotation of reels 110 to 112, first to third press commands associated with acceptance of operation of stop buttons 137 to 139, reel First to third stop commands associated with the stop of 110 to 112, prize winning command, payout number command and payout end command associated with medal payout processing, status update command, item addition command, earned point command, setting change command, power recovery command ), command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S213, external signal setting processing is performed. In this external signal setting process, the gaming information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652, which is separate from the slot machine 100, via the information output circuit 334.

In step S215, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S205, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal dispensing abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, the medal blocker 171, various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators are set according to the current gaming state.

In step S217, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. When a low voltage signal is received (when a power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S221, and when a low voltage signal is not received (when a power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S219. move on.

In step S219, timer interrupt termination processing is performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, processes such as setting the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 to each original register are performed. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S221, information that needs to be saved such as specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at the time of power outage upon power restoration is saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308, and a predetermined area including at least the used area of the RAM 308 is saved. A checksum value for the area is derived and stored in the RAM 308, and a power flag indicating that power-off processing has been performed is set on.

Next, details of the main control section initial setting process (step S101) in the main control section main process of FIG. 7 will be explained using FIG. 9. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit initial setting process (step S101) in FIG.

First, in step S1001 that is executed first, initial settings at startup are performed. This initial setting includes processing such as setting the stack initial value to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), setting the interrupt mask, initial setting of the I/O 310, and initial setting of various variables stored in the RAM 308. conduct.

In step S1003, whether the low voltage signal is on or not, that is, the voltage monitoring circuit 330 determines whether the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment). monitor whether a low voltage signal is output indicating that the voltage has decreased. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects a power cutoff), this step S1003 is repeatedly executed, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 has not detected a power cutoff) Then, the process advances to step S1005. Note that even if the supply voltage does not yet reach the predetermined value (9V) immediately after the power is turned on, step S1003 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage reaches the predetermined value or more.

In step S1005, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 3 is on. If the setting key switch 281 is on (the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch and turned 90 degrees to the right), the process advances to step S1013; otherwise, the process advances to step S1007.

In step S1007, it is determined whether the reset switch 291 shown in FIG. 3 is on. If this switch is on, the process advances to step S1009; otherwise, the process advances to step S1011.

In step S1009, the RAM 308 is initialized, and this main control unit initialization process ends. Note that in this initialization, for example, the setting value is deleted.

In step S1011, RAM data write back processing is executed. In this process, it is first determined whether there is an abnormality in the data stored in the RAM 308. The data determined here is the data saved in the RAM 308 when the power of the slot machine 100 is turned off or when the power is cut off (temporarily lowering the voltage below the operating voltage) (see step S221 in FIG. 8). That is, it is determined in step S1011 whether the data has been reliably saved in the RAM 308. Specifically, it is determined whether the power supply flag is normal (on) and whether the calculation result using the checksum is normal, and if both judgments are normal, the recovery data in the RAM 308 is It is determined that there is no abnormality.

If it is determined that there is no abnormality in the restoration data in the RAM 308, processing is performed to restore the state of the register to the state immediately before the power-off processing was performed. In this RAM data write-back process, for example, the data stored in the RAM 308 is written back to the register of the CPU 304, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage is read, and the stack Reset to pointer (main setting). In addition, after reading out the values of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power outage and resetting them in each register, interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, the CPU 304 executes the control program based on the reset stack pointer and register, and as a result, the slot machine 100 returns to the state at power-off. That is, the process is restarted from the instruction following the instruction executed immediately before branching to timer interrupt processing immediately before the power is cut off. Furthermore, here, a power restoration command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This power recovery command is a command that indicates that the power has returned to the state at power-off. This power restoration command includes information such as RT at the time of power cut, gaming status, performance status, etc., and is transmitted by the main controller timer interrupt process (step S211 in FIG. 8).

On the other hand, if it is determined that there is an abnormality in the recovery data of the RAM 308, preparations are made to clear all the storage areas of the RAM 308 except for the used stack area, and then the state shifts to an infinite loop state (RAM error processing). . From this state, it is necessary to turn on the power again with the RAM clear switch or setting key switch turned on. That is, the present embodiment is configured such that if an error occurs in the RAM 308, the progress of the game is stopped.

In step S1013, which is proceeded to when the setting key switch 281 is on in step S1005, a setting change process is executed according to the state of the setting key switch 281, and this main control unit initial setting process is ended. Note that details of this setting change process will be described later using FIG. 10.

Next, details of the setting change process (step S1013) in the main control unit initial setting process of FIG. 9 will be described using FIG. 10. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the setting change process (step S1013) in FIG.

First, in step S1101 that is executed first, data in the RAM 308 is cleared, and the process advances to step S1103. Note that the data cleared here includes the value of the set value.

In step S1103, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that a setting change has started to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 8) is executed, and the process advances to step S1105. As a result, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In step S1105, the interrupt status is set to changing settings, and the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1107, the temporary setting value is set as the display setting value. Through this process, a temporary setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293. After that, the process advances to step S1109.

In step S1109, it is determined whether the operation of the setting change button 292 has been accepted. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1111; otherwise, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1111, the temporary setting value is updated. In this embodiment, each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the temporary setting values are updated one by one according to the display order explained using FIG. When is operated, the temporary setting value is set to 1. After this, the process advances to step S1113.

In step S1113, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated. If this condition is met, the process advances to step S1115; otherwise, the process advances to step S1107.

In step S1115, a process of determining the temporary setting value as a setting value is executed, and the process advances to step S1117. That is, the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135. When the set value is determined, a display indicating that the set value is determined (in this case, the number 0) is displayed on the set value display 293. Note that once the set value is determined, the set value display 293 may continue to display the determined set value, may be switched to a blinking display, or may be non-displayed.

In step S1117, it is determined whether the setting key switch 281 is off (the setting key switch 281 is turned 90 degrees to the left and the setting key is removed). If this condition is satisfied, the process advances to step S1119, and if not, this step S1117 is repeatedly executed.

In step S1119, preparation for transmitting a setting change command indicating that the setting change has been completed to the first sub-control unit 400 (sent in step S211 in FIG. 8) is executed. As a result, the display of the setting change in progress display on the effect image display device 157 ends. Further, in this process, the interrupt status is returned to the status before being changed in step S1105. After this process, this setting change process ends.

Note that in the termination condition of the setting change processing shown in FIG. 10, the open/closed state of the front door 102 is irrelevant, but the termination condition is that the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the front door 102 is closed. Good too. Further, although the set value is determined by operating the start lever 135, the set value may also be determined by turning off the setting key switch 281.

Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 11. Note that FIG. 11A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 11(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 11C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, in step S301, various initial settings are performed. This initial setting is executed when the power is turned on. In this process, initial settings of input/output ports, initial settings of various variables stored in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively. Note that the performance state of the first sub-control unit 400 is set to the initial state. Furthermore, if backup is being performed at the time of power outage, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S303, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S305.

In step S305, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S307, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S309, production control processing is performed. Here, the processing includes processing to expand the effect data and setting device data in the effect execution area provided in the RAM 408, processing to set the effect data in the effect reservation area provided in the RAM 408, and furthermore, the received command Based on the information included in the command and the detection signal acquired in step S333, which will be described later, processing such as setting performance data and executing control processing is performed. Note that the performance data set in the performance reservation area and the device data set in the performance execution area may be updated (overwritten) with different data. In this case, the presentation content is changed based on the overwritten data.

In step S311, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, control data is acquired from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the speakers 272 and 277, and the acquired control data is output to the sound source IC 418, thereby causing a sound performance to be executed.

In step S313, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to each type of lamp 420 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 422, the performance using the lamps is executed.

In step S315, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S309. For example, by acquiring control data from device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the shutter 163 and outputting the acquired control data to the drive circuit 424, the performance by the shutter 163 is executed.

In step S317, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a control command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S309. For example, if there is device data set in the performance execution area corresponding to the performance image display device 157, preparations are made to transmit this device data to the second sub-control unit 500, and the process returns to step S303.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 11(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S321 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408. For example, if a settings change command is received, the settings change command is stored in the command storage area.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 11(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S331, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S303 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 11A, and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S303, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S333, the device data set in step S317 is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500, and the random value for effect is updated. Further, for example, if a settings change command is stored in the command storage area, the fact that the settings have been changed is updated and recorded in the RAM 408. Further, the setting change command includes information representing the setting values before and after the setting change, and this information is also recorded in the RAM 408. Further, for example, if a detection signal is transmitted from a sensor built into the rotating device 140, the detection signal is acquired and recorded in the RAM 408.

<Processing of second sub-control unit 500>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 12. Note that FIG. 12A is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 12(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 12(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 12(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S401 of FIG. 12(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S401. In this initialization process, input/output port initial settings, various variables stored in the RAM 508, etc. are initialized. Note that if backup is being performed at the time of power outage, the information backed up in step S301 is returned.

In step S403, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S405.

In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S407, command processing is performed. In the command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S409, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S407, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S411, image control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S409. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S409, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. This image control processing will be described later using FIG. 12(d). When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S403.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 12(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400. In step S415 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 12(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S417, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S403 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 12(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S403, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S419, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S411 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 12(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S421, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 518. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S423, it is determined whether or not the transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 has been input. If the transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S425; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S425, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S421, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (placement coordinates), image overlay and transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S427, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S429, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S431; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S431, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

Next, a setting change in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be explained. The setting change process is started by inserting a setting key into the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 3 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244.

FIG. 13 is a table summarizing the procedure for setting setting b by setting change and the states of related components. In FIG. 13, each stage is numbered from (a) to (b), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 14 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (a) to (b) in FIG. 13.

In FIG. 13, component items include power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left The following items are shown: a side lamp 144L, a right side lamp 144R (top side lamp), an upper speaker 272, and a bass speaker 277 (speaker). Further, FIG. 14 schematically shows the setting value display 293, the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164, the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L and the right side lamp 144R, and the speakers (272, 277). has been done.

In FIG. 13A, the power switch 244 is in an off state, and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the off state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). In FIGS. 14A and 14B, the state in which the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) are turned off is shown without a pattern and in solid white (the same applies below).

In FIG. 13(A), the front door 102 is opened, the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and the setting key is rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 13C, the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the open sensor 294 starts outputting an open detection signal, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. In FIG. 14C, the state in which the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white is represented by hatching downward to the left (the same applies below). Further, as described above, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started by inserting the setting key into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise to turn it on, and then turning on the power switch 244. . When the setting change process is started, RAM is cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10), and "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as the default setting value. Furthermore, when the setting change process is started, a setting change in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that the setting is being changed, and the speaker (272, 277) also indicates that the setting is being changed. A voice notification (“Settings are being changed”) will now be output.

In FIG. 13(D), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "2" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 13(e), the setting change button 292 is pressed twice, and "4" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 13(f), the setting change button 292 is pressed once, and "5" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value.

In FIG. 13 (g), the setting change button 292 is pressed one more time, and setting 6 is displayed as a temporary setting value on the setting value display 293, and in the same figure (h), the setting change button 292 is pressed one more time. When pressed, "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293 as a temporary setting value. Comparing the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 14 (g) with the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. An unauthorized person attempting to change the number may mistake the display of "b" for the display of "6".

In FIG. 13(e), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 10), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Here, setting b is determined. Note that when the start lever 135 is operated, the set value display 293 may be hidden as described above. Further, the setting value may not be determined by operating the start lever 135, but may be determined by turning the setting key switch 281 into the OFF state.

In FIG. 13(C), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the OFF state by turning it counterclockwise. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 10), and seven segments of the setting value display 293 go out and become non-displayed. Furthermore, the effect image display device 157 starts displaying the demo animation. If the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the off state, the display of the demo animation will start immediately after the power is turned on, but since the power is turned on with the setting key switch 281 in the on state, the setting change process will be delayed. will start after it has finished. In this case, the display of the demo animation is started from the beginning. Alternatively, the demo animation display was played immediately after the power was turned on, but the settings changing display overlapped and could not be seen, and even if it became visible from the scene at the time the settings changing display disappeared. good. Furthermore, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demonstration lighting pattern (demo pattern). In FIG. 14C, the lighting of the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R in a demo pattern is represented by square hatching (the same applies below). On the other hand, only the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. That is, the title panel lamp 164 is lit while the settings are being changed, but turns off when the settings are changed, and remains off until medals are inserted (until the number of bets of 1 or more is set). . Turning off the title panel lamp 164 corresponds to notification regarding the setting value, more specifically, notification that the setting value is set to a certain setting value (the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player). Furthermore, since the title panel lamp 164 remains lit during normal times, the turning off of the title panel lamp 164 can also be interpreted as notification of an abnormality (notification regarding a set value abnormality).

In FIG. 13(sa), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off.

In FIG. 13(b), medals are inserted. That is, the medals are taken care of or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated. As a result, the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern). In FIG. 14(b), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a normal pattern is represented by cross hatching (the same applies below). Meanwhile, the title panel lamp 164, which had been turned off, also starts to turn on. The title panel lamp 164 may start to light up when the front door 102 is closed, it may continue to turn off when medals are inserted, and it may start to light up when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or the title panel lamp 164 may start to turn on when the front door 102 is closed, or may continue to turn off when a medal is inserted, and start turning on when the game starts (operation of the start lever 135), or when the first It may start to turn on at the third stop of the game, or it may start to turn on when the payout of the first game is completed.

FIG. 15A is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is repeatedly opened and closed with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 15(a), each stage is numbered from (ta) to (nu), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, FIG. 16 schematically shows the state of the components at each stage from (ta) to (nu) in FIG. 15(a).

In FIG. 15A, the same items as in FIG. 13 are shown as component items, and in FIG. 16A, each component is schematically shown in the same way as in FIG.

FIG. 15(T) may be a continuation from FIG. 13(C), and the game has already started with setting b set. That is, there is a case where the game is started while ignoring the notification due to the title panel lamp 164 being turned off. In FIG. 15(T), the third stop is performed, and the reel stop sound is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 15(H), a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) elapses after the third stop is performed without medals being inserted. Then, the effect image display device 157 switches from the normal background display to the demonstration animation display. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from normal pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting. Here, if setting b remains set, when the demonstration animation starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is restored. Note that the title panel lamp 164 may be turned off and setting-related notifications may be started not only when a demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157 but also when a demonstration effect is started or when a demonstration state is entered. .

In FIG. 15(T), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs a detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern. That is, the title panel lamp 164, which had been turned off, also ends the setting-related notification and starts lighting the door opening pattern. In FIG. 16(T), the state in which the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a door opening pattern is represented by hatching downward to the right (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross hatching in FIG. 14(b). With the front door 102 opened, there is a possibility that settings will be changed, so the setting-related notification by the title panel lamp 164 ends. The speakers (272, 277) begin to output the voice "The door is open." Note that although the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, the characters "door opening" may be displayed together with the demonstration animation.

In FIG. 15(TE), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed without any setting change after the front door 102 was opened. To change settings, the setting key switch 281 must be turned on while the power switch 244 is off, so the power switch 244 must be turned off before a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) elapses. If not, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off again, and setting-related notification is started. This setting-related notification prompts the user to change the settings. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are changed from the door opening pattern lighting to match the demonstration animation display on the effect image display device 157. Switches to demo pattern lighting. That is, the warning notification for a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) by lighting the door opening pattern is ended, and the lighting pattern returns to the demo pattern.

In FIG. 15(G), the front door 102 is closed. The detection signal (H level signal) is no longer output from the open sensor 294 (switched to the L level closed detection signal). The speakers (272, 277) output a voice saying "The door is closed." On the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also continue to be lit in a demo pattern. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and setting-related notifications continue to be made.

In FIG. 15(N), the front door 102 is opened again, and each component is in the same state as in FIG. 15(T) described above.

In FIG. 15(2), the front door 102 is closed again one second after the front door 102 is opened in FIG. 15(na). The open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal). The speakers (272, 277) immediately switch from the voice saying "The door is open" to the voice saying "The door is closed." On the other hand, even if the front door 102 is closed, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to illuminate in the door open pattern for the predetermined time period after the front door 102 is opened. As a result, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started until the predetermined time has elapsed after the front door 102 is opened. Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157.

In FIG. 15(N), a predetermined time (30 seconds in this example) has elapsed since the front door 102 in FIG. 15(N) was opened. As a result, a predetermined period of time (30 seconds in this example) has passed since the front door 102 was opened without any settings being changed, the title panel lamp 164 turns off, and setting-related notifications are started. . Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from door opening pattern lighting to demo pattern lighting in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is turned off in FIG. 15 (N) because the front door 102 is closed with setting b still set and medals are not inserted until the predetermined time elapses. It can be considered that the setting-related notification is started by turning off the lamp 164, and if the medal is inserted before the predetermined time elapses, the setting-related notification by turning off the title panel lamp 164 is not started.

In the example shown in FIG. 15(a) described above, when the demo animation is started with the setting value set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 turns off (FIG. 15(g)), but other The title panel lamp 164 may be turned off depending on the conditions, for example, if the player enters a non-recommended gaming state (so-called penalty bonus) that is more disadvantageous to the player than the normal gaming state (for example, if the player does not follow a specific push order navigation The title panel lamp may also be turned off (after releasing the third stop button). In the non-recommended gaming state, no lottery including the AT lottery is held, and the number of medals for the player remains the same or decreases slightly, but the non-recommended gaming state continues until the predetermined number of medals are paid out. Therefore, it takes a considerable amount of time to return to a state where you can increase the number of medals. When entering a non-recommended gaming state, a suggestive display indicating that the non-recommended gaming state is entered may be performed on the effect image display device 157. (from the time the penalty bonus ends) may be displayed continuously. Furthermore, in the non-recommended gaming state, the demo animation may not be displayed, and the title panel lamp 164 may remain off during both playing and non-gaming. Note that it may be possible to enter the non-recommended gaming state regardless of the setting value (even other than setting b), or to enter the non-recommended gaming state only when the setting value is set to setting b. It's okay.

FIG. 15(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when the payment operation is performed immediately after the third stop with the setting value set to setting b. In FIG. 15(b), the payment button 134 starts from (ta) in the same state as (ta) shown in FIG. . That is, the payment operation is performed before a predetermined time (30 seconds) has elapsed without medals being inserted after the third stop. When the payment operation is performed, the performance image display device 157 starts displaying a demo animation. Further, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. Furthermore, the speakers (272, 277) output game media payout sound. Further, FIG. 16(N) schematically shows the configuration of the components in FIG. 15(N). In FIG. 16(N), horizontal hatching indicates that the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned on in a payment pattern (the same applies below). Note that these lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) may be lit in the same pattern as the normal pattern shown by cross hatching in FIG. 14(b).

In FIG. 15(J), the payout of game media is completed. FIG. 16(J) schematically shows the components in FIG. 15(J). Even after the payout is completed, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the title panel lamp 164 is turned off. On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are switched from lighting in the payment pattern to lighting in the demo pattern in accordance with the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157. Note that the output from the speakers (272, 277) is stopped.

To summarize the conditions for the title panel lamp 164 to turn off as explained above, if the setting key switch 281 is turned off while setting b is set (FIG. 13(c)), the setting b is set. If the demo animation is started in (Figure 15 (H), the result is the same in Figure 13 (C)), if the payout according to the payment operation is completed with setting b set ( Figure 15(f)) is an example.

FIG. 17(a) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting 1, which is the default setting value, being set. In FIG. 17(a), each stage is numbered from (c) to (f), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, in the upper part of FIG. 18, the state of the constituent elements at each stage from (c) to (f) in FIG. 17(a) is schematically shown.

(c) in FIG. 17(a) is the same as (te) shown in FIG. 15(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the difference from (te) is that the setting value Since this is not set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 does not go out and continues to be lit in white. Although demo pattern lighting is not executed in the title panel lamp 164, it may be executed, and in that case, the white lighting becomes demo pattern lighting. In FIG. 18(c), the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, which is represented by hatching downward to the left.

17(a), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and confirmation of set values is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1", which is the current setting value. In addition, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to inform that the settings are being confirmed, and a voice (“Settings confirmation ”) will now be output. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from lighting in a demo pattern to white lighting. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 18(H) displays "1", which is the current setting value. Further, the title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R shown in FIG. 18(A) are all lit white.

(F) in FIG. 17(a) is the same as (C) shown in FIG. 15(A), with the setting key switch 281 turned off. This is the point at which the confirmation ends, and the point at which the title panel lamp 164 does not go out but continues to light in white because the setting value is not set to setting b. In FIG. 18(F), the setting value display 293 is hidden. Also, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), only the title panel lamp 164 continues to light up in white, and the remaining lamps (144T, 144L, 144R) display demo patterns represented by square hatching. It is switched on.

(f) in FIG. 17(a) is the same as (sa) shown in FIG. 15(a), with the front door 102 closed; the difference from (sa) is that the title panel lamp 164 is also here. It becomes a point that continues to be lit white.

FIG. 17(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting 1 set. In FIG. 17(b), each stage is numbered from (ka) to (ke), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, the lower part of FIG. 18 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the components at each stage from (k) to (k) in FIG. 17(b).

(c) in FIG. 17(b) is the same as (c) shown in FIG. 17(a), 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (c) are as follows. That's right. First, as explained using FIG. 17(h), the display of the demonstration animation on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the title panel lamp 164 remains lit in white without being extinguished, but its brightness is lowered (reduced). On the other hand, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 18(a) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 has become dark and the title panel lamp 164 has also become dark. It is also shown that the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off.

At (ki) in FIG. 17(b), as in (hi) shown in FIG. 17(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. . Even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off while the settings are being checked, and will be the same as in non-power saving mode. The appearance of each component shown in FIG. 18(B) is the same as the appearance of each component shown in FIG. 18(H) directly above it.

At (x) in FIG. 17(b), like (f) shown in FIG. 17(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and the setting confirmation has been completed. By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 18(d), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started has become dark, and the title panel lamp 164 has also become dark. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are off.

17(b) is the same as (f) shown in FIG. 17(a), in which the front door 102 is closed. The effect image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change in terms of dimming or extinguishing from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

FIG. 19A is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed with setting b set. In FIG. 19(a), time passes in the order of (te), (b), (k), and (sa).

(TE) in FIG. 19A is the same state as (TE) shown in FIG. 15A, 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and is exactly the same state as (TE). That is, the setting value display 293 is not displayed, and the demonstration animation is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is off, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are lit in a demo pattern.

In (B) of FIG. 19A, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. The only difference from (H) in FIG. 17A is the setting value displayed on the setting value display 293. That is, in (B) in FIG. 19A, the current setting value "b" is displayed on the setting value display 293. The setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 20(B) displays "b", which is the current setting value. As in FIG. 18(H), in FIG. 20(B) as well, a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a voice saying "Settings confirmation is in progress" is output from the speakers (272, 277). has been done. Further, the title panel lamp 164 is lit in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also lit in white.

(C) in FIG. 19A is the same state as (C) shown in FIG. 13, in which the setting key switch 281 is turned off, and is exactly the same state as (C). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is executed.

(Sa) in FIG. 19(a) is the same state as (sa) shown in FIG. 13, with the front door 102 closed, and is exactly the same as (sa). That is, the title panel lamp 164 continues to be turned off, and the setting-related notification continues to be executed.

FIG. 19(b) is a table summarizing the states of related components when setting confirmation is performed in the power saving mode with setting b set. In FIG. 19(b), each stage is labeled with a code from (ga) to (ge), and time elapses in alphabetical order. Further, the lower part of FIG. 20 is a diagram schematically showing the state of the constituent elements at each stage from (g) to (g) in FIG. 19(b).

(Ga) in FIG. 19(b) is the same as (TE) shown in FIG. 19(a), which is the state in which 30 seconds have passed since the front door 102 was opened, and the differences from (TE) are as follows. That's right. First, the demonstration animation displayed on the effect image display device 157 is displayed darker (reduced light) than in the non-power saving mode. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off due to the power saving mode setting. FIG. 20(g) shows how the display screen of the effect image display device 157 has become dark. Note that the title panel lamp 164 is off, and setting-related notification is being executed. Furthermore, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are also turned off.

At (g) in FIG. 19(b), as in (b) shown in FIG. 19(a), the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the power is turned on, and setting value confirmation is started. , (B) is exactly the same state. That is, even if the power saving mode is set, the lights will not be dimmed or turned off during the setting confirmation, and will be the same as in the non-power saving mode. Note that the display of the set value display 293 and the like are different from (c) in FIG. 17(b). That is, "b" is displayed as in the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. 20(g).

At (g) in FIG. 19(b), the setting key switch 281 is turned off and the setting confirmation has been completed, similar to (c) shown in FIG. 19(a). By completing the setting confirmation, each component has returned to the state according to the power saving mode. That is, as shown in FIG. 20(g), the display screen of the effect image display device 157 where the display of the demo animation has started is darkened, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R are turned off. are doing. Note that the state of the title panel lamp 164 is different from (x) in FIG. 17(b). That is, since the setting is set to b, the title panel lamp 164 is turned off and the setting-related notification is being executed, as shown in FIG. 20(g).

(b) in FIG. 19(b) is the same state as (b) shown in FIG. 19(a), with the front door 102 closed. The effect image display device 157 and the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) do not change in terms of dimming or extinguishment from the state in which the previous setting key switch 281 was turned off.

Next, a modification of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 will be described.

<About the size relationship of the payout rate>
First, we will show examples of the winning probability and state transition of winning combination groups, as well as the relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all roles including replay, which is a replay role, and the actual payout rate that takes into account roles other than replay. A slot machine that can converge the payout rate to a suitable range by devising the following will be described. Specifically, in the slot machine in this modified example, the situations that can be controlled according to the progress of the game include the first situation (RT2, described later) in which the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, as described below. By creating a second situation (RT1, described later), which is the exact opposite of the first situation and in which the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate, the payout rate can be converged to a suitable range. can be done. Note that the slot machine according to this modification also includes the technical matters explained using FIGS. 1 to 20.

Here, the payout rate is the rate calculated by dividing the total number of medals paid out when the symbols corresponding to the small role are stopped by the total number of medals set as the number of bets. . Also, the total payout rate that takes all the winning combinations into account is, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with a bet of 3 coins, 3 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 3 medals are bet in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (first payout rate) calculated as follows. On the other hand, the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replay means that, for example, when a replay win is won in a game with 3 bets, 0 medals are paid out due to the replay win, and 0 medals are paid out in the next game. This refers to the payout rate (second payout rate) calculated assuming that a bet has been made.

FIG. 21(a) is a diagram for explaining the transition of the gaming state in the slot machine in this modification. In the slot machine in this modified example, RT0 is the base gaming state (for example, a state in which most of the game is played, a state to be transitioned to due to a setting change, etc.), and a predetermined state in RT0. The gaming state transitions between a plurality of types of states including RT1, which is transferred by winning a transition combination A, and RT2, which is transferred by winning a predetermined transition combination B in RT0. In each of RT0 to RT2, one game can be started by setting the number of bets to three. After transitioning to RT1 or RT2, the game will be transitioned back to RT0 by playing the prescribed number of games 100 times. In RT0 in the slot machine in this modified example, in addition to the transition role A and the transition role B, a lottery is held to determine whether or not to win a bonus role, a replay role, a small role, etc., and if the payout rate is less than 1, It is determined that it will become. In addition, in the slot machine in this modification, if a bonus combination is won in any of RT0 to RT2, the payout rate is transitioned to a bonus state of 1 or more, but for convenience of explanation, FIG. It is omitted from a). Note that the slot machine in this modification may be one in which the gaming state is changed between states including RT1 and RT2 without providing RT0.

FIG. 21(b) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT1 and the winning probabilities. In RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including 3-card roles with a payout of 3 cards, and push order roles that can pay out 15 cards, etc. will be subject to the lottery. It is determined. The 3-card combination always wins a prize in a winning game regardless of the pressing order or operation timing (operation mode). On the other hand, with the push order combination, when the presses are operated in a predetermined order (corresponding to the advantageous operation mode described above), a prize is won and 15 pieces are paid out, but when the push order is not operated in the predetermined order, no prize is won (other It may be possible to win a winning hand (for example, a one-card hand).

The probability of winning the bonus role is set to be 1/250 when the set value is "b", "1", or "2", and 1/200 when the set value is "4" to "6". It is determined that Therefore, the probability of winning the bonus combination in RT1 is set in two stages: when the set values are "b", "1", and "2", and when the set values are between "4" and "6". There is. In addition, the winning probability of replay b among the replay winning combinations is set to be a low probability (for example, 5/200, etc.) regardless of the setting value, while the winning probability of the push winning combination among the small winning combinations is , is determined to have a high probability (for example, 60/200, etc.) regardless of the set value. Note that even if the winning combination is won in RT1, the navigation effect that allows identification of an advantageous operation mode will not be executed (that is, it will not be controlled by AT). Therefore, even if the winning combination is won, the probability of winning is 1/6, and the probability of not winning is 5/6, for example.

On the other hand, regarding the winning probability of Replay a among the replayable roles and the winning probability of the 3-card role among the minor roles, the total winning probability is set to be uniform (for example, 50/200, etc.). , the ratio of winning probabilities of replay a and 3-card combination are determined to be different for each set value. Specifically, when the set values are "b" and "6", replay a has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.), while a 3-card combination has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.). It is determined that it will become. When the set values are "1" and "5", both the replay a and the three-card combination are determined to have medium probabilities (for example, 25/200, etc.). When the set values are "2" and "4", it is determined that replay a has a high probability (for example, 35/200, etc.), while a 3-card combination has a low probability (for example, 15/200, etc.). ing.

FIG. 21(c) is a diagram for explaining some of the winning combinations to be drawn in RT2 and the winning probabilities. In RT2, similar to RT1, bonus roles, replay roles including replay a and replay b, small roles including a 3-card role with a payout of 3 cards, a push order role that can pay out 15 cards, etc. are subject to lottery winnings. It is determined that The winning probability of replay b in RT2 is set to be higher than that in RT1 (for example, 45/200, etc.), but the winning probability of other roles is the same as that in RT1. It is determined that it will become. Moreover, when the push order combination is won in RT2, unlike RT1, a navigation effect is executed that makes it possible to specify an advantageous operation mode. Therefore, when the winning combination is won in RT2, unless the operation mode is incorrect, the winning combination will be won and 15 medals will be paid out. Note that the winning combinations to be drawn in RT2 are not limited to those determined in the same manner as in RT1, but may be determined differently.

In addition, in RT1 and RT2, the total winning probability for Replay a and the 3-card combination (which is also the total winning probability because the player always wins when winning) is the same regardless of the setting value. However, when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, they differ depending on the set value. For example, when the setting values are "b" and "6", the probability of winning/winning Replay a is low, so the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively small, whereas the setting value is " When the set values are "1" and "5", the difference becomes relatively large, and when the set values are "2" and "4", the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate becomes maximum. In addition, for both setting values 1 to 3, which affect the winning probability of the bonus combination, and setting values 4 to 6, the setting values that make the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate relatively small, and the total payout rate and It is determined to include a set value where the difference from the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is maximum.

An example of such payout rates for RT1 and RT2 will be described with reference to FIG. 22. Note that the number of medals used to set the number of bets is three, and FIG. 22 illustrates a case where no bonus combination has been won in RT1 and RT2. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1 is 10/100 (= (15 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 10 times. Therefore, in FIG. 22(a), when the replay wins 10 times in 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. In addition, the "total number of IN coins" and "actual number of IN coins" are both the number of medals used to set the number of bets, but the "total number of IN coins" is the number including the number of medals automatically set after replay winnings. On the other hand, the "actual number of IN coins" is different in that it is the number excluding the number of coins automatically set after a replay win (the number of coins with the bet number after a replay win as "0"). In addition, the "total number of OUT medals" and "real number of OUT medals" are both the number of medals paid out when winning a small role, but the "total number of OUT medals" is the number of medals paid out when winning a replay prize. The difference is that the "actual IN number" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning, whereas the "actual number of IN coins" is the number of coins assumed to be paid out at the time of replay winning.

As shown in Figure 22(a), if Replay wins 10 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 270 (=300 sheets - 10 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" has become "150", and the "actual number of OUT sheets" in this case is "120" (=150-10 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.444 (≈120÷270), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

Next, FIG. 22(b) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1 is 20/100 (= (35 + 5) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 20 times. Therefore, in FIG. 22(b), when the replay wins 20 times in 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT1, " Examples of the total number of IN coins, the actual number of IN coins, the total number of OUT coins, and the "actual number of OUT coins" are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 22(b), if the replay wins 20 times in RT1 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 240 (=300 sheets - 20 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "150" as in Fig. 22(a) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 21(b). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "90" (=150-20 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 0.375 (=90÷240), while the total payout rate is 0.500 (=150÷300).

As mentioned above, during RT1, the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, but as shown in Figure 22(e), regardless of the setting value (for any setting value) It can be said that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate. Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and the "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 22(a) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and the 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 22(a) and FIG. 22(b). From this, it can be seen that the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT1. Become. In addition, during RT1, although the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are less than 1, which is disadvantageous for the player. It can be a state.

On the other hand, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value, the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value (no matter which setting value is used). The situation is higher. This will be explained below.

The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2 is 30/100 (= (15 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 30 times. In FIG. 22(c), the total number of IN coins is calculated when replays win 30 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "b" or "6" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 22(c), if the replay wins 30 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (=100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 210 (=300 sheets - 30 times x 3 sheets). Further, it is assumed that the "total number of OUT sheets" is "600" as a result of the navigation performance, and in this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "510" (=600-30 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.429 (≒510÷210), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

Next, FIG. 22(d) will be explained. The probability of winning a replay when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2 is 40/100 (= (35 + 45) / 200), so 100 games (G) During this period, you can expect to win an average of 40 times. In FIG. 22(d), the total number of IN coins is calculated when replays win 40 times during 100 games (G) when either the setting value "2" or "4" is set during RT2. ”, “Actual number of IN coins”, “Total number of OUT coins”, and “Actual number of OUT coins” are shown, and the actual payout rate and total payout rate based on these numbers are shown. As shown in Figure 22(d), if the replay wins 40 times in RT2 over 100 games (G), the "total number of IN coins" will be "300" (= 100 games (G) x 3 coins), and the "real The number of IN sheets is 180 (=300 sheets - 40 times x 3 sheets). In addition, the "total number of OUT pieces" is assumed to be "600" as in Fig. 22(c) because the total probability of replay a and 3-card combination is uniform as shown in Fig. 21(c). In this case, the "actual number of OUT sheets" is "480" (=600-40 times x 3 sheets). Therefore, the real payout rate is 2.667 (≒480÷180), while the total payout rate is 2.000 (=600÷300).

As described above, during RT2, although the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value as described above, as shown in FIG. It can be said that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate even if the set value is . Note that the period between 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2 is not shown. However, the "total number of IN coins" and "total number of OUT coins" are the same as in FIG. 22(c) etc. because the number of played games and the total probability of replay a and the 3-card combination are uniform. Furthermore, the number of replay winnings, the "actual number of IN coins" and the "actual number of OUT coins" may be probabilistically between the values shown in FIG. 22(c) and FIG. 22(d). From this, it can be seen that the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate for 100 games (G) when either the setting value "1" or "5" is set during RT2. Become. In addition, during RT2, although the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate regardless of the setting value, both the total payout rate and the real payout rate are 1 or more, which is advantageous for the player. It can be a state.

As mentioned above, in the slot machine of this modified example, as a situation that can be controlled, we focus on the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all winnings including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replays, As shown in FIGS. 21(a) and 22(e), by providing a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, For example, compared to a gaming machine where only one of the payout rates can be high, the payout rate can be converged within an appropriate range.

Note that the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT1 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role A, but also when a specific losing symbol combination is stopped, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transitioning from RT0 to RT2 is not limited to winning a predetermined role such as transition role B, but also the stopping of a specific losing symbol combination, playing the game a predetermined number of times, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established due to the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT1 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following. In addition, the trigger for transition from RT2 to RT0 is not limited to the one achieved by playing the game a predetermined number of times, but also the winning of a predetermined combination, the suspension of a specific losing symbol combination, or winning in a predetermined lottery. It may also be established by doing the following.

In addition, the transitional combination A is won at the same time as other combinations a, b, etc. in the lottery, and the operation mode in which the transitional combination A is won according to the type of other combinations in which the transitional combination A is simultaneously won (for example, The order in which the keys are pressed may be set differently. In addition, transitional combination B is won at the same time as other combinations a, b, etc. in the lottery, and an operation mode in which transitional combination B is won according to the type of other combinations in which transitional combination B is simultaneously won (e.g. The order in which the keys are pressed may be set differently. In addition, transitional role A, transitional role B, and other roles a, b, etc. are won at the same time in the winning lottery, and the operation mode is such that transitional role A is won depending on the type of the other simultaneously won roles. , and the operation mode for winning the transition combination B may be determined to be different. In this case, when the transition winning combination A or transition winning combination B is won in RT0, a push order guessing game is generated, thereby making it possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

For example, the transition winning combination A is the RT1 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the winning lottery, and the RT1 transition replay is won according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT1 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, the winning situations in RT0 include a winning situation a in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation b in which the RT1 transition replay is won at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of a, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the RT1 transition replay win, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to make the normal replay a win. , when the winning situation b occurs, the reel control that causes the RT1 transition replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You can also do this.

In addition, transition role B is an RT2 transition replay, which is won at the same time as other normal replays a and normal replay b in the lottery, and the RT2 transition replay is determined according to the type of other normal replays in which the RT2 transition replay is simultaneously won. The manner of operation (for example, the order of pressing) for winning a prize may be determined differently. Specifically, as winning situations in RT0, there are a winning situation c in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay a, and a winning situation d in which the RT2 transition replay wins at the same time as the normal replay b. At the time of c, when the left side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the RT2 transition replay, whereas when the other side is stopped first, the reel control is performed to win the normal replay a. , when winning situation d, the reel control that causes the RT2 transfer replay to win is performed by first stopping other than the left, while the reel control that causes the normal replay b to win is performed by stopping the left first. You may also do so.

In RT0 in this case, when one of the winning situations a to d occurs, it is announced that it is a press order guessing game. Messages such as ``This is your chance! Let them answer correctly on their own!'' are displayed when winning situations c and d are displayed, etc.) to provide fun that makes players think about the order in which they should press the stop button. , it is possible to improve the interest of the game in RT0.

In addition, although FIG. 21(a) illustrates the gaming state transition between RT0 and RT2, the magnitude relationship between the total payout rate that takes into account all winnings including replays and the real payout rate that takes into account winnings other than replays. As shown in Figure 22(e), if there is a situation where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and a situation where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate, then this is the case. It is not limited to.

In addition, in FIGS. 21(b) and 21(c), when comparing the total payout rate and the real payout rate, it can be seen that the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate differs depending on the setting value. The difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate for any of the setting values ``b'', ``1'', ``2'', and setting values ``4'' to ``6'' that affect the winning probability of the bonus role. It has been explained that the set value includes a relatively small set value, a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is relatively large, and a set value where the difference between the total payout rate and the real payout rate is the maximum. However, as shown in Figure 22(e), the winning probability is such that there are situations where the total payout rate is higher than the real payout rate and situations where the real payout rate is higher than the total payout rate. If it is a game where a lottery is held (for example, the winning probability of replay is not set at 0% or 100%), the game state transition shown in FIG. 21(a) or the game state transition shown in FIG. 21(b) This is not limited to the winning combinations and winning probabilities as shown in FIG. 21(c) and the like.

To summarize the characteristics of the slot machine according to the modified example explained above,
``A gaming machine that can variably display multiple types of symbols by setting a predetermined number of gaming values as the number of bets for one game, and that can award gaming values according to the symbols when the variable display stops,
Determine whether or not you have won any of a plurality of roles, including the awarding role that involves the provision of the gaming value and the replaying role that allows you to start the next game without using new gaming value. a prize lottery means for performing a prize lottery;
A stop control means that performs stop control to stop the symbols according to the result of the winning combination lottery;
a setting value setting means for setting one of a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player;
A payout rate obtained by dividing the total number of awards, which is the total number of gaming values awarded when the symbol corresponding to the awarding combination is stopped, by the total number of bets, which is the total number of gaming values set as the number of bets, In a game played with a predetermined number set as the number of bets, when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped, the predetermined number of gaming values are given as a result of the game, and the number of bets in the next game is A first payout rate that counts the gaming value set as the predetermined number, and a predetermined number as the number of bets in a game when the symbol corresponding to the replay combination is stopped. The relationship with the second payout rate, which counts the game value given as 0 in the next game and the game value set as the number of bets in the next game as 0, is higher than the first payout rate. a first situation in which the rate is higher; and a second situation in which the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate;
In the notification state in which an advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is notified, the second payout rate is higher than the first payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. In the non-notification state where the winning combination is high and the advantageous operation mode corresponding to the winning combination in the winning combination lottery is not notified, the first payout rate is higher than the second payout rate regardless of which of the plurality of setting values is set. The payout rate will be higher,
The plurality of types of setting values include at least a first setting value having the most advantageous degree and a second setting value having the most disadvantageous degree, and the setting value is higher than when the second setting value is set. The rate of the first situation is higher when the first setting value is set, and the second setting value is set more often than when the first setting value is set. The game machine is characterized in that the rate at which the second situation occurs is higher when the player is present. ”
become.

Also,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 201],
a notification means [for example, the title panel lamp 164] that can execute a first setting-related notification regarding the setting value [for example, a light-off notification to notify that setting b is set];
a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 196(a)];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the first setting-related notification [for example, notification that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. Lights out notification] can be executed.
The notification means is capable of performing the first setting-related notification also during a second period [for example, a period in which a demonstration performance is being executed];
The first period is a certain period after the operation related to the setting change (for example, the operation of turning off the setting key switch 281 to end the setting change) is performed,
The first period is a period in which no game has been started since the game machine was powered on [for example, from FIG. 204 (c)] [for example, a game has not been started by operating the start lever 135 It is a period of time,
The second period is a certain period after the start of the game [for example, FIG. 206 (H) or FIG. 206 (B)],
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value [for example, setting 1] that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value [for example, setting b] that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a third setting value [for example, setting 6] that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first set value,
The second set value is a set value that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the third set value,
The first set value is a set value that gives the player a lower advantage than the third set value,
The set value display means is capable of displaying 1 as the first set value,
The set value display means is capable of displaying a set value display [for example, b] different from 1 as the second set value,
The set value display means is capable of displaying 6 as the third set value,
The notification means executes the first setting-related notification only when the second setting value is set,
The set value display means is a segment display [for example, a 7-segment LED display],
The segment indicator is configured to turn on the segment indicating the third setting value [for example, the display mode of "6" shown in FIG. The display mode of "b" shown in (a)] lights up all the segments that are lit,
The segment indicator lights only some segments of the segments that are lit when the segment indicating the third setting value is lit when the segment indicating the second setting value is lit;
The set value display means is capable of displaying the second set value next to the third set value [for example, the set value display order shown in FIG. 196(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

Also,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values with different degrees of advantage for the player [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b]. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. This information can be obtained by either a clerk at the game parlor or a player. If you are a clerk at a game parlor, this information will confirm changes to the settings before the store opens, and if you are a player, this information will be important information that will lead to your own profits (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may continue to execute the setting-related notification during the first period (the same applies hereinafter).

The first period may be a period from when the setting change termination operation is executed until the number of bets of 1 or more is set (until medals are inserted) (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that ends when one or more bets are set (the same applies hereinafter). Further, the setting-related notification may be a notification suggesting that a predetermined setting value is set (selected) as the setting value (the same applies hereinafter). The predetermined setting value may be a setting value that provides the lowest advantage to the player among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

The setting-related notification can be read as a setting-related effect, and the notification means can be read as a presentation means (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10],
A notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of providing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means does not perform the setting-related notification if a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The notification means executes the setting-related notification when a setting value [for example, setting 1, 2, 4 to 6] different from the one setting value is set in the first period. It may be something that does not.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10],
Notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The notification means is capable of executing notification regarding a certain setting value [for example, setting b] among the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification;
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The notification means may be set to a certain setting value rather than a setting value different from the certain setting value [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6]. is one in which the setting-related notification is executed more frequently [for example, performance G or performance H shown in FIG. 5(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, it becomes easier to specify that the certain setting value is set by the setting-related notification.

The setting-related notification is a notification that is not executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, and is executed only when the one setting value is set. However, it may be executed when a setting value different from the one setting value is set, including a false notification. However, the execution frequency is as described above.

In the first period, the notification means determines that the setting value is higher when the one setting value is set than when a setting value different from the one setting value is set. Related notifications may be executed frequently, or during a period different from the first period (for example, during a period after the game has started (at the end of the chance zone, at the end of battle performance, at the end of BB) , at the end of AT, etc.), the setting-related notification is more effective when a setting value is set than when a setting value different from the setting value is set. It may be something that is executed frequently.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10],
A notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the plurality of types of setting values one by one in a predetermined display order [for example, the display order shown in FIG. 5(a)];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable, and
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second set value is a set value that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first set value [e.g., setting 1] [e.g., setting b],
The predetermined display order is an order in which the first setting value [for example, setting 1] is displayed and then the second setting value [for example, setting b] is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Furthermore, since a second setting value with a lower degree of advantage for the player is prepared after the first setting value, a cheater who illegally changes the setting value may be able to change the setting value without knowing it. There are cases where the setting value is changed to the second setting value, resulting in a disadvantageous game being played.

The second setting value may be the one setting value, and the notification means may be configured to provide a setting value related to one of the plurality of types of setting values as the setting-related notification. It may be one that can execute notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means may display the currently set setting value (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting value display means displays the currently set setting value, and the setting value change operation means is operated when changing the setting value, and the setting value change operation means is configured to change the setting value of the plurality of types. The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the second setting value may be a setting value that is changed after being changed to the first setting value.

Also, according to the above description,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change unit that performs the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10],
A notification means [for example, title panel lamp 164, effect image display device 157, etc.],
a setting value display means capable of displaying the setting value [e.g., setting value display 293];
A game machine comprising:
The notification means provides the setting-related notification [for example, lights-out notification notifying that setting b is set] during a first period [for example, a period from the end of the setting change until the medal is inserted]. is executable,
The first period is a certain period after a certain operation (for example, turning off the setting key switch 281) is performed,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a first setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The setting value display means is capable of displaying a second setting value that is one of the plurality of types of setting values,
The second setting value is a setting value (for example, setting b) that gives the player a lower degree of advantage than the first setting value [for example, setting 1],
The setting value display means is configured to display a default setting value that is displayed first [for example, a setting value that is displayed for the first time immediately after shipment from the factory, a RAM that includes a storage area (RAM of the main control unit) that stores the setting value, and Display the first setting value [for example, setting 1] as the setting value displayed on the screen or the setting value that will be displayed first when the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area that stores the setting value is lost. is a means,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, after the certain operation is executed, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification. Further, even if the game clerk forgets to change the settings and leaves the default settings as they are, it is easy for the player to play the game.

The default setting value that is displayed first is the setting value that is displayed first when the game machine is initialized. That is, when the game machine is initialized, the first set value is set.

The setting value display means displays the currently set setting value, and the setting value change operation means is operated when changing the setting value, and the setting value change operation means is configured to change the setting value of the plurality of types. The values are changed in a predetermined order, and the first setting value may be a setting value located at the beginning of the predetermined order.

Also,
``The first period is a period in which no game has been started since the power was turned on to the game machine [for example, from FIG. period]
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the player will not suffer any disadvantages due to the setting-related notification being executed during a period when no game has been started.

The fact that the game has never been started may mean that the start lever has never been operated with the number of bets set to 1 or more.

Also,
"The certain operation is an operation related to the setting change [for example, an operation to end the setting change],"
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, when an operation related to the setting change is performed, information regarding the setting value may be obtained through the setting-related notification.

The certain operation may be an operation for terminating the setting change (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The certain operation is an operation that is executed after the setting value is determined [for example, step S1115 in FIG. 10].
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the setting value is determined.

More specifically, the certain operation is an operation to end the setting change process (after turning on the start lever) after confirming the setting value in the setting change process (setting change key is turned on). (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with an operation means [for example, a setting key switch 281] that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation,
The certain operation is an operation of switching the operating means in the on state to the off state [for example, FIG. 13(c)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification after the operating means is switched to the OFF state.

The certain operation may be an operation of switching an operating means (for example, a setting change key) that is turned on when starting the setting change to an off state, and the on state may be the starting state. Alternatively, the off state may be an end state (the same applies hereinafter). That is, the operating means may be a means for switching between starting and ending the setting change when operated (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The setting value display means does not display the setting value when the notification means executes the setting-related notification in the first period [for example, the setting value display 293 shown in FIG. ],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, the information regarding the setting value can be obtained by the notification means executing the setting-related notification, so that the setting value display means does not display redundantly and the control burden is reduced. Ru.

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period when the door body is open [for example, FIG. 13(C)];
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, even when the door body is in an open state, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

The operating means may be operable when the door body is in an open state (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the set value display means (for example, a dedicated 7-segment display) may be invisible when the door body is closed (the same applies hereinafter). In other words, it may be a display means that is normally invisible to the player (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may be configured to perform door open notification when the door body is opened, and may start the setting-related notification when the door open notification ends (hereinafter referred to as same).

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The notification means may execute the setting-related notification in the first period when the door body is closed [for example, FIG. 13 (S)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this game machine, even when the door body is in a closed state, it may be possible to obtain information regarding the setting value through the setting-related notification.

Note that even if the door body is closed during execution of the door open notification, the notification means continues the door open notification until a predetermined period has elapsed from the start, and when the door open notification ends, the setting related notification is sent. (the same applies hereinafter).

The notification means may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is open during the first period, and may execute the setting-related notification even when the door body is closed during the first period. may be executed (the same applies hereinafter).

The setting-related notification may be a notification that continues regardless of whether the door body is opened or closed, and may be a notification that ends when a bet number of 1 or more is set (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
“The notification means executes the setting-related notification only when a certain setting value [for example, setting b] is set as the setting value,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.
According to this gaming machine, by executing the setting-related notification, it is possible to notify that the certain setting value is set as the setting value.

The one setting value may be a setting value that gives the player the lowest degree of advantage among the plurality of types of setting values (the same applies hereinafter). In this case, the clerk at the gaming parlor can notice the low degree of advantage before opening the store by the setting-related notification, and can change the setting value to a higher degree of advantage. You can avoid gaming machines where games are being played.

Let's continue the explanation. As described above, the slot machine 100 of this embodiment is a gaming machine that is premised on playing a game with a bet of three coins. However, you can play the game even if you bet two coins. Therefore, it is designed so that it is more advantageous for the player to play a 3-card bet game when a 2-card bonus is internally won than to play a 2-card bet game when a 3-card bonus is internally won. The bonus internal winning state is made into a normal gaming state so that the player can play the game by betting on three coins as much as possible.

In this way, the normal gaming state of the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment is a 2-bet bet internal winning state, but if a player plays a game with a 2-bet bet and wins a 2-bet bonus, If the bet bonus game is played out, the gaming state becomes a 2 bet bonus non-internal winning state. Alternatively, if the reset switch 291 is pressed, the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state also occurs. Furthermore, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10) is performed, and initialization is automatically performed, resulting in a 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state.

Note that when the setting change process is started, instead of being initialized automatically, it may be possible to select whether or not to initialize. For example, it may be possible to initialize setting values and gaming states using a setting change procedure. More specifically, like when changing settings, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the power turned off. Next, when turning on the power switch 244, while pressing the setting change button 292, the setting value becomes setting 1 and the gaming state becomes a 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state. You can do it like this. Furthermore, it may also be set to a non-advantageous section state. Further, although the initialization process (step S1009 shown in FIG. 10) is executed even when the reset switch 291 is pressed, the initialization process may also be executed when the power is turned on while the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, while the 2-bet bonus game is being played, a display indicating that the 2-bet bonus game is being played is displayed on the effect image display device 157 (for example, a flower shape display). ) is displayed. The remaining number of coins to be paid out, which is a condition for ending the bonus, is also displayed (for example, "remaining coins being spent"). Note that only one of them may be displayed.

In addition, in the slot machine 100 of the present embodiment, a setting that is extremely disadvantageous to the player, such as setting b, which is not originally set, is prepared from the perspective of countermeasures against fraudulent players, etc., and is set to setting b by performing the setting change process. This situation can be avoided. However, even though the setting change processing has been carried out to prevent the player from being significantly disadvantaged, if the 2-bet bet bonus is not internally won, the player will still be disadvantaged in the end. Therefore, a notification indicating that the 2-bet bet bonus is not internally won is made.

In the following explanation, the first gaming state refers to a 2-bet bet bonus non-internally winning state, and the second gaming state refers to a 2-bet betting bonus internally winning state. Note that the first gaming state includes a non-advantageous period state, a non-internal winning state not limited to betting on two coins, the above-mentioned non-recommended gaming state (penalty bonus state), a state in which no items or points have been acquired, or a setting b. The second gaming state can also be applied to a state that is more advantageous than those, for example, an advantageous section state, a bonus internal winning state, a normal gaming state, items and points. A state in which the setting is acquired or a state in which the setting is set to one of settings 1, 2, and 4 to 6 can be mentioned.

Further, the first voice is a warning alert of "Please check." The first display is a text display of "Please confirm", and this text display is also a warning alert.

On the other hand, the second voice is a voice notification of "Completed." The second display is a text display of "Completed".

Furthermore, when the game is started in the 2-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state, a display indicating that a transition to the 2-bet bet bonus internal winning state is being attempted is displayed on the effect image display device 157; A display suggesting that the player is in the non-internal winning state of the 2-piece bet bonus or a display prompting the player to shift to the 2-piece betting bonus internally winning state is displayed. Hereinafter, the notifications based on these displays will be collectively referred to as the "fourth notification." As this fourth notification, for example, "Returning game" is displayed, and the number of games played in a state where the 2-bet bet bonus has not been won internally is displayed. A player who knows about this fourth notification can understand that this slot machine 100 is a disadvantageous slot machine and can avoid it. Note that the fourth notification may be a display that is displayed only when a game is being played with two bets, or may be a display that is displayed regardless of the number of bets.

FIG. 23 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed after the settings have been changed. In FIG. 23, each stage is numbered from (1) to (11), and time elapses in the order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 23 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). . Further, at the bottom, there is provided an item regarding the gaming status.

In FIG. 23(1), the power switch 244 is in an off state and the front door 102 is closed. Open sensor 294 is not functioning. No setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281, and it remains in the off state. Seven segments of the set value display 293 remain unlit and the set value is not displayed. The various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) and monitor LED are also off, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 23(2), the front door 102 is opened, and the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on before the power is turned on. Note that since the power has not yet been turned on, even if the front door 102 is opened, the open sensor 294 does not output a detection signal.

In FIG. 23(3), the setting key switch 281 is in the on state, and the power switch 244 is turned on (power on). As a result, the setting change process in the main control unit 300 is started. The setting value display 293 displays "1" as a default setting value. Note that in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize as described above, if initialization is not performed, the set value at the time of power cutoff stored in the power cutoff processing in step S221 is displayed. A settings changing display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 to notify that the settings are being changed, and the speakers (272, 277) also output a voice ("Settings are being changed") to notify that the settings are being changed. ) will now be output. Further, since the power has been turned on, the open sensor 294 starts outputting a detection signal indicating open detection, and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Furthermore, since the setting key switch 281 is turned on, the monitor LED also starts lighting up. Note that when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, a setting key switch on signal is output from the external centralized terminal board 248 to the external device. Furthermore, the gaming state is the first gaming state (two-bet bet bonus non-internal winning state) because the RAM has been cleared (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10). However, in the case where it is possible to select whether or not to initialize, if the initialization is not performed, the gaming state at the time of power cutoff stored in the power cutoff processing in step S221 is returned. Therefore, there may be a second gaming state (two bet bonus internal winning state).

Once the setting change is started, the setting value is updated every time the setting change button 292 is pressed.

In FIG. 23(4), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 10), and the number 0 indicating the set value is determined is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed," a voice such as "Settings have been changed." may be output.

In FIG. 23(5), the setting key inserted into the setting key switch 281 is turned to the OFF state by turning it counterclockwise. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 10), and the seven segments are turned off and not displayed on the setting value display 293. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. The audio output of "The door is open" that has been switched here corresponds to an example of the third notification. Note that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "setting change is complete" or "setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. When the setting change process is completed, if the gaming state is the first gaming state, a first notification command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. The sub-control unit side (first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500) executes notification control (presentation control) based on this first notification command. As a result, the effect image display device 157 displays a first display of characters such as "Please confirm" as a warning alert.

In FIG. 23 (6), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 23(6) corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to a close detection signal at the L level, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output. Note that on the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 23(7), the front door 102 is opened and all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern. Furthermore, on the effect image display device 157, the demonstration animation continues to be displayed and the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, so the first display such as "Please confirm" also continues to be displayed. However, the sound from the speakers (272, 277) returns to the warning "The door is open." That is, the output of the first sound starts when the front door 102 is closed, and ends when the front door 102 is opened. In many cases, the clerk at the game parlor is already aware that the first gaming state remains due to the output of the first voice and the first display at the timing shown in FIG. In order to avoid this, the output of the first audio is terminated. Note that the process may end when the front door 102 is opened two or more predetermined times. However, since it may be necessary to open the front door 102 during play to clear a hopper error or a ball jam, if the number of predetermined times is more than 2, it may become noisy to the surrounding players. There is.

In FIG. 23 (8), the front door 102 is closed again while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The speaker (272, 277) outputs a voice saying "The door is closed," and the repeated warning alert is not executed. However, on the effect image display device 157, the first display such as "Please confirm" is continuously displayed along with the display of the demo animation. Furthermore, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting the demo pattern again, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting white again. .

In FIG. 23(9), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a gaming parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display). However, the first display, which is a warning notification that the game is in the first gaming state, continues to be displayed. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a lighting pattern for normal performance (normal pattern).

In FIG. 23(10), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 23 (7), instead of or in addition to the first display, a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed.

When the start lever 135 is operated in a two-bet bet state and the two-bet bet bonus is internally won, a notification indicating that the two-bet bet bonus has been internally won is made. For example, an exclamation mark is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, a navigation effect is also performed to help you avoid winning the 2-bet bet bonus. In this navigation performance, a warning sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the performance image display device 157 displays information about the reel stop position where a bonus win can be avoided.

In FIG. 23 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. Here, by operating the start lever 135 for the first time, a two-bet bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and by a stop operation that avoids winning the bonus, the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. On the performance image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display as the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 24 summarizes the states of related components when the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after changing the settings, and the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating. This is a table. In FIG. 24, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21) to (23), and (11), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

In FIG. 24 as well, the same items as in FIG. 23 are shown as component items, and the gaming status item is provided at the bottom (same up to FIG. 29).

Since Figures 24 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 24 (21), after the setting change processing is completed, the front door 102 is left open and medals are inserted, such as cleaning the medals or operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Inserting medals here is a bet of two coins. Since a player usually places a three-coin bet, a two-coin bet is often operated by a clerk at a gaming parlor. In addition, this is often a preparatory operation before the store opens. A medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277), and the effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to the background display of the normal effect (normal background display), confirming that it is in the first gaming state. The first display, which is a warning alert, is continuously displayed. Further, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the door opening pattern.

In FIG. 24 (22), the start lever 135 is operated in a state where two coins are bet, and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Here, when the game is started, the first display may be switched to the fourth notification such as "1 game in progress" as described above. Alternatively, from the stage of FIG. 24 (21), a fourth notification such as "0 games returning" is displayed instead of or in addition to the first display, and when the game starts, "1 game returning" is displayed. May be displayed. Note that since the front door 102 remains open, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) continue to light in the door open pattern.

In FIG. 24 (23), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal). (Switches to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation. When the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level closed detection signal, a first voice such as "Please check" is output from the speakers (272, 277) as a warning alert. In the example shown in FIG. 24, the first sound is output while the reels are rotating. A clerk who is performing maintenance to check whether the reels 110 to 112 rotate can be alerted by voice that the first gaming state is in effect. Further, among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern, and the title panel lamp 164 starts lighting in white. Note that in the effect image display device 157, the normal background display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed.

In FIG. 24 (11), up to the third stop operation is performed. This FIG. 24 (11) is the same as FIG. 23 (11), and the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display due to the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

FIG. 25 shows the relationship in the case where the reel is rotated before closing the front door 102 after the setting is changed, a power outage is restored while the reel is rotating, and the front door 102 is closed while the reel is rotating after the power is restored. This is a table summarizing the status of the constituent elements. In FIG. 25, each stage is numbered (1) to (5), (21), (22), and (25) to (27), and time elapses in the order in which the codes are written. .

Since Figures 25 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

25 (21) and 25 (22) are the same as FIG. Although omitted, the game starts with two bets placed.

In FIG. 25 (25), the power is cut off while the game is being played with two bets (while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating), resulting in the same state as in FIG. 25 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

Subsequently, in FIG. 25 (26), the power is restored and the reels 110 to 112 return to the state immediately before the power cut, with two bets placed. That is, if there is a reel that has already stopped rotating immediately before the power is cut off, that reel remains stopped, and the reel that was rotating immediately before the power cut starts rotating. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. Also, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the door opening pattern lighting. Moreover, the gaming state returns to the first gaming state.

In FIG. 25 (27), the front door 102 is closed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal). (Switches to L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. It turns out. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the speakers (272, 277) do not output the first voice such as "Please confirm." This is to have the staff at the game parlor concentrate on checking the reel rotation after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, the store clerk may notice that the first gaming state is in effect due to this first display.

FIG. 26 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed while the inserted medals are settled and the front door 102 is paid out before the front door 102 is closed after the settings are changed. In FIG. 26, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (32), and time elapses in the order of the symbols.

Figures 26 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 26 (21) is the same as FIG. 23 (21), the explanation of FIG. 23 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

In FIG. 26 (31), the settlement button 134 is pressed in the state of a 2-bet bet, and the hopper unit 180 starts paying out the 2-bet medals and the credit medals. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display even after the start of payout. On the other hand, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277).

In the subsequent FIG. 26 (32), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state remains in the first gaming state, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. 26, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed during the payout process. Even during the payout process, if the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state, the speaker (272, 277) will output a message saying "Please confirm" instead of the payout sound. One voice is output. In the effect image display device 157, the first display continues to be displayed on the normal background display. Note that the first sound may be output together with the payout sound.

FIG. 27 shows the related configuration in the case where a power outage is restored after the power is restored and the front door 102 is closed during the payout after the power is restored, before the front door 102 is closed and the inserted medals are being settled and put out. This is a table summarizing the states of elements. In this FIG. 27, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (21), (31), and (35) to (37), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Since Figures 27 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

Since FIG. 27 (21) is the same as FIG. 23 (21), the explanation of FIG. 23 (21) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here, but medals are inserted.

Since FIG. 27 (31) is the same as FIG. 26 (31), the explanation of FIG. 26 (31) will be used and the detailed explanation will be omitted here. is started.

In FIG. 27 (35), the power is cut off during payout, resulting in the same state as in FIG. 27 (1). However, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power cutoff process in step S221 shown in FIG.

Subsequently, in FIG. 27 (36), the power is restored and the remaining medals that have not yet been paid out begin to be paid out. The effect image display device 157 returns to the state where the first display is displayed on the normal background display. In addition, all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) return to the payment pattern lighting, and the output of the payout sound from the speakers (272, 277) is resumed. Moreover, the gaming state returns to the first gaming state.

In FIG. 27 (37), the front door 102 is closed while the gaming state is in the first gaming state during payout, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 here also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example shown in FIG. Become. If the power is restored before the front door 102 is closed, the first voice such as "Please confirm" will not be output from the speakers (272, 277), and the output sound will not be output. continues. The reason why the first voice is not output is to have the staff at the game parlor concentrate on checking payouts after the power is restored. In addition, since the first display is continuously displayed on the effect image display device 157, the store clerk may notice that the first gaming state is in effect due to this first display. Note that part or all of the payout sound may not be output during the period of paying out the remaining medals after the return.

FIG. 28 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed during setting confirmation after setting changes. In FIG. 28, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (5), (41), and (42), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Since Figures 28 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

In FIG. 28 (41), the setting key switch 281, which was turned off in FIG. 28 (5), is returned to the on state. The state shown in FIG. 28 (41) is a state in which the front door 102 is opened and the power is turned on. In this state, the setting confirmation process is started by turning the setting key switch 281 from the off state to the on state. , the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. Furthermore, the monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 start lighting up. On the effect image display device 157, a setting confirmation display is displayed to inform that the settings are being confirmed, and the first display is also continuously displayed. In addition, the speakers (272, 277) also start outputting a voice (``Settings are being checked'') informing that settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 continues to light in white, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch from lighting in a demo pattern to white lighting.

In FIG. 28 (42), the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state during setting confirmation, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs the detection signal (H level signal) (the L level closed detection signal ). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 28 (42) also corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and in the example in FIG. 28, the front door 102 is closed while the effect image display device 157 is displaying the setting confirmation display. That means that. In this case, the speakers (272, 277) output a first voice such as "Please confirm" instead of the voice such as "Settings are being confirmed." Note that on the effect image display device 157, the setting confirmation display continues, and the first display also continues to be displayed. In the explanation in FIG. 28, the text display such as "Please confirm", which is an alert alert, is referred to as the first display, but the setting confirmation display is referred to as the first display, and the first voice is referred to as the first display. In the example of FIG. 28, the first notification (first voice) is executed while the first display (setting confirmation display) is being displayed.

FIG. 29 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the front door 102 is closed after shifting to the second gaming state after changing the settings. In FIG. 29, each stage is labeled with the symbols (1) to (5), (21), (22), (45), and (46), and time elapses in the order of the symbols. .

Figures 29 (1) to (5) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (5), so the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (5) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the setting change process is started, and the setting change process ends.

29 (21) and 29 (22) are the same as FIG. Although omitted, the game starts with two bets placed.

In FIG. 29 (45), the third stop operation is performed with the front door 102 open, the two-bet bonus internal winning state is obtained, and the gaming state becomes the second gaming state. In the effect image display device 157, a second display of characters such as "Completed" is displayed on the normal background display due to the transition of the gaming state to the second gaming state. In addition, a second voice saying "Completed" is also output from the speakers (272, 277).

In FIG. 29 (46), the front door 102 is closed, and the open sensor 294 no longer outputs a detection signal (H level signal) (switches to an L level closed detection signal). The closing operation of the front door 102 in FIG. 29 (46) corresponds to an example of a certain operation, and corresponds to a certain operation in the second gaming state. As described above, when the detection signal from the open sensor 294 switches to the L-level close detection signal, a door close command is transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, when the door close command is transmitted, based on the fact that the first notification command has been received first, the speaker (272, 277) outputs the warning notification " Please confirm.'' is output, but there is no problem even if it is output, and the advantage is that the control processing does not become complicated. In other words, the clerk is playing a two-bet game knowing the circumstances, and at the third stop stage (stage (45) in FIG. 29), the second display is displayed and the second sound is also output. Furthermore, since the above-mentioned "fourth notification" is not performed in the game that starts after this, the clerk does not have to worry about whether or not the game has shifted to the second game state.

In the examples shown in FIGS. 23 to 29 described above, the closing operation of the front door 102 is performed as a certain operation after the setting change processing is performed. As mentioned above, when the setting change process is started, the RAM clear process (step S1101 shown in FIG. 10) is performed, and the gaming state becomes the first gaming state, so the setting value is actually Regardless of whether the setting is changed or not, if the setting change process is performed, the first sound is output when the front door 102 is closed. This first sound is output even if the gaming state has shifted to the second gaming state as shown in the last example of FIG. That is, the first sound is outputted regardless of whether the gaming state is the first gaming state or not, as long as the setting change process is performed. On the other hand, if the front door 102 is closed without the setting change process being performed, the first sound is not output, but the front door 102 is closed after the reset switch 291 is held down. The first sound may be output when the user is asked to do so. Alternatively, the first sound may be output when the front door 102 is closed in the first gaming state, regardless of whether or not the settings have been changed.

FIG. 30 shows the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a summarized table. In FIG. 30, each stage is numbered from (50) to (59), and time elapses in the order of increasing numbers.

FIG. 30 shows the power switch 244, front door 102, open sensor 294, setting key switch 281, setting value display 293, monitor LED provided on the main control board and external centralized terminal board 248 as component items. , effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L and right side lamp 144R (top/side lamp), upper speaker 272, and bass speaker 277 (speaker). At the bottom is an item for a medal blocker 172 shown in FIG. 4. Note that the gaming state is always the second gaming state (same up to FIG. 34).

In FIG. 30 (50), the power switch 244 is in the on state and the front door 102 is closed. The open sensor 294 outputs a closed detection signal at L level. The setting key switch 281 is in an off state, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The monitor LEDs provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248 are off. A demonstration animation is displayed on the performance image display device 157, a demo pattern is lit on the top lamp 144T, a left side lamp 144L and a right side lamp 144R, and a white color is lit on the title panel lamp 164. Nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). The medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171, and medals passing through the medal passage 171 are stored in the bucket 181. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted from the medal passage 171 or the state in which the medal blocker 172 is retracted will be referred to as non-operation.

In FIG. 30 (51), the front door 102 is opened, and the open sensor 294 outputs an open detection signal (H level signal). All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speakers (272, 277) output a warning voice saying "The door is open." Note that the demonstration animation continues to be displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 30 (52), the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and rotated clockwise, so that the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, with the front door 102 open and the power turned on, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the setting confirmation process is started. The current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. The effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation display to notify that the settings are being confirmed. In addition, the speakers (272, 277) also start outputting a voice (``Settings are being checked'') informing that settings are being checked. The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, when the setting confirmation process is started, the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171, and the medals passing through the medal passage 171 are discharged from the medal payout port 155. Hereinafter, the state in which the medal blocker 172 protrudes into the medal passage 171 or the protrusion thereof will be referred to as operation. While the setting confirmation process is being performed, the medals from the medal slot 141 cannot be maintained. In other words, medals cannot be inserted even if three medals, four or more medals, one or two medals are inserted. Further, operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 are not accepted, or even if accepted, the operations become invalid. Further, the operation of the start lever 135 and the payment operation are not accepted, or are invalid even if accepted.

In FIG. 30 (53), the setting key switch 281 is returned to the OFF state, and the setting confirmation process is completed. The set value display 293 is hidden, and the monitor LED is also turned off. The audio from the speakers (272, 277) changes to "The door is open." In the effect image display device 157, the display of the demo animation is started, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, the left side lamp 144L, and the right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 becomes inactive.

In FIG. 30 (54), the front door 102 is pseudo-closed by manually pushing down the opening/closing piece that protrudes when the front door 102 is opened so that the open sensor 294 cannot detect this opening/closing piece. As a result, although the front door 102 is open, the open sensor 294 outputs a close detection signal of L level. Audio output such as "The door is open" from the speakers (272, 277) disappears.

In FIG. 30 (55), the setting key switch 281 is turned on again. However, the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 here is an ON operation in a state where the open sensor 294 outputs the close detection signal. In the previous explanations such as in FIG. 30 (51), the setting confirmation process was explained to be started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 opened and the power turned on. Strictly speaking, the process starts when the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the open detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294. Therefore, in FIG. 30 (55), since the open detection signal is not output, the setting confirmation process is not started, the setting value display 293 remains hidden, and the effect image display device 157 The demo animation continues to be displayed, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

In FIG. 30 (56), medal insertion such as maintenance of medals or operation of bet buttons 130 to 132 is performed. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). In this way, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, it may be possible to insert medals. Further, even if the setting key switch 281 is in the ON state, there are cases where it is possible to perform a bet operation, a start operation, and a settlement operation. The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern.

In FIG. 30 (57), the hand that was pushing down the opening/closing piece is released, the opening/closing piece protrudes, the open sensor 294 detects the opening/closing piece, and an open detection signal is output. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting the door open pattern, and the speakers (272, 277) output a warning voice saying "The door is open." In the state shown in FIG. 30 (57), the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state. In addition, the state shown in FIG. 30 (57) is also a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set. If the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and a bet number of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process will not start even if the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, and the production image On the display device 157, the normal background display continues. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 30 (58), the payment button 134 is pressed to start payout. All the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting in the payment pattern. In addition, a "payout sound" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 is activated during payout.

In FIG. 30 (59), the payout is completed. In the state shown in FIG. 30 (59), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the payout is completed (the number of bets has not been set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. It is in a state of being In this state, a setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, the speakers (272, 277) also begin to output a voice saying "Settings are being checked." The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 30 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in the same figure, the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation in progress). When the payout process is completed ((58) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process starts (set in the effect image display device 157). This corresponds to the example (59) in the same figure) in which a confirmation message is displayed.

FIG. 31 summarizes the states of the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in the pseudo-closed state after the settings have been confirmed once, and a game is played once. It is a table. In FIG. 31, each stage is labeled with symbols (50) to (57), (61), and (62), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

In FIG. 31, the same items as in FIG. 32 are shown as component items (same up to FIG. 34).

Since Figures 31 (50) to (57) are the same as Figures 30 (50) to (57), the explanations for Figures 30 (50) to (57) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the setting is confirmed, the setting key switch 281 is turned on with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, a medal is inserted, and then an open detection signal is output.

In FIG. 31 (61), the start lever 135 is operated and the game is started. That is, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a normal pattern. The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white. The medal blocker 172 is activated.

In FIG. 31 (62), up to the third stop operation is performed. In the state shown in FIG. 31 (62), the setting key switch 281 is already on, the game has ended (the number of bets has not been set), and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294. It is in a state of being In this state, a setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value "1" is displayed on the setting value display 293. A setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Furthermore, the speakers (272, 277) also begin to output a voice saying "Settings are being checked." The title panel lamp 164 switches to white lighting, and the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R also switch to white lighting. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains in operation.

In the example shown in FIG. 31 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((55) in the figure), the setting confirmation process is not started (the effect image display device 157 displays a setting confirmation message). is not displayed), the game is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the game ends, the setting confirmation process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) (( 62)) Corresponds to example.

In addition, to summarize the example in FIG. 30 and the example in FIG. 31, when the setting key switch 281 is already in the on state and the open detection signal is output from the open sensor 294, the number of bets is set. When the state is reached, a setting confirmation process is started, and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157.

FIG. 32 is a table summarizing the states of related components when the setting value is displayed on the setting value display 293 even when the setting key switch 281 is in the OFF state. In FIG. 32, each stage is labeled with symbols (1) to (3) and (71) to (78), and time elapses in the order in which the symbols are written.

Since Figures 32 (1) to (3) are the same as Figures 23 (1) to (3), the explanations for Figures 23 (1) to (3) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the settings change process has started.

In FIG. 32 (71), the power switch 244 is turned off during the setting change process. The state of each component is the same as the state in FIG. 32(1). When the power switch 244 is turned off, necessary information is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 by the power-off process in step S221 shown in FIG.

In FIG. 32 (72), the setting key switch 281 is also returned to the off state while the power switch 244 is kept off, and in the subsequent FIG. 32 (73), the power switch 244 is turned on. When the power switch 244 is turned on, the main control unit initial setting process shown in FIG. 9 is started, and first, the initial setting at startup (step S1001) returns the state to the state immediately before the power was cut off. That is, even if the setting key switch 281 is returned to the off state, it is remembered that the setting key switch 281 was in the on state immediately before the power was cut off, and the setting value display 293 shows the setting immediately before the power cut. The value "1" is displayed. In addition, the information backed up at the time of power outage is returned on the sub-control unit side (400, 500), a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and the speaker (272, 277) says ``Setting confirmation in progress. ” is output. Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Furthermore, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In addition, on the side of the sub-control unit (400, 500), in the case of a game machine that does not store backup information at the time of power outage, the initial setting at startup of the main control unit 300 (step S1001) indicates that the state immediately before the power outage is being changed. When the setting change command is recognized, the main control unit 300 sends a setting change command to the first sub control unit 400, and the sub control unit side (400, 500) displays the setting confirmation display based on the setting change command. is displayed, and a voice saying ``Checking the settings'' is output.

As shown in the main control unit main process of FIG. 7, the main control unit initial setting process (setting change process (step S1013)) of FIG. 9 is executed only when the power is turned on. In this example, since the setting key switch 281 was turned off before the power was turned on, the determination in step S1005 is No, and the setting change process (step S1013) cannot be executed. Therefore, as shown in FIG. 32 (74), the power switch 244 is turned off, then the setting key switch 281 is turned on (FIG. 32 (75)), and the power switch 244 is turned on again (FIG. 32 (75)). 32(76)). By doing so, the setting change process (step S1013) is started. In FIG. 32 (76), the set value "1" is displayed on the set value display 293, and the monitor LED starts lighting. Further, a message indicating that the settings are being changed is displayed on the effect image display device 157, and a voice saying "Settings are being changed" is output from the speakers (272, 277). Note that all the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R) start lighting. Furthermore, the medal blocker 172 is inactive.

In FIG. 32 (77), the start lever 135 is operated, the set value is determined (step S1115 shown in FIG. 10), and the number 0 representing the determined value is displayed on the set value display 293. Even after the set value is determined, the setting key switch 281 remains on, so the monitor LED continues to light up. Note that although the speakers (272, 277) output a voice such as "Settings are being changed," a voice such as "Settings have been changed." may be output. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

In FIG. 32 (78), the setting key switch 281 is turned off. As a result, the setting change process ends (step S1119 shown in FIG. 10), and the setting value display 293 becomes hidden. Further, the monitor LED is also turned off. The sound from the speakers (272, 277) switches to the sound "door is open" warning that the front door 102 is being opened. Note that instead of "the door is open", a voice output such as "setting change is complete" or "setting change is finished" may be used. Furthermore, the display of a demo animation is started on the effect image display device 157, and among the various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R), the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start lighting in a demo pattern. . The title panel lamp 164 lights up in white because the setting value is a setting value other than setting b. Note that the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

FIG. 33 shows a case where, after the settings have been confirmed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, the setting key switch 281 is turned on, and the inserted medals are settled. This is a table summarizing the states of related components. In FIG. 33, each stage is numbered (50) to (54), (81), (82), and (57) to (59), and time elapses in the order in which the codes are written. .

Since Figures 33 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 30 (50) to (54), the explanations for Figures 30 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

In FIG. 33 (81), with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132. Since the setting confirmation process is not in progress, medals can be inserted, and the medal insertion sound is output from the speakers (272, 277). The effect image display device 157 switches from displaying the demo animation to normal background display. Further, the top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, and right side lamp 144R start to light up in a normal pattern. Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive.

After the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on again in FIG. 33 (82). However, when the setting key switch 281 is turned on here, the setting key switch 281 is turned on while the closed detection signal is being output from the open sensor 294, the setting confirmation process is not started, and the setting value display 293 is not displayed. The normal background display continues on the effect image display device 157, and nothing is output from the speakers (272, 277). Further, the medal blocker 172 remains inactive. However, since the setting key switch 281 has been turned on, the monitor LED has started lighting up.

Figures 33 (57) to (59) are the same as Figures 30 (57) to (59), so the explanations for Figures 30 (57) to (59) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. , the pseudo-closing of the front door 102 ends, and the open sensor 294 starts outputting an open detection signal. Then, the payment operation is performed, the payout is completed, and the setting confirmation process is started.

In the example shown in FIG. 33 described above, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process will not start if the number of bets of 1 or more is set. (The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157), and the settlement operation is performed with the number of bets of 1 or more set ((58) in the same figure). When the payout process is completed, the setting confirmation is displayed. This corresponds to an example in which the process is started (a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157) ((59) in the figure).

FIG. 34 shows the related components when the setting key switch 281 is turned on and a game is played after the settings have been confirmed once, medals are inserted with the front door 102 in a pseudo-closed state, and the setting key switch 281 is turned on. This is a table summarizing the status of . In FIG. 34, each stage is numbered (50) to (54), (81), (82), (57), (61), and (62), and the time is shown in the order of the numbers. It passes.

Figures 34 (50) to (54) are the same as Figures 30 (50) to (54), so the explanations for Figures 30 (50) to (54) will be used and detailed explanations will be omitted here. After the settings have been confirmed once, the front door 102 is pseudo-closed.

34 (81) and 34 (82) are the same as FIG. Although omitted, after the medals are inserted, the setting key switch 281 is turned on. That is, the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set.

Since FIG. 34 (57) is the same as FIG. 30 (57), the explanation of FIG. 30 (57) will be used and detailed explanation will be omitted here. Become.

Since FIG. 34 (61) and FIG. 34 (62) are the same as FIG. 31 (61) and FIG. 31 (62), the explanation of FIG. 31 (61) and FIG. Although omitted here, the start lever 135 is operated to start the game, and when the third stop operation is performed and the game ends, a setting confirmation process is started.

The example in FIG. 34 described above is an example in which when the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, it is possible to continue playing the game with the set number of bets. Equivalent to. That is, this corresponds to an example in which the operation of the start lever 135 is accepted and the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are also accepted. Priority is given to the set number of bets, the game continues with the number of bets, and after the game ends, processing (setting confirmation processing) corresponding to the ON operation of the setting key switch 281 is started.

Furthermore, in the example shown in FIG. 34, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on ((82) in the same figure), the setting confirmation process is not started if the number of bets of 1 or more is set ((82)). The setting confirmation display is not displayed on the performance image display device 157), the game with the set number of bets is started ((61) in the same figure), and when the third stop operation is performed, the setting confirmation process is performed. This also corresponds to an example in which a setting confirmation display is displayed on the effect image display device 157 ((62) in the figure).

Furthermore, to summarize the example in FIG. 33 and the example in FIG. 34, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on in a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the setting confirmation process is not started and the effect is The image display device 157 does not display a setting confirmation display, and the state is different from the state where the number of bets of 1 or more is set (the state where the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically, the payout process) (completed state or game ended state), the setting confirmation process is started and a setting confirmation in progress display is displayed on the effect image display device 157. In addition, even if the setting key switch 281 is turned on when the number of bets of 1 or more is set, the setting value is not displayed on the setting value display 293, and the number of bets of 1 or more is set. When the state is different from the current state (a state where the number of bets of 1 or more is not set, more specifically a state where the payout process is completed or a state where the game is finished), the setting value is set in the setting value display 293. The value is displayed.

Furthermore, whether the timing shown in FIG. 33 (57) or the timing shown in FIG. (82), corresponds to the timing after (82) in FIG. In FIG. 33 (57) and FIG. 34 (57), the open sensor 294 indicates that the front door 102 has opened, such as by releasing the hand that was pressing down on the opening/closing piece while the bet number of 1 or more is still set. Although an operation for detection is performed, the setting confirmation process is not started and a setting confirmation in progress display is not displayed on the effect image display device 157.

<Setting suggestion>
As described above, one of the gaming states in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is the AT state. The AT state is a state in which operation navigation can be executed. The operation navigation is a performance that uses the liquid crystal display device 157 and the payout number display 127 to notify the contents of the stop operations that will help you win a prize, and it will inform you of the order of stop operations and the timing of the stop operations (internally, a suggestion of the winning role). It is a performance that The AT state is entered by winning the AT state transition lottery in the non-AT state. The AT state is maintained until the number of games given at the time of transition is exhausted. Further, the number of games in which the AT state is maintained is added (added) by an additional effect. When the number of games to be maintained is exhausted, the AT state ends. However, even before the number of games to be maintained is exhausted, the AT state ends when the difference in the number of coins (the difference between the number of paid out and inserted number of game media (for example, medals)) reaches the specified number.

A setting suggestion performance (setting related performance) that gives a suggestion regarding a setting value is performed during a game where the AT state ends or at the start of the next game (when the start lever 135 is turned on) (hereinafter, these are referred to as (collectively referred to as AT end time). Whether or not the setting suggestion effect can be executed is determined by a lottery in the first sub-control unit 400. In step S333 shown in FIG. 11C, the RAM 408 of the first sub-control unit 400 records information indicating whether or not the settings have been changed, and if the settings have been changed, the setting values before and after the setting change. . The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 performs a lottery based on this information. The execution probability of the setting suggestion performance differs depending on whether or not the setting has been changed, the setting value before the setting change, and the current setting value.

FIG. 35(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect at the end of AT when no setting change is made. The lottery table shown in FIG. 35(a) shows the execution probability of the setting suggestion performance (the probability of winning the execution possibility lottery) (the same applies to subsequent lottery tables).

Here, the setting change has not been performed means that the setting change process shown in FIG. result). In the setting change process shown in FIG. 10, preparations are made to send a setting change command to the first sub-control unit 400 in step S1119. The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether the settings have been changed based on whether or not the settings change command has been received.

In the setting suggestion effect, a setting suggestion image may be displayed on the effect image display device 157. There are multiple types of setting suggestion images with different suggestion contents. The setting suggestion image A is an image that does not suggest setting values. Setting suggestion image B is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 2, 4, or 6 (even number setting). The setting suggestion image C is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 1 or 5 (odd number setting), and the setting suggestion image D is an image that suggests that the current setting value is a high setting of 4 or more. This image suggests that there is a high possibility that this is the case. The setting suggestion image F is an image that suggests that the current setting value is likely to be 2 or more. The setting suggestion image G is an image that suggests that there is a high possibility that the current setting value is 5 or more. The setting suggestion image H is an image that suggests that the current setting value is definitely the setting b, and a specific example is the display of the god character KGG shown in FIG. 5(f). The message "A tough battle continues" will be displayed.

The setting suggestion image I is an image of a setting increase suggestion effect. This image will not be displayed if no settings have been changed, and will be described in detail later.

The setting suggestion image J is an image of a setting change suggestion effect. This image will also not be displayed if the settings have not been changed, and will be described in detail later.

When setting b is set, only the setting suggestion image H, which is the setting b confirmation effect, is displayed. This setting b confirmation effect is always displayed. The even number suggestion effect (setting suggestion image B) may be executed even if the setting value is an odd number, and the odd number suggestion effect (setting suggestion image C) may be executed even if the setting value is an even number. may be done. The high setting (setting 4 or higher) suggestion effect (setting suggestion image D) may be executed even in the case of a low setting such as setting 1 or setting 2. That is, in these performances, false suggestions may be carried out. On the other hand, in the setting 2 or more suggestion effect (setting suggestion image F) and the setting 5 or more suggestion effect (setting suggestion image G), false suggestions are not executed. However, the probability of execution is lower than in productions where false suggestions may be executed.

FIG. 35(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion effect at the end of AT when the setting is changed from setting 1. The setting change here may be from setting 1 to setting 2 or higher, which has a higher ball output rate than setting 1, or to setting b, which has a lower ball output rate than setting 1. Good too. As described above, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that a setting change has been made when receiving a setting change command. In the setting change process shown in FIG. 10 that is started when the setting key switch 281 is turned on, if the setting has been set to 1 before the start of the process, the start lever 135 is turned on without any operation of the setting change button 292. Even if you try to change the setting value by operating the setting change button 292 but ultimately return it to setting 1 and turn on the start lever 135, the setting change command for setting 1 is prepared and the The first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change command. In this case, setting 1 has been reset, but in terms of control, the setting has been changed from setting 1. Therefore, in the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), the execution probability of "setting 1" is also written.

Hereinafter, the differences from the lottery table shown in FIG. 35(a) will be mainly explained.

The winning probability of the setting suggestion image A that does not suggest a setting value is the highest in the case of resetting setting 1, and decreases as the setting value increases the ball output rate.

The setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) cannot be executed if the setting value is changed to a setting value that has a lower ball output rate than the setting value before the change, and it cannot be executed when the setting value is changed to a setting value that has a higher ball output rate than the setting value before the change. This is a performance that can be executed if the image is changed to . That is, the setting increase suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the set value has been changed to a higher ball payout rate than the set value before the change. However, it is not always executed when the ball payout rate is changed to a high setting value, and it will not be executed unless you win the lottery. In the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), when changing to setting 2 or higher, the execution probability is the same 5%. For example, when the setting is changed from setting 1 to setting 2, a setting increase suggestion effect may be executed. In addition, in the case of changing from setting 1 to setting 2 or higher, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion performance may be higher as the setting value has a higher ball payout rate (the same applies below). When the setting is changed from setting 1 to setting b, the ball payout rate is changed to a lower setting value, the execution probability is 0%, and it is not executed. Furthermore, in the setting change from setting 1 to setting 1 (resetting setting 1), since the setting value has not been changed to a high ball payout rate, the execution probability is also 0% and it is not executed.

The settings change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is a effect that can be executed when settings are changed. Unlike the setting increase suggestion performance, it can be executed even when the setting value is changed to a lower ball payout rate than the setting value before the change. That is, the settings change suggestion performance is a performance that suggests that the settings have been changed. In the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), when changing to setting 2 or higher, the execution probability is the same 10% for all settings, but the higher the setting value with a higher ball payout rate, the higher the execution probability (hereinafter The same applies to ). Further, although the execution probability is higher than the setting increase suggestion performance, it may be the same as the setting increase suggestion performance, or may be lower than the setting increase suggestion performance (the same applies below). Furthermore, it may be possible to execute a change from setting 1 to setting b, but in the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), the execution probability is 0%, and the setting change suggestion effect is not executed. Further, in the lottery table of FIG. 35(b), the execution probability in the case of setting 1 is 0% and the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is not executed, but it may be executed.

FIG. 36(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion performance, etc. at the end of AT when the setting is changed from setting 2. The setting change here may be from setting 2 to setting 3 or higher, which has a higher ball output rate than setting 2, or to setting 1 or setting b, which has a lower ball output rate than setting 2. It may be. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change command even when resetting from setting 2 to setting 2 is performed, and determines that the setting has been changed. Therefore, in the lottery table of FIG. 36(a), the execution probability of "Setting 2" is also written.

Hereinafter, the differences from the lottery table shown in FIG. 35(b) will be mainly explained.

The winning probability of the setting suggestion image A that does not suggest a setting value is the highest in the case of resetting setting 2, and becomes lower as the setting value increases the ball output rate. Furthermore, when the setting is changed to 1, the probability is higher than when the setting is changed to 4.

The setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) has an execution probability of 0% and is not executed when the setting value is changed to 1, which has a low ball payout rate. Furthermore, in the setting change from setting 2 to setting 2 (resetting of setting 2), since the setting value has not been changed to a high ball payout rate, the execution probability is also 0% and it is not executed.

As mentioned above, the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) can be executed even if the setting value is changed to a lower ball payout rate than the setting value before the change, so even if the setting change is changed to setting 1. It is doable. Furthermore, it may be possible to execute a change from setting 2 to setting b, but in the lottery table of FIG. 36(a), the execution probability is 0%, and the setting change suggestion effect is not executed. Furthermore, in the lottery table of FIG. 36(a), the execution probability in the case of setting 2 is 0% and the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) is not executed, but it may be executed.

FIG. 36(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to perform a setting suggestion performance, etc. at the end of AT when a setting change is made from setting b. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the setting change command even when resetting from setting b to setting b, and determines that the setting has been changed. Therefore, in the lottery table of FIG. 36(b), the execution probability of "setting b" is also written. Moreover, since the setting change here is a setting change from setting b, all setting changes are changes to setting values with a high ball payout rate, except for resetting from setting b to setting b.

Hereinafter, the differences from the lottery table shown in FIG. 36(b) will be mainly explained.

The winning probability of the setting suggestion image A that does not suggest a setting value decreases as the setting value increases the ball payout rate.

As mentioned above, the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) is an effect that can be executed when the setting value is changed to a higher ball payout rate than the setting value before the change, but it is changed from setting b to setting 1. In this case, the execution probability is 0%, and there is no possibility that the setting increase suggestion effect will be executed. On the other hand, if the setting is changed to 2 or higher, a setting increase suggestion effect is executed with a 5% probability. For example, when changing from setting b to setting 2, a setting increase suggestion effect may be executed.

The setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) can be executed when setting b is changed to settings 1, 2, 4 to 6. As shown in FIG. 36(b), each is executed with a probability of 10%. However, this effect is not executed when changing from setting b to setting b. Note that it may be prohibited to execute only when changing from setting b to setting 1.

The setting suggestion performance (setting suggestion notification) may be executed not only at the end of AT, but also as a line of dialogue of a character appearing in a game during the AT state.

FIG. 37(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute a setting suggestion performance based on characters' lines.

In the performance based on the characters' lines, the settings b confirmation performance, setting increase suggestion performance, and setting change suggestion performance are not executed. Since the setting b confirmation effect is not executed, the effect related to the setting b is not executed by the character's dialogue. Setting suggestion effects based on characters' lines include character line A with no suggestion of setting values, character line B which is an even number suggestion effect, character line C which is an odd number suggestion effect, and high setting (setting 4 or higher) suggestion effect. There is a possibility that a certain character line D, a character line F which is a suggestive effect with settings 2 or higher, and a character line G which is a suggestive effect with a setting 5 or higher are executed. Each execution probability is the same as the execution probability of the lottery table shown in FIG. 36(a). A specific example of the character line B, which is an even number suggestion effect, is the line ``It might be an even number setting'' shown in FIG. 5(c). A specific example of character line F, which is a suggestive effect of setting 2 or higher, is the line ``Ah, business sorting'' shown in FIG. 5(e). A specific example of the character line G, which is a setting of 5 or more, is the line ``I want to eat 5 or more pieces of sugar cane'' as shown in FIG. 5(d).

The setting suggestion performance (setting suggestion notification) may be executed even during the demonstration performance.

FIG. 37(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for determining whether or not to execute the setting suggestion performance during the demonstration performance.

The setting suggestion performance during the demonstration performance is performed by turning off the title panel lamp 164. The title panel lamp 164 is turned off only when setting b is set. When set to setting b, the title panel lamp 164 is always turned off. Therefore, turning off the title panel lamp 164 during the demonstration effect corresponds to a setting b confirmation effect indicating that the current setting value is confirmed to be setting b.

As explained above, there are effects that are executed only when setting b is set (hereinafter referred to as "setting b suggestion effects"), such as setting b confirmation effects and setting suggestion effects during demonstration effects. . The setting b suggestion performance includes a performance that suggests setting b, and can also be called a setting b related performance. This setting b suggestion effect may be other than the setting b confirmation effect or the effect of turning off the title panel lamp 164, and is executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects are not executed. For example, it is executed at the timing when the setting key is turned OFF, at the timing when the title panel lamp 164 is turned off other than during the demonstration presentation, at the timing when a certain image is displayed on the liquid crystal display during the demonstration presentation, etc. The other setting suggestion effect referred to here is a suggestion effect regarding setting values other than setting b (setting values of setting 1, setting 2, and settings 4 to 6), and those setting values are set. It may be a production that suggests that these settings are certain, a confirmation production that suggests that these settings are certain, or a production that suggests a setting increase or a setting change as described above. May be present (the same applies hereinafter). However, the setting b suggestion effect may be executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects may be executed (for example, the AT end screen display timing, etc.), or multiple types of setting b suggestion effects may be provided. The first setting b suggestion effect among the multiple types of setting b suggestion effects is executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects may be executed, and the second setting b suggestion effect among the plurality of setting b suggestion effects is performed at a timing when other setting b suggestion effects may be executed. may be executed at a timing when other setting suggestion effects are not executed.

Further, there may be a timing at which only other setting suggestion effects are executed. In the case of the setting suggestion effect based on the character's lines as described using FIG. 37(a), this is the timing at which the character's lines appear. Other setting suggestion effects may also be performed at timings that suggest earned profits (the number of acquired coins or the number of acquired pitches). Furthermore, other setting suggestion effects may not always be executed when setting b is set.

Furthermore, there may be an effect similar to the setting b suggestion effect. Specifically, if turning off the title panel lamp 164 during the demonstration performance is a setting b suggestion effect, the title panel lamp 164 is also turned off even during the demonstration performance, and in this case, it is not a setting b suggestion effect. It will be a similar performance. This similar effect is executed, for example, when navigation effects such as push order navigation are ignored, or when a game that is not recommended, such as a two-card bet, is played. The behavior of the game machine when a game that is not recommended is played is similar to the behavior of the game machine when the setting b suggestion effect is made, thereby subtly suggesting that the setting is not a good one. be able to.

Note that the setting suggestion performance is not limited to the one exemplified above, and other types of setting suggestion performance may be performed or may be performed at other timings.

<Production using a rotating device>
Next, various effects using the rotating device 140 will be explained. This effect is performed using the effect image display device 157, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, bass speaker 277, upper speaker 272, and the like. Furthermore, this performance is a performance that is performed during a period that includes all or part of the valid operation period during which the operation of the rotating device 140 (rotating body 1401) is valid.

First, the roulette performance will be explained. The roulette effect may be performed as an additional effect on the number of games in the AT state. The number of additional games is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 from the main control unit 300 . The first sub-control unit 400 executes a roulette effect when the number of add-on games is transmitted from the main control unit 300.

FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a roulette effect executed as an additional effect on the number of games in the AT state.

FIG. 38 shows the effect image display device 157 in the AT state. The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 38(a) is notified that the roulette effect will be started thereafter. This notification screen is displayed, for example, after operating the start lever 135.

When the third stop is performed, as shown in FIG. 38(b), the effect display of the roulette effect is displayed on the effect image display device 157. The performance display of the roulette performance is a roulette display RLT. The roulette display RLT is displayed during a period that includes the valid operation period of the rotating body 1401, and includes a roulette wheel image RL and an arrow image AR. The roulette wheel image RL is not displayed in its entirety on the effect image display device 157, but only in part. From the roulette display RLT in FIG. 38(b), the roulette board image RL includes an area RL1 where the number of add-on games is 20 games, a losing area RL2 where the number of add-on games is 0 games, and an area RL3 where the number of add-on games is 10 games. You can confirm that it is provided. When the roulette display RLT is displayed, the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 can be operated. That is, the rotation operation can be performed both downward in the default direction and upward in the opposite direction. Note that the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 may become operable when the notification screen shown in FIG. 38(a) is displayed, or may be operable at all times.

Here, when the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated downward in the default direction, the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise at a low speed (see the arrow shown in FIG. 38(c1)), and the number of additional games increases to 100. The area RL4 comes into view (FIG. 38(c1)). Note that the clockwise direction is downward when viewed with reference to the arrow image AR provided at the determined position, and corresponds to the operating direction of the rotating body 1401. After the third stop is performed and the next game is started, even if the rotating body 1401 is rotated vigorously, the roulette wheel image RL only rotates at a low speed, and each region RL1 to 4 provided on the roulette wheel image RL is rotated at a low speed. can be confirmed. Note that the roulette wheel image RL may be rotated at a speed corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating body 1401 until the next game is started after the third stop is performed. For example, if the rotating body 1401 is rotated vigorously, the roulette wheel image RL will also rotate vigorously, making it difficult to see each region RL1 to RL4, but if the rotating body 1401 is rotated slowly, the roulette wheel image RL will also rotate slowly, Each region RL1 to RL4 may be made easier to confirm.

Furthermore, even if the first chance button 165, which is a performance button, is pressed after rotating the rotating body 1401 downward, the roulette wheel image RL will rotate clockwise (see the arrow shown in FIG. 38(c2)). .

On the other hand, when the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated upward, the roulette wheel image RL is rotated counterclockwise (see the arrow shown in FIG. 38(d1)). Note that the counterclockwise direction is upward when viewed from the arrow image AR, and corresponds to the operating direction of the rotating body 1401.

Further, even if the first chance button 165, which is a production button, is pressed after rotating the rotating body 1401 upward, the roulette wheel image RL will rotate counterclockwise (see the arrow shown in FIG. 38(d2)). ).

As explained using FIG. 38(c2) and FIG. 38(d2), the pressing operation of the first chance button 165 takes over the rotation operation of the rotating body 1401 operated before, and the roulette wheel image RL rotates in the same direction as the direction corresponding to the previous rotation operation of the rotating body 1401. While the rotating body 1401 can be operated in two directions (a downward rotation direction and an upward rotation direction), the first chance button 165 can be operated in only one direction (the downward direction); Even if the operating means has only one direction, it functions as a substitute for the rotating body 1401 operated previously. Even if the first chance button 165 is operated by mistake when the rotating body 1401 should be operated, it can be used as a substitute for the rotating body 1401, and a performance can be executed that matches the player's taste. . For example, if the operation of the first chance button 165 only corresponds to one predetermined direction, try to intentionally operate the first chance button 165 to rotate the roulette wheel image RL in the one predetermined direction. Although this may feel strange, it is likely to be preferred by beginners who tend to use the wrong operating methods.

Note that the first chance button 165 is not limited to the pressing time, and the roulette board display RL rotates within a predetermined time range. For example, whether the first chance button 165 is pressed for 0.5 seconds or 3 seconds, the roulette board display RL is within the range of 1.9 seconds or more and 2.1 seconds or less. Rotate with. However, the rotation time of the roulette board display RL may be changed depending on the pressing time of the first chance button 165.

FIG. 39 is a diagram showing a continuation of the roulette effect shown in FIG. 38.

After the display of the roulette display RLT is started on the performance image display device 157, when the start lever 135 is turned on (when the next game is started), an operation promotion image OP is added to the roulette display RLT.

FIG. 39(c3) is a continued example of the case where the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated downward in the default direction, and the operation promotion image OP that promotes the downward operation of the rotating body 1401 is It is displayed overlapping the roulette wheel image RL. The operation promotion image OP includes an image OP1 imitating the rotating device 140, a downward arcuate arrow image OP2, a hand image OP3, and a character image OP4 such as "Turn". In this example, the downward arcuate arrow image OP2 corresponds to an image that suggests the operating direction. Note that the operation promotion image OP may include a remaining period display indicating the remaining period of the valid operation period of the rotating device 140. However, the operation validity period of the rotating device 140 is not limited to the period during which the operation promotion image OP is displayed, and in this example, it starts before the operation promotion image OP is displayed.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated downward, the roulette wheel image RL starts displaying high-speed rotation as shown in subsequent FIG. 39(c4). The high-speed rotation display here is a clockwise (downward) rotation corresponding to the downward rotation of the rotating body 1401. In the high-speed rotation display, each region RL1 to RL4 in the roulette wheel image RL cannot be identified. Note that after the start lever 135 is turned on, the roulette wheel image RL rotates at a predetermined speed regardless of the rotational speed of the rotating body 1401. However, even when rotating at a high speed, the rotating body 1401 may be rotated at a high speed corresponding to the rotational speed of the rotating body 1401. For example, if the rotating body 1401 is rotated slowly, the roulette wheel image RL will rotate at a high speed (each region RL1 to RL4 rotates at a speed that is difficult to distinguish), but it will be slower than when the rotating body 1401 is rotated vigorously. It may be rotated at a certain speed.

Further, even if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed instead of the rotating body 1401, as shown in FIG. 38(c1), the roulette wheel image RL starts rotating at high speed clockwise. That is, the first chance button 165 can also be used as a substitute.

Furthermore, if the rotating body 1401 is rotated upward instead of downward, the roulette wheel image RL does not start rotating. However, even when the roulette wheel image RL is rotated upward, the roulette wheel image RL may start rotating at high speed.

The valid operation period during which the operation of the rotating body 1401 is valid ends at the timing when the rotating body 1401 is operated after the operation promotion image OP is displayed.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of high-speed rotation, the roulette wheel image RL starts to rotate at a reduced speed, and eventually each region RL1 to RL4 becomes distinguishable. In FIG. 39 (c5) continuing from FIG. 39 (c4), the roulette wheel image RL has become so slow that it almost stops rotating, and each of the regions RL1 to RL4 can be identified. In this FIG. 39 (c5), the losing area RL2 is at the position of the arrow image AR, but if the rotation is made a little more, the area RL1 where the number of additional games is 20 games is likely to be at the position of the arrow image AR, and the inciting display is displayed. It has become. It should be noted that which area reaches the position of the arrow image AR and the roulette wheel image RL stops rotating is determined by the number of add-on games that have been sent from the main control unit 300 first, and the inciting display is a performance. It will be displayed as .

In FIG. 39(e) continuing from FIG. 39(c5), the roulette wheel image RL has stopped rotating, and the area RL1 where the number of additional games is 20 is at the position of the arrow image AR. A shining image SHI representing a blessing is displayed on the roulette wheel image RL, informing that the number of AT games will be increased by 20 games.

FIG. 39(d3) shows the effect image display when the start lever 135 is turned on after the roulette display RLT starts to be displayed on the effect image display device 157 and the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated upward. FIG. 15 is a diagram showing a device 157; That is, this is a diagram continuing from FIG. 38(d2). The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 39(d3) also displays an operation promotion image OP overlapping the roulette wheel image RL. The arrow image OP2 of the operation promotion images OP is directed downward, but may be directed upward in accordance with the rotational direction of the rotating body 1401 before the start lever 135 is turned on. Alternatively, in both FIG. 39 (c3) and this (d3), it may be a bidirectional (downward and upward) arrow image, or an image related to the operation direction (arrow image OP2) may not be displayed. good.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated upward, the roulette wheel image RL starts to display a high-speed rotating display in which the regions RL1 to RL4 cannot be distinguished, as shown in FIG. 39(d4). The high-speed rotation display here is a counterclockwise (upward) rotation corresponding to the upward rotation of the rotating body 1401.

Further, even if the first chance button 165, which is an effect button, is pressed instead of the rotating body 1401, as shown in FIG. 38(d1), the roulette wheel image RL starts rotating counterclockwise at high speed. That is, the first chance button 165 can also be used here as well.

Furthermore, even when the rotating body 1401 is rotated in the default downward direction instead of upward, the roulette wheel image RL starts rotating at high speed. However, when the roulette wheel image RL is rotated downward, the roulette wheel image RL may not start rotating.

Note that the high speed rotation speed of the roulette wheel image RL is the same as described above.

The valid operation period during which the operation of the rotating body 1401 is valid ends at the timing when the rotating body 1401 is operated after the operation promotion image OP is displayed.

After a predetermined period of time has elapsed after the start of high-speed rotation, the roulette wheel image RL starts to rotate at a reduced speed, and eventually each region RL1 to RL4 becomes distinguishable. In FIG. 39(d5), the speed of the roulette wheel image RL has become so slow that it almost stops rotating, and each region RL1 to RL4 can be identified. In this FIG. 39(d5), the area RL4 where the number of additional games is 100 is at the position of the arrow image AR, but if you rotate it a little more, the area RL1 where the number of additional games is 20 is at the position of the arrow image AR. It is likely to become, and it is an inciting display. Here, too, the number of additional games has already been determined by the main control unit 300, and the inciting display is displayed as a performance.

When the roulette wheel image RL stops rotating, it becomes as shown in FIG. 39(e).

FIG. 40 is a diagram showing a modification of the roulette effect shown in FIG. 38.

In the following explanation, the differences from the roulette effect shown in FIG. 38 will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations will be omitted.

In this modification, the operation mode (rotation direction) of the roulette wheel image RL when the first chance button 165, which is the effect button, is pressed is different. The display of the roulette display RLT is started on the effect image display device 157 (see FIG. 40(b)), the rotating body 1401 of the rotating device 140 is rotated upward, and the roulette wheel image RL is rotating counterclockwise. (FIG. 40(d1)), when the first chance button 165 is pressed, the roulette wheel image RL is rotated in a clockwise direction (based on the arrow image AR) corresponding to the default rotation direction (downward) of the rotating body 1401. It rotates downward (if you look at it). That is, reverse rotation is started. In FIG. 38(d2), when the first chance button 165 is pressed, the roulette wheel image RL rotates in the direction (counterclockwise direction) corresponding to the direction (upward direction) in which the rotating body 1401 is rotated. However, in this modified example, pressing the first chance button 165 uniformly moves the roulette wheel image RL in the clockwise direction (downward), regardless of the direction in which the rotating body 1401 was previously rotated. Rotate.

Even after the start lever 135 is turned on, if the first chance button 165 is pressed, the roulette wheel image RL is uniformly rotated in the clockwise direction ( (downward).

In the modified example described above, it may feel strange that the direction in which the rotating body 1401 was previously rotated is not reflected, but the first chance button 165 rotates the roulette wheel image RL in a clockwise direction (downward direction). ) This is an easy-to-understand presentation for those who know that it is an operating means for rotating the screen, and it is easy to like, especially by advanced users.

Next, a presentation different from the roulette presentation using the rotating device 140 will be explained.

FIG. 41 is a diagram illustrating an example of a defeat rate increasing challenge effect.

This defeat rate increasing challenge performance may be executed as a confrontation performance.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 41(a) informs that the defeat rate increase challenge effect will be started thereafter. This notification screen is displayed, for example, after the third stop, and the defeat rate increase challenge effect is performed until the start lever 135 is turned on (the next game is started).

Following the notification screen, as shown in FIG. 41(b), the effect image display device 157 displays a defeat rate display image KR showing the current defeat rate on the left side, and displays an operation promotion image OP on the right side. be done. The defeat rate at the stage of FIG. 41(b) is 0%. Further, since the operation promotion image OP is the same as the image described above, a description thereof will be omitted.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated in the default downward direction, the defeat rate increases to 10% as shown in FIG. 41(c). Even if the rotating body 1401 is rotated in the opposite upward direction, the defeat rate increases to 20% as shown in FIG. 41(d). In this way, no matter which direction the rotating body 1401 is rotated, the defeat rate increases. That is, the result remains the same no matter which one of the plurality of operating directions is operated. Furthermore, the rate of increase according to the amount of operation does not change depending on the direction of rotation, but may vary. For example, the rate of increase may be higher when the default rotation is made downward than when it is rotated upward.

The rate of increase is determined in advance by a lottery performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and brake control is performed on the rotating body 1401 immediately before the determined defeat rate is reached. The brake control increases the resistance when rotating the rotating body 1401, and the operator senses that the increase in the defeat rate has ended.

In FIG. 41(e), the predetermined defeat rate (55%) has been reached. Although it is possible to further rotate the rotating body 1401, the defeat rate remains the same. Note that after reaching the determined defeat rate, the rotating body 1401 may be locked and may be rendered inoperable.

Subsequently, in FIG. 41(f), the defeat rate increased image KRU is displayed on the entire display screen of the effect image display device 157, and it is reported that the defeat rate has increased to 55%. Eventually, as shown in FIG. 41(g), a duel scene in the confrontation performance is displayed on the performance image display device 157.

Moreover, if the first chance button 165, which is a production button, is pressed instead of operating the rotating body 1401, the defeat rate increasing image KRU is displayed at once (FIG. 41(f)), and the defeat rate is increased in the defeat rate display image KR. The rising scene is cut away. Even when the first chance button 165 is pressed after operating the rotating body 1401 halfway, the display screen of the effect image display device 157 is switched to the display screen of the defeat rate increased image KRU. Note that even when the start lever 135 is operated, the display screen on which the operation promotion image OP was displayed is switched to the display screen on which the defeat rate increasing image KRU is displayed. Also, when the start lever 135 is operated, the display screen on which the operation promotion image OP was displayed is switched to the display screen on which the defeat rate increased image KRU is displayed. Furthermore, when the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated, the display screen on which the operation promotion image OP was displayed may be switched to the display screen on which the defeat rate increased image KRU is displayed.

The defeat rate increase challenge performance described above is a performance in which a numerical value is changed in one direction, but it may be a selection performance in which an option is selected. That is, by rotating the rotating body 1401, the cursor image on the display screen moves. No matter which direction the rotating body 1401 is operated, the cursor moves in the same direction, and brake control is applied to the rotating body 1401 immediately before reaching the next option. That is, each time the cursor image reaches the next option, short-term brake control is performed, and the operator of the rotating body 1401 can be tactually informed of the selection. An option is determined by operating the start lever 135 or the bet buttons 130 to 132. Note that the rotating device 140 may also accept a push operation, and the option may be determined by the push operation.

FIG. 42 is a diagram showing an example of message presentation.

In message production, the slider of the scroll bar can be moved (scrolled) by rotating the rotating body 1401.

The effect image display device 157 shown in FIG. 42(a) displays an introduction image of the message effect, and a vertical scroll bar SB is displayed at the right end. A slider SBS is displayed within this vertical scroll bar SB, and in FIG. 42(a), the slider SBS is located at the top of the vertical scroll bar SB. Further, at the top of the message area MS, an icon of a lord's face is displayed, and a message from the lord is displayed.

When the rotating body 1401 is rotated downward, a message presentation is started. In FIG. 42(b), an icon of an old man's face is additionally displayed in the message area MS, and a message from the old man is displayed.

Further, when the rotating body 1401 is rotated downward, the slider SBS in the vertical scroll bar SB starts moving downward, and the message area MS also starts moving downward in accordance with the slider SBS. As a result, an icon of the princess's face is additionally displayed below the message area MS, and a message from the princess is displayed (FIG. 42(c)).

As the rotating body 1401 continues to rotate downward, the slider SBS eventually reaches the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB, and the bottom part of the message area MS also reaches Is displayed. Even though the slider SBS has reached the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB, when the rotating body 1401 is further rotated downward, the slider SBS reaches the lower limit of the scroll bar SB, as shown in FIG. 42(e). The recoil from the hit causes it to move back up a little, and the message area MS also moves back up a little accordingly. This return display is a display indicating that the lower limit has been reached (scrolling down no further is possible).

Next, when the rotating body 1401 is rotated upward, the slider SBS in the vertical scroll bar SB starts moving upward, and the message area MS also starts moving upward in line with the slider SBS. . In this message presentation, the image also moves in accordance with the operating direction of the rotating body 1401. Furthermore, when the slider SBS reaches the upper limit of the scroll bar SB, a message indicating that the slider SBS has reached the upper limit is displayed, indicating that the slider SBS has moved back a little downwards, and the message area MS also moves downwards accordingly. The return message will be displayed.

Furthermore, when the first chance button 165, which is a production button, is pressed instead of operating the rotating body 1401, the slider SBS instantly reaches the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB, as shown in FIG. 42(b'). The bottom part of the message area MS is also displayed. After this, by rotating the rotating body 1401 upward, the conversation of each character can be traced back and viewed.

FIG. 42(e') shows a modification of the display mode when the rotating body 1401 is further rotated downward even though the slider SBS has reached the lower limit of the vertical scroll bar SB. In this modification, the image in the message area MS is displayed stretched vertically (so-called stretch over scroll). This display also indicates that the lower limit has been reached.

Various performances using the rotating device 140 have been described above, but instead of the rotating device 140, performances using operating means that can be operated in a plurality of operation modes (for example, a production lever that can be operated in a cross direction) It may be.

Moreover, the rotation device 140 may accept operations other than rotation operations. For example, it may be possible to perform a pulling operation or a pushing operation.

The matters described above using FIGS. 13 to 42 can also be applied to the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43. FIG. 43 is a rear view of a pachinko machine to which the present invention can be applied, seen from the back side.

The upper rear side of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. A tank rail 154P is provided for guiding balls falling through a communication hole formed at the bottom of the tank 150P to a dispensing device 152P located on the right side of the rear surface.

The dispensing device 152P is made of a cylindrical member, and includes a dispensing motor, a sprocket, and a dispensing sensor (not shown) therein. This dispensing device 152P is detachable, and when attached to a predetermined position, connects to the downstream end of the tank rail 154P.

The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by the payout motor, and temporarily retains the game balls that have passed through the tank rail 154P and flowed down into the payout device 152P, and rotates by a predetermined angle by driving the payout motor. Accordingly, the temporarily retained game balls are sent out one by one below the payout device 152P. That is, the payout device 152P is a type of ball feeding device that conveys the game ball by applying a driving force to the game ball.

The payout sensor is a sensor that detects the passing of the game ball sent out by the sprocket, and it sends either a high or low signal when the game ball is passing, and when the game ball is not passing, it sends either a high or low signal. The other signal, either high or low, is output to a payout control section (not shown). The game balls that have passed through this payout sensor are configured so that they pass through the ball rail and reach the upper tray arranged on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P, and the pachinko machine 100P is configured so that the game ball passes through the ball rail and reaches the upper tray provided on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P. Based on this configuration, an amount of gaming value (game balls) corresponding to the awarding conditions is awarded (paid out) to the player.

On the left side of the payout device 152P in the figure, there is a main board case 158P that houses a main board 156P that constitutes a main control unit that performs control processing for the overall game, and a main board case 158P that stores a main board 156P that performs control processing related to effects based on processing information generated by the main control unit. A first sub-board case 162P that houses a first sub-board 160P constituting a first sub-control unit to perform, a second sub-control unit that performs control processing related to presentation based on processing information generated by the first sub-control unit A second sub-board case 166P that houses a second sub-board 164P that performs the processing, a payout board 170P that constitutes a payout control unit that performs control processing regarding the payout of game balls, and includes an error cancellation switch 168P that cancels errors by operation of a gaming clerk. A payout board case 172P that houses a payout board case 172P that houses a launch board 174P that constitutes a launch control unit that performs control processing regarding the launch of game balls, and a launch board case 176P that accommodates a launch board 174P that constitutes a power supply control unit that supplies power to various electrical gaming devices. A power supply board case 184P that houses a power supply board 182P that also includes a power switch 178P that turns the power on and off when operated by a game store clerk, and a RAM clear switch 180P that outputs a RAM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when operated when the power is turned on. , and a CR interface unit 186P that transmits and receives signals between the payout control unit and the card unit.

Further, in this embodiment, a setting change key 192P, a setting change button 194P, and an accessory ratio/setting display 196P are provided on the main board 156P. Even in this pachinko machine 100P, by opening the main body 104, turning on the setting change key 192P, and then turning on the power switch 178P, it is possible to set at least one of a plurality of setting values with different jackpot probabilities. Setting change processing begins. In the setting change process, the current setting value is displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P, and the store clerk can change the setting value by pressing the setting change button 194P while checking this. In addition, by opening the main body 104, turning on the power switch 178P, and then turning on the setting change key 192P, the setting confirmation process is started, and the current setting value is displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P. Is displayed. Note that the setting change process may be started when the setting change key 192P is operated on the condition that the RAM clear switch 180P is pressed when the power is turned on, or even if the RAM clear switch 180P is not pressed when the power is turned on. , the configuration may be such that the settings can be changed when the setting change key 192P is operated when the power is turned on.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b, which are the same as the setting values of the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. are displayed on the accessory ratio/setting display 196P in the same display order. Further, setting b is the setting value that is most disadvantageous to the player, and the larger the number, the more advantageous the setting value is to the player.

The accessory ratio/setting display 196P is a 7-segment LED board mounted on the main board 156P and placed inside the main board case 158P, and is attached in a manner that is visible to the store clerk. Note that the accessory ratio/setting display 196P may be provided on the game board 200, for example, so that it can be visually recognized by the player.

In the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43, the power switch 178P corresponds to the power switch 244, and the main body that can be opened and closed with respect to the outer frame corresponds to the front door 102, which detects when the main body is opened (not shown). The main body opening sensor corresponds to the opening sensor 294, the setting change key 192P corresponds to the setting key switch 281, and the accessory ratio/setting display 196P corresponds to the setting value display 293. Furthermore, a monitor LED that lights up when the setting change key 192P is turned on is provided on the main board 156P of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43 and on each external centralized terminal board (not shown). Further, a liquid crystal display device and a speaker used for various effects are provided, and this liquid crystal display device corresponds to the effect image display device 157, and the speakers correspond to the upper speaker 272 and the bass speaker 277. Further, the game board is provided with a game board lamp, and the game table frame is provided with a game table frame lamp, and these lamps correspond to various lamps (164, 144T, 144L, 144R).

Further, on the front side of the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43, the same effect device as the rotating device 140 provided in the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided. There is also a chance button, which is a performance button. Furthermore, there is also a production lever that can be operated in the direction of the cross.

According to the above description,
``Setting value setting control means that can be set to one of a plurality of setting values [for example, the CPU 304 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10];
Execute multiple setting suggestion performances [e.g., even number suggestion performance, odd number suggestion performance, high setting suggestion performance, setting 2 or more suggestion performance, setting 5 or more suggestion performance, setting b confirmation performance, setting increase suggestion performance, setting change suggestion performance] Possible presentation means [for example, presentation image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The plurality of setting values include a first setting value that has the lowest ball payout rate among the plurality of setting values [for example, setting b], and a second setting value that has a ball payout rate one step higher than the first setting value. A set value [for example, setting 1], a third set value [for example, setting 2], which has a ball payout rate one step higher than the second set value, and a ball payout rate that is higher than the third set value. a fourth setting value [for example, setting 4] that is one step higher ,
One setting suggestion effect among the plurality of setting suggestion effects is a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value setting control means has set a setting value with a higher ball payout rate than the setting value before change. (referred to as "first setting suggestion performance") [for example, setting raising suggestion performance],
One setting suggestion performance among the plurality of setting suggestion performances is a setting suggestion performance that suggests that the current setting value is the first setting value (hereinafter referred to as "second setting suggestion performance"). [For example, setting b confirmed effect],
The production means is
In the game after the setting value is set again from the first setting value to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion effect is executed [for example, in FIG. ), the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting b is 0%],
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 1 in FIG. 36(b) is 0%],
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the third setting value and the setting value is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 2 in FIG. 36(b) is 5%],
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 4 in FIG. 36(b) is 5%],
In a game after the second set value is changed to the first set value and set to the first set value by the set value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting b in FIG. 35(b) is 0%],
In the game after the setting value is set again from the second setting value to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion effect is executed [for example, in FIG. ), the execution probability of setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 1 is 0%],
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the third setting value and the setting value is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 2 in FIG. 35(b) is 5%],
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 4 in FIG. 35(b) is 5%],
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the first setting value and the setting value is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting b in FIG. 36(a) is 0%],
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 1 in FIG. 36(a) is 0%],
In a game after the setting value is set again from the third setting value to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting increase suggestion effect (setting suggestion image I) of setting 4 in FIG. 36(a) is 5%],
When the first setting suggestion effect is executable, the probability of executing the first setting suggestion effect [for example, 5%] is higher than when the second setting suggestion effect is executable [for example, setting b confirmed. The second setting suggestion effect in the case of setting b in FIG. 35(b), the case of setting b in FIG. 36(a), and the case of setting b in FIG. 36(b) of the effect (setting suggestion image H) The probability of executing [e.g., 100%] is lower than the probability of executing
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, even when the setting value is increased, the setting value is lower than the lowest setting value (the first setting value) (the setting value one level higher: for example, the second setting value). By not performing the first setting suggestion performance only when the first setting suggestion performance is reached, expectations for the first setting suggestion performance can be increased, and the first setting suggestion performance can be performed more effectively. .

The second setting value may be a setting value for which the ball output rate is the second lowest among the plurality of setting values, and the third setting value may be a setting value for which the ball output rate is the second lowest among the plurality of setting values. It may be the third lowest setting value among them.

Also,
"One of the settings suggestion performances among the plurality of setting suggestion performances is a setting suggestion performance that suggests that the setting value has been changed (hereinafter referred to as the "third setting suggestion performance") [e.g. direction],
The production means is
In the game after the setting value is set again from the first setting value to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the third setting suggestion effect is executed [for example, in FIG. ), the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) for setting b is 0%],
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 1 in FIG. 36(b) is 10%],
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the third setting value and is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 2b in FIG. 36(b) is 10%],
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 4 in FIG. 36(b) is 10%],
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the first setting value and the setting value is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) for setting b in FIG. 35(b) is 0%],
In the game after the setting value is set again from the second setting value to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the third setting suggestion effect is executed [for example, in FIG. ), the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 1 is 0%],
In a game after the second set value is changed to the third set value and set to the third set value by the set value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 2 in FIG. 35(b) is 10%],
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 4 in FIG. 35(b) is 10%],
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the first setting value and is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting b in FIG. 36(a) is 0%],
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion performance may be executed. Yes [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 1 in FIG. 36(a) is 10%],
In the game after the setting value is set again from the third setting value to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the third setting suggestion effect is executed [for example, in FIG. ), the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 2 is 0%],
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. [For example, the execution probability of the setting change suggestion effect (setting suggestion image J) of setting 4 in FIG. 36(a) is 10%],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By executing the first setting suggestion performance when the setting value jumps up, expectations for the first setting suggestion performance can be further increased, and the first setting suggestion performance can be performed even more effectively. be able to.

According to the above description,
``A first operating means [for example, rotating body 1401] that can be operated by the player in a plurality of operation modes [for example, a downward rotation operation mode and an upward rotation operation direction];
A performance means [for example, a performance] that can execute a first game performance [for example, a roulette performance shown in FIGS. 38 to 40, a message performance shown in FIG. image display device 157, speakers 272, 277, title panel lamp 164, top lamp 144T, left side lamp 144L, right side lamp 144R, etc.],
A game machine [for example, a slot machine 100 or a pachinko machine] equipped with
In the first game performance, when the first operating means is operated in a first operating mode [for example, an operating mode that rotates downward] during the valid operation period, the first operating mode is changed to the first operating mode. A corresponding image (hereinafter referred to as "first image") [for example, an image of the roulette wheel image RL rotating clockwise] is displayed,
In the first game performance, when the first operating means is operated in a second operating mode [for example, an operating mode of rotating upward] during the valid operation period, the second operating mode is changed to the second operating mode. A corresponding image (hereinafter referred to as “second image”) [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise] is displayed.
A gaming machine [for example, the slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 or the pachinko machine 100P shown in FIG. 43]. ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the images differ depending on the player's operation mode, it is possible to give the impression that the result changes depending on the player's operation, and to encourage the player to actively participate in the game. becomes possible.

Note that the plurality of operation modes may be an upward rotation operation mode and a downward rotation operation mode, or may be a clockwise rotation operation mode and a counterclockwise rotation operation mode. Alternatively, it may be a push-in operation mode and a pull-out operation mode, a single press, a long press, or a continuous press operation, or a touch operation mode on different parts of the touch panel.

Further, the plurality of operation modes may include a mode of operation in opposite directions, or operation in multiple directions (for example, four directions of a cross, multiple directions provided within a 360 degree range, etc.). It may be a combination of mutually unrelated operation modes (such as a combination of pressing and rotation).

Both the first operation mode and the second operation mode may be a single operation or multiple operations in which single operations are consecutive.

Also,
``Equipped with a second operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] that can be operated by the player,
In the first game performance, the second operating means is operated after the first operating means [for example, the rotating body 1401] is operated in the first operating mode [for example, the operating mode for rotating downward]. When an operation is performed in a certain operation mode [for example, a single-press operation mode], an image corresponding to the first image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise] [for example, the first image and Similarly, an image of the roulette wheel image RL rotating clockwise] is displayed [for example, FIG. 38(c2)],
In the first game performance, after operating the first operating means in the second operating mode [for example, an operating mode of rotating upward], the second operating means is operated in the same operating mode as the certain operating mode. When an operation is performed in an operation mode [for example, a single-press operation mode], an image corresponding to the second image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise] [for example, the same as the second image] An image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates counterclockwise] is displayed [for example, FIG. 38(d2)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, when the second operating means is operated, an image corresponding to the first image corresponding to the operating mode of the first operating means that was operated immediately before is displayed. Therefore, even if the second operating means is operated by mistake, it can be used as a substitute for the first operating means, and it is possible to perform a performance that matches the player's taste. If you intentionally operate the second operation means, some people may feel uncomfortable because the result corresponding to the operation will be matched to the previous operation mode, but it is also possible to use the wrong operation means. It is easy to be liked by beginners who find it difficult to use.

Note that the second operation means may be an operation means that has only one operation mode (for example, single press), or may be an operation means that has multiple operation modes (for example, single press, long press, continuous press). It may be a means.

Further, the certain operation mode may be a single operation or a multiple operation (the same applies hereinafter).

Further, the image corresponding to the first image may be the same image as the first image, an image of a scene common to the scene of the first image, or an image corresponding to the first image. It may be an image of a scene that continues from the scene of the first image (the same applies hereinafter).

Also,
``Equipped with a second operation means [for example, the first chance button 165] that can be operated by the player,
In the first game performance, the second operating means is operated after the first operating means [for example, the rotating body 1401] is operated in the first operating mode [for example, the operating mode for rotating downward]. When an operation is performed in a certain operation mode [for example, a single-press operation mode], an image corresponding to the first image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise] [for example, the first image and Similarly, an image of the roulette wheel image RL rotating clockwise] is displayed [for example, FIG. 40 (c2)],
In the first game performance, after operating the first operating means in the second operating mode [for example, an operating mode of rotating upward], the second operating means is operated in the same operating mode as the certain operating mode. Even when an operation is performed in an operation mode [for example, a single-press operation mode], an image corresponding to the first image [for example, an image in which the roulette wheel image RL rotates clockwise in the same way as the first image] is displayed [for example, FIG. 40(d2)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, when the second operation means is operated, regardless of the operation mode of the first operation means immediately before (even if it is the first operation mode, the second operation mode is ) a common image (an image corresponding to the first image) is displayed. In other words, an image corresponding to the first image is associated with the certain operation mode of the second operation means, and it feels strange because the previous operation mode of the player is not reflected. Although some people may remember this, for those who know this association and operate the second operating means in the certain operating mode, the effect will be easy to understand. This is especially likely to be preferred by advanced users who know the above mapping.

Note that the second operation means may be an operation means that has only one operation mode (for example, single press), or may be an operation means that has multiple operation modes (for example, single press, long press, continuous press). It may be a means. The first operation mode may be, for example, a single press.

Also,
“The first operation mode is an operation mode in which the first operation means is operated in a first direction [for example, downward],
The second operation mode is an operation mode in which the first operation means is operated in a second direction [for example, upward],
The first image is a direction corresponding to the first direction of a certain image [for example, the roulette wheel image RL] [for example, a clockwise direction and a downward direction when viewed from the arrow image AR] It is an image that represents movement [e.g. rotation] to
The second image is a movement of the certain image in a direction corresponding to the second direction [for example, in a counterclockwise direction and upward when viewed from the arrow image AR] [for example, This is an image that represents rotation.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The operation mode is a simple operation mode, and it is easy to distinguish between the first operation mode and the second operation mode. Further, the first image is also intuitively easy to understand, and the second image is also intuitively easy to understand. As a result, it becomes possible to encourage players to participate more actively in the game.

Note that the first image may be an image in which the certain image (for example, an image of a certain object) moves in the same direction as the first direction, or may be an image in which the certain image (for example, an image of a certain object) moves in the same direction as the first direction. The image may be an image that moves in a direction that can be moved, or may be an image that moves in a direction that is related to the first direction. The second image may be an image in which the certain image (for example, an image of a certain object) moves in the same direction as the second direction, or may be an image in which the certain image (for example, an image of a certain object) is moved in the same direction as the second direction, or The image may be an image that moves in a direction that can be moved, or may be an image that moves in a direction that is related to the second direction.

Also,
“The performance means is also capable of executing a second game performance [for example, the defeat rate increase challenge performance and selection performance shown in FIG. 41] with an operation validity period in which the first operation means is valid,
In the second game performance, no matter which operation mode the first operating means is operated during the valid operation period, a common image [for example, a defeat rate display image KR in which the defeat rate increases] is displayed. ] is displayed.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to have a rich variety of presentations, which leads to an increase in the interest of the game. In addition, since the second game performance is independent of the operation mode of the first operation means, the operation of the first operation means becomes easier, it becomes easier to earn the amount of operation, and the game Sometimes you can focus on progress.

Note that the performance means may be capable of executing an operation promotion performance (for example, an operation promotion image) that prompts the operation of the first operation means performed in the first game performance. The operation promotion effect may be a mode that prompts a certain operation mode (for example, a default direction), a mode that encourages multiple operation modes, or a mode that simply prompts an operation without specifying an operation mode. It may also be in a form of prompting.

Further, in the first game performance, if the second operation means is operated without operating the first operation means, or if the operation is performed in the certain operation mode promoted by the operation promotion performance. An image corresponding to the image (for example, the first image or the second image) may be displayed.

Further, the first operation means may have a display indicating the certain operation mode promoted by the operation promotion effect, and the operation promotion effect may be provided near the first operation means. The display may include a display prompting the user to display the certain operation mode. Since an image corresponding to the image (for example, the first image or the second image) when the operation is performed in the certain operation mode promoted by the operation promotion effect is displayed, it is easy to understand and does not make the user feel uncomfortable. It will be a performance that will be different.

Further, there may be a third effect in which the amount of effect updated by the second operating means is greater than the amount of effect updated by the first operating means. In the third effect, when the first operating means is operated to a certain limit in a certain direction, a display may be displayed indicating that the first operating means has been operated to the limit.

Further, the first operating means may have a third operating mode. The third operation mode may be, for example, a pushing operation mode, and the first operation means may protrude only when the first operation means is pushed in.

Furthermore, an effect may be performed in which the option displayed on the display means is selected using the first operating means, and a short-time brake control may be performed on the first operating means in accordance with the switching timing of the option. . By performing short-term brake control on the first operating means, the selected sensation can be conveyed through tactile sensation.

According to the above description,
``The first gaming state [for example, the 2-bet bonus non-internal winning state or the state in which setting b is set] and the second gaming state [for example, the 2-bet betting bonus internal winning state or the state in which setting 1 is set] a gaming state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] capable of executing control to shift to one of a plurality of gaming states including
A notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277) or a title panel lamp 164] that can execute the first notification [for example, the first voice saying "Please confirm" or turning off the title panel lamp 164]; ,
A game machine comprising:
The notification means may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102 or an operation to turn off the setting key switch 281] is performed in the first gaming state. It is a certain means,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player.

The first gaming state is a non-internal winning state in which the first number of coins is bet and the bonus is not won, and the second gaming state is a non-internally winning state in which the first number of coins is bet and the bonus is not won. It may also refer to an internal winning state in which the winning state has been won (the same applies below). Alternatively, the first gaming state is an internal winning state in which a first number of coins is bet and a bonus is won, and the second gaming state is an internal winning state in which a player bets a first number of coins and wins a bonus. It may also refer to an internal winning state in which a person bets a number of coins and wins a bonus (the same applies below).

The second gaming state is a normal gaming state or an initial setting gaming state, and the first gaming state is a state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state [for example, a penalty bonus state, a setting b The first gaming state may be, for example, a non-advantageous zone state, a non-bonus winning state, a state where no points or items are acquired, etc. (The same applies below).

A door body may be provided, and the certain operation may be an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state, or may be an operation to close the door body ( The same applies below).

The first notification may be a notification suggesting that the player is in the first gaming state or a notification that makes him/her aware that the player is in the first gaming state [for example, a notification such as "This is the first gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Please confirm"] (the same applies below).

The notification means includes a first notification means [for example, the speakers (272, 277)], a second notification means [for example, the title panel lamp 164], and a third notification means [for example, the effect image display device]. 157] (the same applies below).

Furthermore, the gaming state when setting b is set may be the first gaming state, and in that case, the gaming mode may be changed during the gaming state with RT=gaming mode (the same applies below). ).

Furthermore, in place of the game state control means, a game control means that controls a game based on the setting of the first setting value and a game based on the setting of the second setting value. "The game executed based on the setting of the first setting value (first game) may be executed based on the setting of the second setting value. The game may be more disadvantageous to the player than the game played (second game) (the same applies below). Furthermore, the first gaming state can be read as a state in which the first set value is set, and the second gaming state can be read as a state in which the second setting value is set (hereinafter (The same applies to

In addition, instead of the game state control means, "a game in an internal winning state in which a certain combination is won internally as a result of a lottery with a predetermined number of coins bet, and a game in a non-internal winning state that is not the internal winning state" The non-internal winning state may be a state more disadvantageous to the player than the internal winning state (the same applies below). Further, the first gaming state can be read as the non-internal winning state, and the second gaming state can be read as the internal winning state (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
reels [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the reels are rotating [for example, FIG. 24 (23)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted.

The reel is capable of starting rotation before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means issues the first notification when the certain operation is performed while the reel is rotating. It may be a means that may be executed.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
reels [for example, reels 110 to 112],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The reel is capable of starting rotation before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 24 (22), FIG. 25 (22)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when the certain operation is performed during the rotation of the reels [for example, FIG. 24 (23)],
The notification means is configured to notify the reel when the reel is rotating and a power failure occurs before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 25 (25) to FIG. 25 (26)]. Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining rotation of the controller [for example, FIG. 25 (27)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the reels are rotating, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of payout processing in the payout means [for example, FIG. 26 (32)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The payout means is a means that is capable of starting the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is configured to perform the certain operation when the certain operation is performed during the payout process in the payout means. It may be a means that may execute the first notification.

The payout process may be a process that is started by a payment operation after inserting a medal, or may be a process that is performed based on the result of a reel stop operation after a start operation is performed after inserting a medal.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Dispensing means [for example, hopper unit 180],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The payout means is a means that can start the payout process before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 26 (31) or FIG. 27 (31)],
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification during the period of the payout process [for example, FIG. 26 (32)],
When the power is restored during the payout processing period and before the certain operation is performed [for example, FIG. 27 (35) to FIG. 27 (36)], the notification means Means for not executing the first notification even if the certain operation is performed during the remaining period of the process [for example, FIG. 27 (37)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the payout process is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted. On the other hand, after the power is restored after a power outage, the user can concentrate on the confirmation work after the power is restored without executing the first notification.

Also, according to the above description,
``Transition to one of a plurality of gaming states including a first gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus non-internally winning state] and a second gaming state [e.g., 2-bet bonus internally winning state] A game state control means [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control means 300] that can execute control to
a notification means [for example, a speaker (272, 277)] capable of executing a first notification [for example, a first voice of "Please confirm"];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The notification means is a means that may execute the first notification when a certain operation [for example, an operation to close the front door 102] is performed in the first gaming state,
The first gaming state is a gaming state that is more disadvantageous to the player than the second gaming state,
The notification means may execute the first notification while the display means is displaying the first display [for example, the character display of "Please confirm"] [for example, as shown in FIG. 23 ( 6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The person who performed the certain operation can be alerted to the fact that the state of the game machine is the first game state that is disadvantageous to the player. Further, even while the clerk at the game parlor is performing maintenance work to check whether the display on the display means is being performed normally, the clerk can be alerted.

The display means is a means capable of starting displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notification means is a means that can start displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed, and the notifying means is a means that can start displaying the first display before the certain operation is performed. The first notification may be executed when the notification is performed.

Also,
“The gaming state control means changes from the first gaming state to the second gaming state when a certain condition [for example, a condition such as winning a bonus winnings with a predetermined number of coins bet and not winning the bonus winnings]” is satisfied. A means for executing control for transitioning to a gaming state,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first notification serves as a reminder to perform the initial settings.

Also,
“The above-mentioned condition is a condition that includes executing one or more games [for example, one or more games must be executed to win a bonus combination]”
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the clerk of the game parlor executes the game before the shop opens, the player can play the game from the second gaming state.

The certain condition is a condition including that a game is played one or more times with a predetermined number of coins bet, and that a certain combination is won. In other words, the above-mentioned certain condition may be a condition that may be satisfied by playing a game with a predetermined number of coins bet and winning a certain combination. The condition may be established by playing a game in the state and winning a certain role, but not winning the certain role. What has been explained here is also the same below.

Also,
"The notification means is a means that does not perform the first notification when the certain operation is performed a predetermined time [for example, the second time] [for example, FIG. 23 (8)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

When the certain operation is performed after the predetermined time (for example, the second time), the store clerk is often already aware of the operation, and redundant notifications can be avoided.

Also,
"The notification means is a means for executing a second notification [e.g., a second voice of "Completed]] when the first gaming state shifts to the second gaming state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The second notification allows the player to confirm that the disadvantageous gaming condition has been resolved.

The second notification may be a notification indicating that the game has moved to the second gaming state or a notification indicating that the game is in the second gaming state [for example, a notification such as "It is the second gaming state"]. Alternatively, it may be a warning notification that does not specify the target of the warning [for example, a notification such as "Completed" or "Returning"] (the same applies below).

Also,
``A setting change that changes the previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player. A setting change means for performing the process [for example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 that executes the setting change process shown in FIG. 10],
When the certain operation is performed after the setting change process [for example, a process that includes operating the power switch 244, setting key switch 281, etc. that cannot be operated without opening the front door 102] is an operation,
When the notification means executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed in the first gaming state in the first gaming state after the setting change process is started. is a certain means [for example, Fig. 23 (6)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even though the setting change process has started and the adjustment of the player's degree of advantage has started, the player remains at a disadvantage in the first gaming state, so the notification means executes the first notification. , it is possible to make the person making the setting change aware that the first gaming state is in effect.

The setting change process may be a process that cannot be started unless the door body is opened (the same applies below).

Also,
"The notification means is a means that can execute the third notification after the setting change process is started [for example, FIG. 23 (3)] until the certain operation is performed [for example, Figure 23 (5)],
The third notification is a notification performed when the setting change process is completed [for example, a voice notification saying "the door is open" or "the settings have been changed"],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The notification unit may be a unit that executes the first notification when the certain operation is performed after executing the second notification (the same applies hereinafter).

The third notification may be a notification that the setting change process has been completed or a notification indicating that the setting change process has been completed [for example, a notification such as "setting change has been completed"]. Alternatively, the notification may be a notification regarding the state of the game machine (for example, a notification such as "the door is open") (the same applies below).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 34 (81) in which medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 34 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 34 (81)] is 34 (61) to (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed.

Even if the game is continued when the operation means is operated in the first state, and after the game ends, the next game is not started unless the setting confirmation process is completed. good.

If the operation means is operated while no medals have been inserted, subsequent bet operations may not be accepted. That is, if the operation means is operated and the setting confirmation process is performed in a state where no bet operation is performed, the game may not be started.

The case where the operation means is operated means the case where the setting confirmation process is not executed.

The operation means includes a setting change means for performing a setting change process of changing a previously set setting value to a new setting value selected from a plurality of types of setting values having different degrees of advantage to the player, and the operating means It may also be a means that is operated when changing settings (the same applies hereinafter).

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 34 (81) in which medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 34 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 34 (81)] is 34 (61) to (62)],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 34 (52)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed. That is, after operating the operating means, the clerk of the game parlor can check the first display by the display means, and can detect fraudulent activity based on the first display, and can expose the fraudulent person. There are cases.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

The display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened [for example, the open sensor 294], and the display means detects that the sensor detects that the door body is opened. means for displaying the first display [for example, FIG. 30 (52)] when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected; The first display may not be displayed when the first display is performed [for example, (55) in FIG. 30].

Also, according to the above description,
``Setting confirmation means that performs a setting confirmation process to confirm one setting value set from among multiple types of setting values [for example, settings 1, 2, 4 to 6, b] that have different degrees of advantage for the player [ For example, the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300],
an operating means operated when confirming the settings [e.g., setting key switch 281];
Display means [for example, effect image display device 157],
A game machine comprising:
The operation means is a means that may be operated in the first state,
The first state is a state in which a bet number of 1 or more is set [for example, the state in FIG. 34 (81) in which medals are taken care of or medals are inserted by operating the bet buttons 130 to 132],
When the operation means is operated in the first state [for example, FIG. 34 (82)], the bet amount set in the first state [for example, the bet number set in FIG. 34 (81)] is 34 (61) to (62)],
The display means may display a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"] when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 34 (52)],
The display means does not display the first display even when the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 33 (82)], and the payment operation is performed in the first state [for example, 33 (58)] When the payout process is completed, the first display may be displayed [for example, FIG. 33 (59)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the game is not interrupted by the operation of the operating means, it is possible to catch a fraudulent person who has fraudulently operated the operating means, and the fraudulent person may be exposed. That is, after operating the operating means, the clerk of the game parlor can check the first display by the display means, and can detect fraudulent activity based on the first display, and can expose the fraudulent person. There are cases. In addition, even if the operation means is operated, the first display may not be displayed, and even in this case, the first display may be displayed when the payment process is completed and the person leaves the seat, causing fraud. The act can be discovered and the wrongdoer may be exposed.

Note that the display means includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the display means detects that the door body is opened. means (for example, FIG. 30 (52)) for displaying a first display [for example, setting confirmation display] when the operation means is operated while the sensor is being detected; The first display may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in the detection state [for example, FIG. 30 (55)].

Also,
``A medal slot [for example, medal slot 141],
the first passage,
a second passageway [e.g., storage passageway 173];
a medal blocker [for example, medal blocker 172] that distributes medals inserted from the medal slot into either the first passage or the second passage;
Equipped with
The first passage is a medal return passage [for example, return passage 266],
The medal blocker may distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the first passage when the operating means is operated [for example, FIG. 30 (52)] ,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

After operating the operating means, a clerk at the game parlor can check how the medals have passed. Furthermore, the game cannot be started after the operating means is operated, and the store clerk can calmly change the settings without starting the game by mistake.

The medal return path is a path connected to a medal discharge port (eg, medal payout port 155).

The second passage is a medal storage passage (for example, the storage passage 173), and the medals that have passed through the medal storage passage are stored in a bucket (storage tank) (for example, the bucket 181).

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The operating means is a means that can be operated when the door body is in an open state [for example, the setting key switch 281 shown in FIG. 3(a)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
``The operation means is operated also in the second state [for example, the pseudo-closed state of the front door 102 shown in FIG. It is a means in which there are cases,
The medal blocker is for distributing medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 30 ( 55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The second state includes a sensor [e.g., open sensor 294] that detects that the door is open, and the operating means is a means that becomes operable by opening the door. It may also be a state in which the sensor is not detecting.

Further, the medal blocker may be configured to distribute medals inserted from the medal slot into the second passage when the operating means is operated in the first state. For example, FIG. 30 (55)].

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying the setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the operation means is operated [for example, FIG. 30 (55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Maintenance of the game machine in the second state is not hindered.

The set value display means may be a means that does not display the set value in the second state even if the operation means is operated.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (for example, a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the operation means is operated. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the operation of the operating means is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operating means is operated, it is advantageous for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., a setting key switch on signal] to the outside [e.g., a hall computer] when the operation means is operated. Features a game machine. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the operation means is being operated normally. Particularly in the case where the set value display means does not display the set value even if the operation means is operated, it is useful to be able to confirm the set value from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means performs a first operation in a first state [for example, the state shown in FIG. 33 (81) or FIG. This means does not display the first display when [for example, an operation to turn on the setting key switch 281] is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case") [for example, in FIG. 82) or Figure 34 (82)],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 33 (59) or FIG. 34 (62)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. I can do it.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

Also, according to the above description,
A gaming machine equipped with a display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"],
The display means displays a first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281] in a first state [for example, the state of FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82) is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). )],
After the first case, if a state different from the first state occurs [for example, the payout is completed due to a payment operation or the game with the number of bets set in the first state ends], the display means The first display is displayed [for example, FIG. 33 (59) or FIG. 34 (62)],
The display means displays the first display even when a second operation [for example, an operation to cause the open sensor 294 to detect the opening/closing piece] is performed in the first state after the first case. It is a means of not displaying [for example, FIG. 33 (57) or FIG. 34 (57)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. I can do it.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

The second operation includes a door body [for example, the front door 102] and a sensor [for example, an open sensor 294] that detects that the door body is opened, and the second operation is performed when the sensor detects that the door body is opened. It may also be an operation to detect this.

Also, according to the above description,
A display means [for example, effect image display device 157] capable of displaying a first display [for example, "setting confirmation display"];
a setting value display means capable of displaying a setting value [for example, a setting value display 293];
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a first operation [for example, the setting key switch 281] in a first state [for example, the state of FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82) is performed (hereinafter referred to as the "first case"). )],
If, after the first case, a state different from the first state occurs [e.g., completion of payout due to settlement operation or end of game with the number of bets set in the first state] (hereinafter referred to as "second state") ), the first display is displayed by the display means [for example, FIG. 33 (59) or FIG. 34 (62)],
The set value display means is a means capable of displaying the set value in the second case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

By not displaying the first display due to the first operation during maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority. Further, even if a second operation is subsequently performed while remaining in the first state, the first display is not displayed, and the maintenance work can continue to be performed with priority. In addition, if it is desired to perform maintenance to check whether the first display is displayed on the display means, it is sufficient to shift the state to a state different from the first state, and the maintenance can be carried out in stages. I can do it.

The setting value may be selected from a plurality of types of setting values that have different degrees of advantage for the player.

The first operation is the operation of the operating means operated when confirming the settings. Further, the first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set, and a state different from the first state means that the game with the number of bets set in the first state is completed. or a state in which the payment operation is performed and the payout process is completed in the first state.

The first display may be a display that is displayed when the setting confirmation process is started, or may be a display that is displayed while the setting confirmation process is being executed. The setting confirmation process is a process that may be started when the operating means (for example, the setting key switch 281, which is the first switch) is turned on while the power is turned on. The setting confirmation means confirmation of the currently set setting values, and during the setting confirmation process, the setting value display means displays the setting values, and the display means displays the first display ( For example, the setting confirmation display) is displayed.

In addition,
“The display means is a means for not displaying the setting value in the first case,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Since the set value is also not displayed, maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with further priority.

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The first operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state [for example, FIG. 33 (52), FIG. 33 (82), FIG. 34 (52), FIG. 34 (82)]. is,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
“The first state is a state in which the number of bets of 1 or more is set,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The first state can be easily set during maintenance work by a game clerk.

Also,
``Equipped with a setting value display means [for example, a setting value display 293] capable of displaying a setting value,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the first operation is performed [for example, FIG. 30 (55)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

During maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor, the set value is not displayed due to the first operation, so that the maintenance work that was being performed before the first operation can be continued with priority.

The set value is a value related to the degree of advantage of the player, and for example, depending on the set value, the probability of winning a special winning combination or jackpot, the payout rate of game media, or the winning probability of various lotteries may vary depending on the set value. Different (same below).

Also,
``A gaming machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the first operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the first operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. In particular, when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is equipped with a transmitting means [e.g., external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [e.g., setting key switch on signal] to the outside [e.g., hall computer] when the first operation is performed. Features a game machine. ”
Also explained.

It is possible to confirm from the outside that the first operation is being performed normally. Particularly when the display means does not display the first display in the first case, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

Also, according to the above description,
``An operation means that can be switched between an on state and an off state by operation [for example, a setting key switch 281],
a setting value display means capable of displaying a setting value [for example, a setting value display 293];
A game machine comprising:
The set value display means is a means that may display a set value when there is an on operation [for example, FIG. 33 (52) or FIG. 34 (52)],
The on operation is an operation to switch the operating means from the off state to the on state,
The set value display means is a means that may not display the set value even if the on operation is performed [for example, FIG. 33 (82) or FIG. 34 (82)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

That is, the set value display means is a means that sometimes displays the set value and sometimes does not display the set value when there is an on operation.

Even if the ON operation is fraudulently performed by an unauthorized person during business hours, the unauthorized person can be prevented from checking the set value.

The device includes a door body and a sensor that detects that the door body is opened, and the set value display means is configured such that the on-operation is performed while the sensor is detecting that the door body is opened. The set value may be displayed when the sensor is not detected, and the set value may not be displayed when the operating means is operated in a state where the sensor is not detected.

Also,
“Equipped with a door body [for example, front door 102],
The on operation is an operation that can be performed when the door body is in an open state.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

It is possible to prohibit the player from operating the operating means.

Also,
"The set value display means is a means that may display the set value when the operation means is in the OFF state [for example, FIG. 32 (73)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Even when the operating means is in the OFF state, the set value can be confirmed, which may improve the workability of maintenance work by a clerk at the game parlor.

If the power is restored after the operating means is in the on state and the operating means is switched to the off state, the display means will display the set value even if the operating means is in the off state. Display.

Also,
``A game machine characterized by comprising a light emitting means (e.g., a monitor LED provided on each of the main control board and the external centralized terminal board 248) capable of emitting light when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed that the turning-on operation is performed normally by the light emitting means emitting light. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is beneficial for the light emitting means to emit light.

Also,
``It is characterized by comprising a transmitting means [for example, external centralized terminal board 248] capable of transmitting a signal [for example, a setting key switch ON signal] to the outside [for example, a hall computer] when the above-mentioned ON operation is performed. A game machine. ”
Also explained.

It can be confirmed from the outside that the above-mentioned on operation is being performed normally. Particularly in the case where the display means does not display the set value even after the on-operation is performed, it is useful to be able to confirm it from the outside.

The functions and effects described in the embodiments described above are merely a list of the most preferred functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are not limited to those described here. In addition, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. It may be applied to modified examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, the constituent elements contained only in the embodiments, examples, modifications, various examples, supplementary notes, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, examples, modifications, etc. Even when applied to examples, various examples, supplementary notes, etc., it stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Hereinafter, a gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel gaming machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball gaming machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 44 to 77. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 44 to 77 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. In the explanation using FIG. 77, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 44 to 77.

[Embodiment A]
In the slot machine of this embodiment, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the rotation start instruction operation, the propriety of internal winning of the plurality of types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels individually stops rotation by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, If the winning combination based on the lottery result and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels stop match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that plays a series of games that end without paying out any money.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 44. FIG. 44 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 viewed from the front side (player side).

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 44 corresponds to an example of a gaming machine of the present invention, and includes a main body 101 and a front door 102 that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. . Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface (not shown) are stored in the center of the main body 101, and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this embodiment, a suitable number of each pattern is printed on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. When viewed from the player, approximately three symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed vertically from the reel window 113, making a total of nine symbols visible. By rotating each reel 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this embodiment, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the backlight be shielded for each pattern so that each pattern can be illuminated evenly. In addition, inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (index sensor; not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each reel 110 to 112, and the light emitting part of this optical sensor A light-shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the light-receiving section and the light-receiving section. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

The winning line display lamp 120 is a lamp that indicates the winning line 114 that becomes valid. The valid winning line 114 is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as game media. There are five winning lines 114. For example, if one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line will be valid, and if two medals are being bet, three horizontal winning lines (the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line) will be valid, and the medal will be When 3 coins are bet, 5 lines including the downward right winning line and the upward right winning line may be made valid as the winning lines. Note that the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to five lines, and may be one horizontal winning line in the middle. For example, when one medal is bet, the five lines of the middle horizontal winning line, upper horizontal winning line, lower horizontal winning line, right down winning line, and right up winning line are set as valid winning lines. Alternatively, the same number of winning lines may be uniformly set as valid winning lines regardless of the number of bets.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 notifies the player that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when the player wins a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It's a lamp. The reel panel lamp 128 is a lamp for performance.

The bet buttons 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 100. In this embodiment, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, up to a maximum of three coins, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. It has become so. Hereinafter, the bet button 132 is also referred to as the MAX bet button. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically (bet operation) using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141. It is a meaning that includes.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this embodiment, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays. Note that the payout number display 127 of this embodiment also functions as an effect device that notifies information regarding the stop operation (for example, the order of operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.).

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped push switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112. . More specifically, the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the stop button 137 (sometimes referred to as the left stop button), and the left reel 110 can be stopped by operating the stop button 138 (sometimes referred to as the middle stop button). By doing so, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the stop button 139 (sometimes referred to as a right stop button), the right reel 112 can be stopped.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as stop operations, the first stop operation will be referred to as the first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as the second stop operation, the last stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation, and the first stop operation will be referred to as the third stop operation. The reel that is the target of the operation may be referred to as a first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is sometimes referred to as the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is sometimes referred to as the third stop reel. Further, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is referred to as an operation order or a pressing order. The order of operations in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order", and the order of operations in which the first stop reel is the center reel 111 and the stop operation is called "order of push operations" or simply "push in order". The operation sequence in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 as a stop operation is called the "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push." In addition, in this embodiment, the order of operations based on the combination of the stop operation, the first stop operation, the second stop operation, and the third stop operation may be abbreviated. For example, a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 is "left", a stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112. Sometimes written as "left center right." Note that a light emitting body may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body may be turned on to notify the player.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. A medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided at the bottom of the title panel 162.

A sound hole 181 is provided next to the medal payout port 155. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A presentation device 160 is disposed at the top of the front door 102, and a sound hole 143 is also provided at the top of the presentation device 160. The sound holes 181 and 143 are holes for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. The production device 160 includes a shutter (shielding device) 163 consisting of two right shutters 163a and a left shutter 163b that can be opened and closed in the horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 157 (not shown) disposed on the back side of the shutter 163. When the right shutter 163a and the left shutter 163b open horizontally outward in front of the liquid crystal display device 157, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 appears in front of the slot machine 100 (on the player's side). The structure is such that

The liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 of this embodiment also functions as a presentation device that executes a presentation to be described later. For example, an operation navigation is executed to notify information regarding the stop operation (for example, the operation order and operation timing of the stop buttons 137 to 139).

The information display button 191 is an operation button for calling and operating a user menu (for example, a menu for setting various information by individual players). The information display button 191 includes a cross key button 191a and an OK button 191b. The cross key button 191a is a selection button used when the player selects one of a plurality of options. The cross key button 191a is composed of up, down, left, and right arrow keys, and by operating each arrow key, the cursor can be moved in the direction of the arrow. The OK button 191b is a button that confirms the option on which the cursor is positioned. In this embodiment, it is used, for example, to set information using the user menu, to set volume and light intensity, and to select a character (stage) for a performance performed after winning a bonus. In this embodiment, the information display button 191 may be referred to as a cross button 191.

The production button 192 is a button that can be operated when performing a production that prompts the user to operate the button. In this embodiment, when the performance button 192 is operated, a performance suggesting the award of benefits such as the number of additional tickets at AT is executed as a response performance.

Note that it does not need to be a liquid crystal display device, as long as it is configured to be able to display various performance images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7 segment display), a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, etc. , a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape, and is configured so that the entirety can be visually recognized by the player. In the case of this embodiment, the display screen is rectangular, but may be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this embodiment, it may be a curved surface.

FIG. 45 is a diagram showing the internal configuration of the slot machine 100. FIG. 45 (a) is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open, and FIG. It is an enlarged view of the door relay board 290 that is provided.

The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. A reel unit 700 including three reels 110 to 112 is arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reel unit 700, that is, on the side plate 260 on the left side, a sub control board storage case 220 that stores a sub control board therein is disposed. Further, an information output circuit 334 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the side, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

Further, on the right side of the reel unit 700, a setting key switch 281 is provided for changing the setting values (also referred to as gaming modes) of the slot machine 100 and confirming the changed setting values. Here, the set value adjusts the ratio of the total number of gaming media paid out by the gaming machine to the total number of gaming media used by the player as the number of bets on the gaming machine when playing games for a predetermined period of time. It is a value called a "payout rate", and can be set in multiple stages, for example, from setting "1" to setting "6".

The setting key switch 281 is a key switch that is electrically turned on and off by inserting and rotating a predetermined setting key (not shown). Specifically, when a predetermined setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise, the setting key switch sensor provided in the setting key switch 281 detects the ON state, and when turned counterclockwise, the setting key switch sensor is turned on. Detects OFF state.

A hopper unit 180 (a device for dispensing medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a voltage monitoring circuit 330 (see FIG. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. Power switch 244 is a toggle switch electrically connected to power supply device 252 . This power switch 244 allows the slot machine 100 to be powered on (power ON) or powered off (power OFF). The power supply device 252 converts the alternating current power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100 into direct current, converts it into a predetermined voltage, and supplies the voltage to each control section such as the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400, and to each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the hopper unit 180 to accommodate medals overflowing from the hopper unit 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and at the top of the reel window 113 is a production device 160 and a production control board (not shown) that controls the production device 160. (omitted), and an upper speaker 272 is provided. At the bottom of the reel window 113, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops illegal medals, etc. into the medal tray 161. . Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 181. Note that an open sensor 294 is provided on the back side of the front door 102. The open sensor 294 is configured to be L (OFF) when the front door 102 is closed, and H (ON) when the front door 102 is open.

On the back side of the front door 102, a door relay board 290 is arranged below the reel window 113. This door relay board 290 is provided with a reset switch 291, a setting change button 292, and a setting value display 293, as shown in FIG. 45(b).

The reset switch 291 is a push button type switch, and by pressing the reset switch 291 (pressing it for a short period of time), an error in the slot machine 100 can be reset.

The setting change button 292 is also a push button type switch similar to the reset switch 291. The operating procedure for changing the setting value using the setting change button 292 will be described later.

The set value display 293 is a display such as a 7-segment LED. This setting value display 293 can display numerically the setting values (gaming modes) 1 to 6 set by the setting change button 292.

Note that the setting value display 293 displays the currently set setting value in numbers when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON) in the power-on state (power ON). Since it is displayed, it can be used to check the currently set setting values. That is, when the setting key is inserted into the setting key switch 281 in the power-on state (power ON) and turned clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), a setting value confirmation process that allows checking the setting value is started, and the setting key switch 281 When the setting key is inserted and turned counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value confirmation process ends.

Here, the operating procedure for changing the set value will be explained. By inserting a setting key (not shown) into the setting key switch 281 and turning it clockwise (setting key OFF → ON), the power switch 244 is changed from the power cut-off state (power OFF) to the power-on state (power ON). The setting value change becomes effective (the setting value changing process is started), and each time the setting change button 292 is pressed, the setting value changes in order from 1 to 6, and the desired setting value can be selected. Note that by operating the start lever 135, the set value selected at that time is determined. Finally, by turning the setting key counterclockwise (setting key ON→OFF), the setting value changing process is completed.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIG. 46. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 is equipped with a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, stop of reels, etc. ROM 306 for storing position etc., RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc. Equipped with WDT (watch dog timer) 314. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as an opportunity to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 that is used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a number in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a random number generation circuit 316 that is activated when the power is turned on. It is equipped with a start signal output circuit 338 that outputs a signal (reset signal), and when the start signal is input from this start signal output circuit 338, the CPU 304 starts game control (main processing of the main control section described later). ).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, a stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, an index sensor for the reel 110, The state of the reel 111 index sensor, reel 112 index sensor, information display button 191 sensor, production button 192 sensor, etc.) is monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random value generation circuit 316. The random number generation circuit 316 that receives this signal latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A stop button 137 sensor, a stop button 138 sensor, and a stop button 139 sensor are installed on each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and detect the operation of the stop button by the player.

The bet button 130 sensor, the bet button 131 sensor, and the bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 as medals to be inserted into the game. Detect input operation in case. The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. The information display button 191 sensor detects the operation of the information display button 191, and the effect button 192 sensor detects the operation of the effect button 192. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of reel 110, the index sensor of reel 111, and the index sensor of reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and each time the light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes, become the level. When the CPU 304 detects this signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, and various lamps 336 (winning line display lamp 120, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored number of coins display 125, game information A drive circuit 328 is provided for driving the display 126 and the payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, gaming status) of the machine 100. The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply that is supplied to the main control unit 300. In this embodiment, if the voltage is less than 9 V), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control section 300 and the first sub-control section 400 is one-way communication, and the main control section 300 can send signals such as commands to the first sub-control section 400; Signals such as commands cannot be sent from the unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that receives control commands transmitted by the main control unit 300 via an input interface and controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on the control commands. There is. This basic circuit 402 is equipped with a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. are doing. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are connected to the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

The first sub-control unit 400 is also provided with a drive circuit 422, and the drive circuit 422 is connected to various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, notification lamp) via an input/output interface. 123 etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 424 that drives the shutter 163, and the shutter 163 is connected to the drive circuit 424 via an output interface. This drive circuit 424 outputs a drive signal to a stepping motor (not shown) provided in the shutter 163 in response to a command from the CPU 404.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 426, and a shutter sensor 428 is connected to the sensor circuit 426 via an input interface. The CPU 404 monitors the state of the shutter sensor 428 at every interrupt time.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 controls the liquid crystal display device 157 and the like.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 504 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 516 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 518 are connected to the VDP 516 via a bus. The VDP 516 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 518, and displays the image on the liquid crystal display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 47. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this embodiment, 20 symbols with numbers 1 to 20) of a plurality of types (8 types in this embodiment) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 1 to 20 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this embodiment, the number 1 piece on the left reel 110 has a “bell” symbol, the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “watermelon” symbol, and the number 2 piece on the right reel 112 has a “ Seven 1" designs are arranged on each.

<Slot machine processing>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control section main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables are initialized to be stored in the RAM 308, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

Further, a check is made as to whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated based on the detection by the sensor circuit 320, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, the number of medals that have been inserted is determined, and the first sub-control unit 400 In response, preparations are made to send a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated.

In step S103, valid winning lines are determined.

In step S104, a random number generated by the random number generation circuit 316 is obtained.

In step S105, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state (RT system gaming state), and the internal lottery is performed using this and the random number value acquired in step S104. I do. As a result of the internal lottery, if any winning combination (including an activation combination) is internally won, the condition device (flag) of the internally won combination is activated (the flag of that winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

In addition, to give an overview of the internal winning probability of each winning combination, the internal winning probability of each winning combination is based on random numbers obtained during the internal lottery, which will be described later, using numerical data that falls within the range of lottery data associated with each winning combination. It is obtained by dividing the value by numerical data in the range (65536 in this embodiment). The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each win or loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. Actually, in this winning combination internal lottery process, lottery data corresponding to the current setting value is used from among the six lottery data prepared for each setting value. The six lottery data prepared for each set value have different winning probabilities for at least one winning combination.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. Regarding the reel stop data of winning combinations in which the stop operation order is questioned, the operation conditions are also set, and when the reel stop data corresponding to these is selected, the operation conditions are also set.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if "watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol - watermelon symbol" are aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that the watermelon prize has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control is performed to transition the gaming state (RT-based gaming state, AT-based gaming state), and for example, in the case of a BB win, preparations are made to start BB gaming from the next time. do. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 49) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be explained using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this embodiment). Start processing at a predetermined cycle.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically (maintained) so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this embodiment) and a WDT interrupt occurs (so that an abnormality in processing is not detected). In the embodiment, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control unit timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 50. Note that FIG. 50(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 50(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 50(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 50(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, effect control processing (details will be described later) is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S308, shutter control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if the effect data read in step S305 includes a command for the shutter 163, this command is output to the drive circuit 424.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 50(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 50(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 50(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 51. Note that FIG. 51(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 51(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 51(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 51(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S3001 of FIG. 51(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be explained using FIG. 51(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 51(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this embodiment), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute at the cycle of

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 51(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S4006 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 51(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Playability>
Next, the gameplay of this embodiment will be explained. FIG. 52(a) is a diagram showing the overall game flow, and is a transition diagram of the gaming state (also referred to as AT-based gaming state, hereinafter abbreviated as gaming state) regarding the performance of the main control unit 300.

-Advantageous section/non-advantageous section The gaming state is first broadly divided into non-advantageous section and advantageous section. The non-advantageous section is an initial state, and is a period in which the operation navigation cannot be executed. A non-advantageous section normal state exists in the non-advantageous section. On the other hand, the advantageous section is a period during which the operation navigation can be executed. Here, the operation navigation is an effect that uses the liquid crystal display device 157 and the payout number display 127 to inform you of the details of the stop operation to help you win a prize. ). The advantageous section includes an advantageous section normal state, a challenge zone (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ), a normal AT state, a specialization zone, a pullback chance zone, and an ending state. In this embodiment, the non-advantageous section normal state, the advantageous section normal state, and CZ are collectively referred to as the "normal state." Further, the normal AT state, the specialization zone, the pullback chance zone, and the ending state are collectively referred to as the "AT state."

Regarding the state transition between the non-advantageous section and the advantageous section, if a predetermined condition is met in the normal state of the non-advantageous section (for example, in a case other than a loss based on the winning combination in the internal lottery process), the state transitions to the normal state of the advantageous section. (See route R1 in FIG. 52(a)). On the other hand, when the AT state of the advantageous section ends, the state shifts to the non-advantageous section normal state of the non-advantageous section (see route R2 in FIG. 52(a)). However, there may be cases where the AT state ends but the transition to the non-advantageous section does not occur (for example, when the AT state ends and the advantageous section transitions to the normal state). Note that the AT state of this embodiment is a differential number management type AT state, and when the difference number of sheets in the AT state reaches a specified number of sheets, the AT state ends. Here, the difference in number of coins refers to the difference between the number of paid out and inserted number of game media (for example, medals).

-Character accompanying state In this embodiment, the game state can be classified from the viewpoint of which character accompanies the main character (lord). Hereinafter, this game state will be referred to as a character accompanying state. The character accompanying state includes ``non-accompanying state'' where only Tono appears in the production, ``Princess accompanying condition'' where Tono is accompanied by the princess, and ``Princess accompanying state'' where Tono is accompanied by the old man. There is a state in which the grandpa is accompanied by an old man, and a state in which the princess and the grandpa accompany the lord and appear in the production. The state of accompanying the princess, the state of accompanying the grandfather, and the state of accompanying the grandfather and the princess are collectively referred to as the "accompanying state." In this embodiment, the accompanied state is more advantageous for the player than the non-accompanied state. For example, the probability of transitioning from the current gaming state to a more advantageous gaming state is set to be high (for example, transition from advantageous zone normal state to CZ state, transition from CZ to AT state, and transition from AT state to specialized zone). (with a high probability of transitioning to , etc.), the continuation of an advantageous gaming state is set to be longer (for example, AT is added, and the end conditions of the AT state are set to be more advantageous), or special A performance (for example, a corresponding role winning notification performance that is executed when a corresponding role of an accompanying character is won, which will be described later) is executed.

FIG. 53 shows the characters displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in each character accompanying state. Specifically, FIG. 53(a) shows the character in the non-accompanying state, FIG. 53(b) shows the character in the princess accompanying state, FIG. 53(c) shows the character in the grandfather accompanying state, and FIG. 53(d) shows the character in the grandfather accompanying state. & Shows the character in the state of accompanying the princess.

In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 52(b), character accompanying states exist in the advantageous section normal state, CZ, and normal AT state. FIG. 52(b) is a diagram showing the correspondence between the gaming state and the character accompanying state shown in FIG. 52(a). For example, in the advantageous section normal state, there are a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an grandfather accompanying state, and a grandfather & princess accompanying state, and in CZ, a princess accompanying state and a grandfather accompanying state. The normal AT state includes a non-accompanying state, a princess accompanying state, an grandfather accompanying state, and a grandfather and princess accompanying state. However, the character accompanying state may be set in a game state other than the advantageous section normal state, CZ, or normal AT state. For example, a character accompanying state may be set in the ending state.

- Advantageous section normal state In the advantageous section normal state, a CZ shift lottery process is executed to determine whether to shift to the CZ state every game. When winning the CZ shift lottery, the advantageous section normal state shifts to CZ (see route R3 in FIG. 52(a)). In rare cases, if special conditions are met (for example, if you win a rare combination), you can directly change from the normal state of the advantageous section to the AT state without going through the CZ state from the normal state of the advantageous section. There are cases where the transition occurs (see route R4 in FIG. 52(a)).

54(a) is a table schematically showing the accompanying lottery process (more specifically, the accompanying lottery table used for the accompanying lottery process) in the normal state of the advantageous section, and FIG. 54(b) is a table showing the accompanying lottery process in the normal state of the advantageous section. It is a table schematically showing a CZ transition lottery process in a normal state (more specifically, a CZ entry lottery table used for the CZ transition lottery process).

The accompanying lottery process is a lottery process for determining an accompanying character, and is executed every game. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(a), the accompanying lottery process is executed based on the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process. For example, if you win a watermelon, the old man will be selected as the accompanying character with a 25% selection rate, and if you win the chance, the old man will be selected as the accompanying character with a 100% selection rate, and the weak cherry will be selected. If you win, the princess will be selected as the accompanying character with a 25% selection rate, and if you win the strong cherry, the princess will be selected as the accompanying character with a 100% selection rate.

Note that the initial character accompanying state in the advantageous section normal state is a non-accompanying state. In addition, the accompanying state once set (for example, princess accompanying state, grandfather accompanying state, grandfather & princess accompanying state) is maintained during the guaranteed number of games (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), and the guaranteed number of games is The accompaniment ending lottery is executed every game after the elapsed time (specifically, in the princess accompanying state, the princess accompanying ending lottery ends the princess accompanying state, in the grandfather accompanying state, the grandfather accompanying ending lottery ends the grandfather accompanying state, Grandpa & Princess In the accompanying state, it is determined whether the accompanying state ends or continues based on the results of the princess accompanying ending lottery to end the princess accompanying state and the grandfather accompanying ending lottery to end the grandfather accompanying state. For example, the accompaniment ending lottery may be a lottery with a winning probability of 1/2 based on a bet operation or a start lever operation, or the accompaniment state may end when the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process is a replay. . Furthermore, in a state in which two characters are accompanying each other, that is, in an accompanying state of the old man and the princess, regulations are made so that the accompanying state does not end for two consecutive games. This is a measure to reduce player disappointment. For example, in the grandfather and princess accompanying state, if the grandfather accompanying state ends in the Nth game, the princess accompanying state is regulated so as not to end in the N+1th game. Hereinafter, this regulation will also be referred to as the companion termination regulation. In addition, in this embodiment, although the accompanying termination regulation is a restriction that the accompanying state does not end after two consecutive games, the present invention is not limited to this. For example, if a player wins one lottery to end a match, it may be prohibited to win another lottery to end a match for a predetermined number of games (eg, 5 games, etc.).

As shown in FIG. 54(a), in this embodiment, accompanying characters and winning combinations are associated. Specifically, the character associated with watermelon and chance is an old man, and the character associated with weak cherry and strong cherry is princess. Hereinafter, the winning role associated with the accompanying character will be referred to as the "corresponding role of the accompanying character."

Furthermore, in this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 54(b), the CZ transition lottery process is executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery process. For example, in the non-accompanied state, the probability of winning the CZ when winning a watermelon or a weak cherry is 0%, and the probability of winning a CZ when winning a chance or a strong cherry is 2%. For example, if you are with the old man, the probability of winning CZ when you win a watermelon is 25%, the probability of winning CZ when you win a chance is 55%, and the probability of winning a weak cherry or a strong cherry. In this case, the probability of winning CZ is 0%.

As shown in FIG. 54(b), in this embodiment, transition to CZ is easier in the accompanied state than in the non-accompanied state. Also, even in the accompanying state, it is easier to transition to CZ when two characters are accompanying each other (old man and princess accompanying state) than when one character is accompanying one character (princess accompanying state, grandfather accompanying state). It becomes. In addition, in the internal lottery process for winning combinations in the accompanying state, if a character corresponding to the accompanying character is won, it is easier to shift to CZ than when winning any other combination.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the grandfather's corresponding role (watermelon, chance) in the grandfather accompanying state and moving to CZ, and the probability of winning the princess's corresponding role (weak cherry, strong cherry) in the princess accompanying state. The probability of transitioning to CZ is the same, but it is not the same, and the probability of winning the corresponding role of the accompanying character in one accompanying state is higher than the probability of winning the corresponding role of the accompanying character in the other accompanying state. It may be treated preferentially.

- Game progress in the advantageous section normal state Next, the game progress in the advantageous section normal state will be explained using FIG. 55.

FIG. 55(a) is a diagram illustrating a time chart and an example of performance showing, in chronological order, how the game progresses in the case of transitioning from the non-accompanied state to the accompanied state and then to the non-accompanied state.

In FIG. 55(a), since the accompanying lottery was won in the M+1 game (a case where the accompanying lottery was won based on the weak cherry win; see FIG. 54(a)), the princess accompanying state starts from the M+1 game, and the M+21 This shows a case where the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state ends in the game. Note that although the princess accompanying state has started from the M+1 game, the princess accompanying precursor effect is being executed on the liquid crystal display device 157 of the M+1 game (for example, the princess appears only half the time on the screen. 55(a-1)). In this way, the character accompanying state and the presentation state on the liquid crystal display device 157 do not necessarily match. Note that even if the princess accompanying precursor effect is executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, the character accompanying state is the princess accompanying state, so the CZ transition lottery is performed based on the princess accompanying state (Fig. 54(b) )reference). However, when a precursor performance is being performed, a CZ transfer lottery may be performed based on the non-accompanying state.

In addition, in FIG. 55(a), since the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state has ended in the M+21st game, the companionship ending lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the M+22nd game, and the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started in the M+23rd game. The figure shows a case where the non-accompanying state starts from the M+23rd game because the princess won the lottery to end the accompaniment to the princess. Note that in the M+22nd game, since the accompaniment end lottery (princess accompaniment end lottery) was not won, an image of the princess accompaniment state is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see FIG. 55 (a-2)), and the M+23 game Since he won the accompaniment ending lottery (princess accompaniment ending lottery), after the accompaniment ending lottery, a blackout image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see FIG. 55 (a-3)), and after that, An image of the accompanying state is displayed (see FIG. 55(a-4)).

In this manner, in this embodiment, when the accompanying state ends, the accompanying character is erased via the blackout or whiteout end image, and then the image of the non-accompanying state is displayed. To make a player clearly aware that the character accompanying state has changed. Note that when transitioning from an accompanying state image to a non-accompanied state image, the method is not limited to this method; for example, the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157 may be temporarily shut off using a sliding door or a shutter, and then the transition may be performed. Alternatively, when the character accompanying state ends, the stage may be changed to clearly notify that the character accompanying state has been changed.

FIG. 55(b) is a time chart chronologically showing how the game progresses when two characters shift from an accompanying state to a non-accompanied state.

In FIG. 55(b), the accompanying lottery was won in the N+1st game after the Nth game in the princess accompanying state (20 games remaining) (a case where the accompanying lottery was won based on the watermelon winning). ), shows the case where the grandfather & princess accompanying state starts from the N+1st game, the guaranteed number of games for the princess accompanying state ends at the N+21st game, and the guaranteed number of games for the grandfather accompanying state ends at the N+22nd game. There is.

In addition, in FIG. 55(b), since the guaranteed number of games in the princess accompanying state has ended in the N+21st game, the accompanying end lottery (princess accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+22nd game, and the accompanying end lottery is started in the N+22nd game. (Princess accompaniment ending lottery) was won, so the N+22nd game shows the case where the grandpa is accompanied.

In addition, in FIG. 55(b), since the guaranteed number of games in the grandfather accompanying state has ended in the N+22nd game, the accompanying end lottery (grandpa accompanying end lottery) is started from the N+23rd game, and the accompanying end lottery is started in the N+23rd game. This shows a case where the player wins the Grandfather Accompanying End Lottery, but maintains the Grandfather Accompanying Status due to the above-mentioned Accompanying Termination Regulations. However, since the player won in the N+24th game of the next game (grandfather accompanying end lottery), the grandfather accompanying state is ended, and the N+24th game is a case in which a non-accompanying state is started. As described above, in this embodiment, since the companion state is restricted from ending over two consecutive games, it is possible to prevent the player from becoming extremely disappointed.

- Production of advantageous section normal state Next, the production of advantageous section normal state will be explained using FIGS. 56 and 57. FIGS. 56 and 57 show an example of performance in a predetermined game in the advantageous section normal state.

FIG. 56(a) shows a display on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of a game in a non-accompanied state (see the character in FIG. 56(a-1)). This is an example of an image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 56(a), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production suggesting the winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 56(a-2)). After the third stop operation (see image d1), based on the weak cherry winning, a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed to notify the winning of the weak cherry (see image d2 in FIG. 56(a-3)).

FIG. 56(b) shows a display on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 56(b-1)) and a weak cherry is won. This is an example of an image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 56(b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests the winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 56(b-2)). (See image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the winning of a weak cherry, perform a weak cherry winning notification effect that notifies the winning of a weak cherry (see image d2 of FIG. 56(b-3)), as well as a display exclusively for the princess accompanying state. A weak cherry winning notification effect is executed (see image d3 in FIG. 56(b-3); for example, image d3 in which the princess has a smiling expression, unlike a stopped state). In this way, when the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect indicating that the accompanying character (princess) has won the corresponding role (weak cherry) is executed. In addition, in the princess accompanying state, strong cherry is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, so if strong cherry is won in the winning role internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state and strong cherry is won, image d3 will be displayed and the accompanying character will be displayed. A corresponding role winning notification effect (see image d3 in FIG. 56(b-3)) indicating that the character's corresponding role (strong cherry) has been won is executed.

As a result, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the princess accompanying state, that is, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. By executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to make the player recognize that a special effect has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. Also, for players who know that it is advantageous to win a weak cherry or a strong cherry in the princess accompanying state, in other words, players who know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. In addition, by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the player has won the corresponding role of the accompanying character and stimulate the player's desire to play.

FIG. 56(c) shows what is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a watermelon is won and the watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the princess accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 56(c-1)). This is an example image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 56(c), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests the winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 56(c-2)). After the third stop operation (see image d1), based on the watermelon winning, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify the watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 56(c-3)). In the princess accompanying state, since Watermelon is not the corresponding role of the accompanying character, unlike in FIG. 56(b), the corresponding role winning notification effect is not executed.

FIG. 57(a) shows what is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a watermelon is won and the watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather accompanying state (see the character in FIG. 57(a-1)). This is an example image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 57(a), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production suggesting the winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 57(a-2)). (See image d1), after the third stop operation, based on the watermelon winning, a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify the watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 57(a-3)), and a watermelon winning only for the grandfather accompanying state is executed. Execute the notification effect (see image d5 in FIG. 57(a-3). For example, image d5 in which the old man has a smiling expression, which is different from the stopped state). In this way, if the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect ((see image d5 in FIG. 57 (a-3)) indicating that the accompanying character's corresponding role (watermelon) has been won is displayed. Execute.In addition, in the grandfather accompanying state, the chance eye is also a corresponding role of the accompanying character, so the image d5 is also displayed if the chance eye wins in the winning role internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather accompanying state and the chance eye wins. Then, a corresponding role winning notification effect indicating that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role (chance) is executed.

As a result, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or chance item in the grandfather accompanying state, that is, for players who do not know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character, By executing the corresponding role winning notification performance, it is possible to make the player recognize that a special performance has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. In addition, for players who know that it is advantageous to win the watermelon or chance item in the grandfather accompanying state, that is, players who know that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. By executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the player has won the corresponding role of the accompanying character and stimulate the player's desire to play.

FIG. 57(b) shows the liquid crystal display device 157 when a weak cherry is won and a weak cherry is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather and princess accompanying state (see the characters in FIG. 57(b-1)). This is an example of an image displayed on the screen. According to the production example shown in FIG. 57(b), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production that suggests a winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 57(b-2)). Based on the third stop operation and the winning of a weak cherry (see image d1), a weak cherry winning notification effect is executed to notify the winning of a weak cherry (see image d2 of FIG. 57(b-3)), and the grandfather and princess are accompanied by the grandpa and the princess. Execute a special weak cherry winning notification effect (see image d3 and image d5 in FIG. 56(b-3). For example, image d3 in which the princess has a smiling expression, unlike the old man and the princess in a stopped state. and image d5) in which the old man has a smiling expression. In this way, if the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, a corresponding role winning notification effect ((image of Figure 56 (b-3) d3 and image d5).In addition, in the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, Strong Cherry, Chance, and Watermelon are also the corresponding roles of the accompanying characters, so in the winning combination internal lottery process of the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, strong If a cherry, chance, or watermelon is won, image d3 and image d5 are also displayed, indicating that the accompanying character has won the corresponding role (strong cherry, chance, or watermelon). Execute the corresponding role winning notification performance.

FIG. 57(c) is a display on the liquid crystal display device 157 when a watermelon is won in the winning combination internal lottery process of the game in the grandfather and princess accompanying state (see the characters in FIG. 57(c-1)). This is an example of an image. According to the production example shown in FIG. 57(c), based on the start operation, a weak cherry/watermelon winning suggestion production suggesting the winning of either weak cherry or watermelon is executed (as shown in FIG. 57(c-2)). Based on the watermelon winning after the third stop operation (see image d1), a watermelon winning notification effect is executed to notify the watermelon winning (see image d4 in FIG. 57(c-3)), and is exclusive to the grandfather & princess accompanying state. (See image d3 and image d5 in FIG. 56(c-3).For example, the image d3 and the image d3 and the image where the princess has a smiling expression, unlike the old man and the princess in a stopped state, Image d5) shows a smiling expression. In this way, when the accompanying character's corresponding role is won in the accompanying state, the corresponding role winning notification effect (images d3 and 56 in FIG. 56 (c-3) (see image d5).

In this way, players who do not know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance, weak cherry, or strong cherry in the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, that is, it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. For players who do not know, the corresponding role winning notification performance is executed to make them aware that a special performance has been executed, and to recognize that it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. can be done. In addition, players who know that it is advantageous to win watermelon, chance, weak cherry, or strong cherry in the Grandpa & Princess accompanying state, that is, it is advantageous to win the corresponding role of the accompanying character. For the players who know the game, by executing the corresponding role winning notification effect, it is possible to emphasize that the player has won the corresponding role of the accompanying character, thereby stimulating the player's desire to play. In particular, since the state in which two characters accompany each other is more advantageous than the state in which one character accompanies (see Figure 54(b)), the corresponding role winning announcement performance is performed by two accompanying characters. In this case, the player's interest can be further improved.

In addition, in the grandfather & princess accompanying state, the image d3 displayed in the corresponding role notification performance in the princess accompanying state and the image d5 displayed in the corresponding role notification performance in the grandfather accompanying state are displayed as the corresponding role winning notification performance. However, the image is not limited to the image d3 and the image d5, and an image that is only displayed when the old man and the princess are together may be displayed.

・CZ
CZ is a gaming state in which the player aims to earn points in a predetermined period (for example, 20 games in the case of this embodiment). After the predetermined period ends, the CZ executes an AT lottery process to determine whether to transition to the normal AT state based on the total value of points acquired during the predetermined period. If the AT lottery process is won in the CZ, the AT normal state is entered (see route R5 in FIG. 52(a)); if the AT lottery process is not won, the AT lottery process is entered into the advantageous section normal state ( (See route R3 in FIG. 52(a)). FIG. 58(c) is a table schematically showing the AT lottery process (more specifically, the AT lottery table by point used for the AT lottery process).

As shown in FIG. 58(c), in this embodiment, if the total value of points earned in the period of 20 games is 500 points or 0 to 50 points, there is a 100% probability, that is, the AT state is definitely reached. It is set to migrate. Furthermore, in the case of 51 points or more, the higher the total value of points acquired toward 500 points, the higher the probability of transitioning to the AT state.

The CZ character accompaniment state is determined by executing an accompaniment lottery process at the time of transition from the advantageous section normal state. The determined accompanying character remains the same during the 20 games. Specifically, in the accompanying lottery process, either the princess or the grandfather is determined, so the princess accompanying state or the grandfather accompanying state is set and CZ is started (see FIG. 52(b)). In other words, in CZ, a non-accompanying state or an old man and princess accompanying state are never set.

A mechanism in which points are awarded in the CZ in the accompanying state set in this way will be explained using FIGS. 58(a), 58(b), and FIG. 60. Note that FIG. 60 shows an example of performance in one predetermined game of CZ.

In CZ, a character corresponding to each reel is determined by a character arrangement lottery process at the time of a bet operation in each game. FIG. 58(a) is a table schematically showing a character arrangement lottery process (more specifically, a character arrangement pattern lottery table used in the character arrangement lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(a), pattern 1 is selected with a probability of 80%, and pattern 2 is selected with a probability of 20%. When pattern 1 is selected, the left reel 110 is associated with a non-accompanying character, the middle reel 111 is associated with a lord, and the right reel 112 is associated with an accompanying character. On the other hand, when pattern 2 is selected, the left reel 110 is associated with a ninja, the middle reel 111 is associated with a lord, and the right reel 112 is associated with an accompanying character. That is, in any case, the accompanying character set in the character arrangement lottery process is associated with the right reel 112. For example, in the game shown in FIG. 60(a), pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (see FIG. 60(a-1)). Note that the game shown in FIG. 60(b) and the game shown in FIG. 60(c) also show a case where pattern 1 is selected in the princess accompanying state and the princess is associated with the right reel 112 (FIG. 60( b-1), see Figure 60(c-1)).

In a CZ game after such a character arrangement, if the push order bell is internally won and the content of the first stop operation matches the notification content of the operation navigation, it will be associated with the first stop reel of the game. You can earn points based on the characters you play.

First, the push order bell of this embodiment will be explained using FIG. 59. FIG. 59 is a table showing the lottery probability of the push order bell of the present embodiment, the number of coins to be paid out in the case of a correct operation, the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content. The push order bell is made up of duplicate combinations, and if a winning combination is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the winning combination will differ depending on the details of the stop operation (for example, the order of the stop operation), and the number of coins to be paid out will also differ. It is composed of The maximum number of coins to be paid out is given when the stop operations are performed in the correct order of stop operations. In addition, (1) LCR operation is used to stop the left middle right, (2) LRC operation is used to stop the left and right middle, (3) CLR operation is used to stop the middle left and right, (4) CRL operation is used to stop the middle right and left. , (5) A stop operation between right and left is sometimes referred to as an RLC operation, and (6) a stop operation between right and left is sometimes referred to as an RCL operation.

The push order bells in this embodiment are (1) push order bell_LCR for which LCR operation is the correct operation, (2) push order bell_LRC for which LRC operation is the correct operation, (3) push order bell_LRC for which CLR operation is the correct operation. Push order bell_CLR, (4) Push order bell_CRL, where CRL operation is the correct operation, (5) Push order bell_RLC, where RLC operation is the correct operation, (6) RCL operation is the correct operation. It is subdivided into six pressing order bell_RCL. For example, if the push order bell _LCR is internally won and the LCR operation is performed, if the LCR operation that is the correct stop operation is performed, 6 medals will be paid out and the push order bell _CRL will be internally won. However, if the CRL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals will be paid out, and if the push order bell_RCL is internally won, and if the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is performed, 13 medals will be paid out. medals will be paid out.

Furthermore, in CZ, if the push order bell is internally selected, the operation navigation is executed. Therefore, in a game where the CZ push order bell has been internally won, if you perform the correct stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, you will be able to obtain the maximum number of payouts that can be given in the game and will also be able to get the first stop. You can earn points for the character associated with the reels. Here, the number of points based on the character (hereinafter also referred to as selected character) associated with the first stop reel is determined by the selected character point lottery process. FIG. 58(b) is a table schematically showing a selected character point lottery process (more specifically, a point lottery table for each selected character used in the selected character point lottery process). In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 58(b), when the selected character is a non-accompanying character, 25 points are awarded with an 80% selection probability, and 55 points are awarded with a 20% selection probability. . Also, if the selected character is a companion character, 25 points will be given with a 10% selection probability, 55 points will be given with a 45% selection probability, 100 points will be given with a 35% probability, and 10% 200 points will be awarded with a probability of .

As shown in FIG. 58(b), in this embodiment, when the selected character is a Tono or Shinobi (expected point value is 61.25 in both cases) than when the selected character is a non-accompanying character (expected point value is 31). The expected point value to be earned is larger, and the expected point value to be earned is higher when the selected character is a companion character (expected point value is 82.25) than when the selected character is Tono or Shinobu. The value is set to be large. In this manner, in this embodiment, it is easy to obtain high points when the selected character is an accompanying character. In other words, if you win Push Order Bell_RCL or Push Order Bell_RCL, which is the push order bell for which the first stop operation right is the correct answer, and the first stop reel is set to the right, the expected point value obtained will be larger. It is set.

・CZ production Figure 60(a) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, and the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). This is an example of a performance when the push order bell _CRL is internally won and the player performs the stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation in the state where the princess is accompanied by a selected character point. Shows the effect when selected. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 58(b), the selected character is Tono, and the effect is shown when the number of points 55 with a selection rate of 55% is selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and the effect image of the operation navigation is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, Fig. 60(a) -2), the number 312 is displayed in accordance with the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation order.The number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers for the other stop operations), After the first stop operation, the number of points earned with the selected character is displayed (for example, characters such as 55Pt are displayed along with the image of the lord), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points earned in CZ is displayed. (For example, 55Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen).

FIG. 60(b) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). This is an example of a performance when the push order bell _RCL is internally won in state) and the player performs a stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, and 200 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. It shows the performance of. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 58(b), the selected character is a princess (accompanying character) and the number of points 200 with a selection rate of 10% is selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and the effect image of the operation navigation is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, Fig. 60(b) -2), the number 321 is displayed according to the position of the corresponding reel based on the correct stop operation.The number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the number for the other stop operations), After the first stop operation, the number of points earned will be displayed along with the selected character (for example, characters such as "Get 200 Points" will be displayed along with an image of the princess), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points earned in CZ will be displayed. (For example, 200Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen).

FIG. 60(c) shows the princess accompanying state (more precisely, pattern 1 is selected in the character arrangement lottery process, the old man is associated with the left reel 110, the lord is associated with the middle reel 111, and the princess is associated with the right reel 112). This is an example of a performance when the push order bell _LCR is internally won in state) and the player performs a stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation, and 25 points are selected by the selected character point lottery process. It shows the performance of. That is, in the selected character point lottery process shown in FIG. 58(b), the selected character is an old man (non-accompanying character) and the effect is shown when 25 points with a selection rate of 80% are selected.

In this case, characters are arranged and displayed on each reel based on the bet operation (MAXBET operation), and the effect image of the operation navigation is displayed based on the start operation (start lever operation) (for example, Fig. 60(c) -2), the number 123 is displayed according to the correct stop operation according to the corresponding reel position.The number for the first stop operation is displayed larger than the numbers for other stop operations), the first stop After the operation, the number of points earned will be displayed along with the selected character (for example, an image of an old man and words such as "Get 25 points" will be displayed), and after the third stop operation, the total number of points earned in CZ will be displayed. (For example, 250Pt is displayed in the upper right corner of the screen.)

In addition, in FIG. 60, a description has been given of a game in which the push order bell was internally won in CZ, but even in a game in which the push order bell was not internally won in CZ, the character arrangement lottery process is executed and each reel is Although the corresponding characters are displayed in an array, no points are awarded because the selected character point lottery process is not executed.

Furthermore, in the above description, the CZ is a fixed period (for example, 20 games in this embodiment), but it is not limited to this. For example, if a rare combination is won in the winning combination internal lottery process, the CZ game period may be extended or the number of games may not be counted.

- Normal AT state The normal AT state is initially set to end when the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state reaches the initial ending difference number (for example, in this embodiment, 300 sheets in one set). There is. In the normal AT state, for each game, a number addition lottery process in which the number of coins is added to the initial ending difference number of coins, and a special zone lottery process to determine whether to move to the specialized zone are executed. When winning the number-addition lottery, the number determined in the number-addition lottery is added to the initial ending difference number of tickets. This added difference number is called the end difference number of additions. In the normal AT state, when the difference number reaches the initial end difference number or the additional end difference number, the normal AT state ends. When the normal AT state ends, it moves to the pullback chance zone (see route R6 in FIG. 52(a)). Further, if the special zone lottery process is won in the normal AT state, the process moves to the special zone (see route R7 in FIG. 52(a)). The specialized zone is a gaming state that is advantageous for players who can easily add the number of coins, and the number of additional coins awarded in the specialized zone is added to the final difference number of coins. Further, when the difference in the number of sheets becomes equal to or greater than a predetermined threshold (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment) in the normal AT state, the process shifts to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 52(a)).

FIG. 61(a) is a table schematically showing the companion lottery process in the normal AT state (more specifically, the companion lottery table used in the companion lottery process), and the companion lottery process determines the companion character. This is a lottery process. The contents of the accompanying lottery table shown in FIG. 61(a) are the same as the contents of the accompanying lottery table in the advantageous section normal state, so the explanation will be omitted. That is, in this embodiment, accompanying characters and winning combinations are associated even in the normal AT state. Note that the initial character accompanying state in the normal AT state is a non-accompanying state.

FIG. 61(b) shows a number addition selection table used in the number addition lottery process and a specialized zone lottery process (more specifically, a number addition selection table used in the number addition lottery process and a specialized zone lottery table used in the specialized zone lottery process. ) is a table schematically showing. The ticket number addition lottery process and the specialized zone lottery process are executed based on the character accompanying state and the winning combination of the internal winning combination lottery process, respectively. For example, in the lottery process to increase the number of tickets, in the case of a non-accompanied state, if a watermelon or a weak cherry is internally won, the number of tickets will be increased with a 1% chance of winning, and if a chance item or a strong cherry is internally won, the number of tickets will be increased by 10%. The number of tickets will be added based on the probability of winning. In addition, for example, in the lottery process to increase the number of tickets, if you are accompanied by an old man, if you win internally for a watermelon, the number of tickets will be increased with a 20% chance of winning, and if you win internally at the chance, the number of tickets will be increased with a 40% chance of winning. When a weak cherry wins internally, the number of tickets is added with a 1% chance of winning, and when a strong cherry wins internally, the number of tickets is added with a 10% chance of winning. It should be noted that the number of additional tickets awarded in the number-addition lottery process is a predetermined number (for example, 20 tickets, 50 tickets, etc.).

For example, in the specialized zone lottery process, in the case of a non-accompanied state, when a watermelon or a weak cherry is internally won, the system moves to the specialized zone with a 0.5% chance of winning, and a chance or strong cherry is internally won. When you do, you will move to the specialized zone with a 1% chance of winning. In addition, for example, in the specialized zone lottery process, if you are accompanied by a princess, if you win internally for a watermelon, you will move to the specialized zone with a 0.5% winning probability, and if you win internally on the chance, you will move to the specialized zone with a 1% probability of winning. If you move to the specialized zone with a winning probability and win internally to a weak cherry, you will move to the specialized zone with a 5% winning probability, and if you win internally to a strong cherry, you will move to the specialized zone with a 10% winning probability. do.

As shown in FIG. 61(b), in this embodiment, the probability of increasing the number of tickets is higher in the accompanied state than in the non-accompanied state, and it is easier to move to the specialized zone. . In addition, in the internal lottery process for winning combinations in the accompanying state, if the corresponding character of the accompanying character is won, the probability of winning the number of additional prizes is higher than when winning other roles. It has become easy to migrate to. Note that even in the accompanied state, the probability of adding more cards is higher in the accompanied state of two characters than in the accompanied state of one character, and it is easier to move to the specialized zone.

In addition, in this embodiment, the probability of winning the grandfather's corresponding role (Watermelon, chance) in the grandfather accompanying state and winning the number addition lottery process or the specialized zone lottery process, and the princess's corresponding role (in the princess accompanying state) The probabilities of winning (weak cherry, strong cherry) and winning the number addition lottery process or specialized zone lottery process are the same, but they are not the same, and if you win the corresponding role of the accompanying character in one accompanying state. may be treated more favorably than when the corresponding role of the accompanying character is won in other accompanying states.

- Pullback Chance Zone The pullback chance zone is a gaming state in which there is a possibility of returning to the normal AT state for a predetermined period (for example, 30 games in this embodiment). In the pullback chance zone, an AT pullback lottery process is executed to determine whether or not to return to the normal AT state. If you win in the AT pullback lottery process in a predetermined period, you will transition to the normal AT state (see route R6 in FIG. 52(a)), whereas if you do not win in the AT pullback lottery process in a predetermined period , the non-advantageous section transitions to the normal state (see route R2 in FIG. 52(a)). The AT pullback lottery may be determined, for example, based on the winning combination in the winning combination internal lottery process. The pullback chance zone is a gaming state in which the operation navigation is executed less frequently than in the normal AT state.

・Ending state When the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state exceeds the first threshold (for example, 2000 sheets in the case of this embodiment), the normal AT state transitions to the ending state (see route R8 in FIG. 52(a)) ). The ending state is a gaming state in which the number of coins is not increased. Furthermore, when the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state reaches the second threshold value (for example, 2400 sheets in the case of this embodiment) in the ending state, the ending state is ended and the transition is made to the non-advantageous section normal state (Fig. 52 (See route R2 in (a)).

-Specialized Zone The specialized zone is a gaming state that consists of a predetermined gaming period (for example, 5 games in the case of this embodiment) and allows for easy addition of the number of coins. When an additional number of sheets is awarded in the specialized zone, the number of additional sheets provided is added to the final difference number of additional sheets. When all the games in the specialized zone have been played, the state shifts to the normal AT state (see path R7 in FIG. 52(a)). In the specialized zone, if you win an internally won push order bell and win an internally won push order bell, you will receive a number indicating the operation order (for details, a 3-digit number notified by the operation navigation. For example, push order bell_LCR In this case, the number of sheets in 123) becomes the additional number of sheets. In addition, in a game where the push order bell is internally won in the specialized zone, a freeze is generated before the operation navigation is generated to improve the player's sense of expectation. Freeze is a standby state that delays the reception timing of the next operation. During the freeze period, the reels 11 to 112 do not start rotating even if the start lever 135 is operated, or the reels 11 to 112 do not start rotating even if the start lever 135 is operated, or the stop buttons 137 to 139 are not accepted. The player's operations are not accepted, such as when there is no player. The performance during the freeze period is referred to as freeze performance. Note that the freeze time of this embodiment has a plurality of time patterns, and the number of additional sheets tends to increase as the freeze time becomes longer.

- Production of specialized zone The production of specialized zone will be explained below using FIGS. 62 to 64. In addition, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the upper row is a time chart showing the game progress of a predetermined game in the specialized zone, and the lower row is the state of the reels 110 to 112 and the liquid crystal display at each point in the upper time chart. 5 is a diagram showing an effect displayed on the device 157. FIG.

FIG. 62 shows a game in which the push order bell_LCR was won in the specialized zone, the LCR operation was performed, the upper bell was won, and 123 additional coins were obtained. FIG. 62 shows a case where the reels 110 to 112 start based on the start lever operation (start operation) and freeze occurs, and the freeze ends after a predetermined time t1 has elapsed. In FIG. 62, time a-1 is the time of the start operation, time a-2 is the time during freezing after the start operation, time a-3 is the time when the operation navigation is started, and time a-4 is the time when the freeze ends. Time point a-5 is the start point at which operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, time a-5 is the start point at which operations on the cross button 191 can be accepted, and point a-6 is the point at which the first stop operation is performed. A-7 is the time point of the second stop operation, time a-8 is the time point of the third stop operation, and time a-9 is the time point when all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 62, first, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating based on the start operation (see time points a-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the liquid crystal display device 157 shows An image of the person looking disappointed is displayed (see point a-1 in the bottom row). In other words, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and an image of the player looking disappointed is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, even though the player is actually frozen. You can mislead people into thinking that they are not. Next, at time point a-2 during the freeze, the reels 110 to 112 are rotating, but the stop buttons 137 to 139, the production button 191, and the cross button 192 are in a state in which operation cannot be accepted (at the time point in the upper row). (See a-2). Therefore, during freezing, setting operations such as volume setting and light intensity setting are also impossible. Further, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays an image indicating that the screen is frozen and buttons cannot be operated (see time point a-2 in the lower row).

Next, at time point a-3, the operation navigation starts even though it is frozen (see time point a-3 in the upper row), and the image of the operation navigation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time point a-3 in the lower row). (See 3). In the game shown in FIG. 62, since the push order bell_LCR is won, specifically, the number 123 indicating the LCR operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, at time point a-4 when the freeze ends, stop operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 become possible (see time point a-4 in the upper row), and when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point a-4 in the upper row). (see time point a-6), the left reel 110 stops, and the image of the operation navigation after the first stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time point a-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point a-7 in the upper row), a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 139 (see time point a-8 in the upper row), and then a time point a-9 Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time a-9 in the upper and lower rows), and an effect image indicating the number of additional sheets is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time a-9 in the lower row). . In the game shown in FIG. 62, specifically, 123 coins are added based on the number 123 notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 62, immediately after the start operation, the player mistakenly believes that no freeze has occurred, and after that, by operating the operation means such as the stop button 138 (even if the operation is ), it is recognized that it is frozen. By doing this, it is possible to surprise the player, and it is also possible to improve the expectation that the bonus will be added. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is executed after freezing and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is turned off from being accepted, mistakes in operating the stop button 138 can be prevented.

FIG. 63 shows a game in which the push order bell_RLC was won in the specialized zone, the RLC operation was performed, the lower bell was won, and 231 additional coins were obtained. In FIG. 63, freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 starts during a wait period, and after a predetermined time t2 (>predetermined time t1), the freeze ends and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The case where 112 starts rotating is shown. In addition, in FIG. 63, time point b-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point b-2 is the time point during freezing after the start operation and the start time point when it is possible to accept the operation on the production button 192, and time point b-3 is the time point b-3. After time b-2, the start point at which operation reception on the production button 192 becomes impossible, time b-4 is the point at which the freeze ends, and the time point when the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, the cross button 191 and the production button 192. Point b-5 is the start point at which operations can be accepted for the stop buttons 137 to 139, and point b-6 is the point at which the operation navigation is started. , time b-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time b-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time b-9 is the time of all the reels 110 to 112 being stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 63, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, the reels 110 to 112 become in a wait state (see time points b-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the first button operation promotion effect is executed. Then, the initial image d21 of the first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The first button operation promotion performance is a performance that prompts the operation of the performance button 192 (for example, an image of a meter and words such as "Collect the meter by repeatedly pressing the button!!" are displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157), This is a performance that ends as time passes. Note that at time b-1, operation reception on the production button 192 is not possible (see time b-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time point b-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation on the production button 192 (see time point b-2 in the upper row), and when the production button 192 is operated, the liquid crystal display device 157 shows the first button operation. An image d22 of the promotion effect is displayed (see time point b-2 in the lower row). The image d22 includes an image that promotes operation (for example, an image that urges button operation with words such as "Collect the meter by pressing the button repeatedly!!"), and an image that indicates an operation response (for example, an image that prompts button operation in response to the operation of the production button 192). It is configured to include an image in which the value of the meter increases) and an image showing the valid period of operation of the effect button 192 (for example, an image of a gauge indicating the time period during which the operation on the effect button 192 is valid).

Here, since the first button operation promotion performance is a performance that ends based on the passage of a predetermined time, the problem is that the player easily overlooks the performance compared to a performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time. There is. However, in this embodiment, since the first button operation promotion effect is executed during freezing, the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without the player overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. In addition to giving a special feeling, it is possible to liven up the game.

That is, during execution of the first button operation promotion effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operations on the cross button 191, operations on the start lever 135, Operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operations on the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. can be done.

Next, at time b-3, when it becomes possible to accept the operation on the effect button 192 again (see time point b-3 in the upper row), the second button operation promotion effect is executed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays the second button operation promotion effect. An image d23 of the button operation promotion effect is displayed (see time point b-1 in the lower row). The second button operation promotion effect is an operation promotion effect that urges the user to operate the effect button 192 again (for example, an image that urges the user to operate the effect button 192 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 along with an image of a full meter). The second button operation promotion performance is a performance that does not end due to the passage of time, and is a performance that ends when the performance button 192 is operated.

Next, at time point b-4, the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and it becomes impossible to accept the operation of the production button 192, and when the production button 192 is operated (the upper and lower rows) At point b-4), the second button operation promotion effect ends, and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional sheets is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see point b-4 at the bottom). Specifically, in the game shown in FIG. 63, an image showing an additional 231 coins is displayed based on the number 231 notified by the operation navigation that will be executed thereafter.

In this manner, in this embodiment, the operational validity period of the performance button 192, which is prompted to be operated by the second button operation promotion performance started in the frozen state, starts after the frozen state ends. In this embodiment, two button operation promotion effects (a first button operation promotion effect and a second button operation promotion effect) are started during a freeze, so the freeze state becomes long and the effects become redundant. There is a risk that it will become a thing. Therefore, the second button operation promotion effect that is executed after the first button operation promotion effect starts to be executed during the freeze, but the operation validity period of the effect button 192 that is the target of the operation is after the freeze ends. Trying to get started. This prevents the frozen state from becoming too long and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation promotion effect.

Next, at time b-5, when it becomes possible to accept the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139 and the operation navigation starts (see time point b-5 in the upper row), the image of the operation navigation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. (See time point b-5 in the bottom row). In the game shown in FIG. 63, since the push order bell_RLC is won, specifically, the number 231 indicating the RLC operation, which is the correct stopping operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-6 in the upper row), the right reel 112 stops, and the image d11 of the operation navigation after the first stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. (See time point b-6 in the upper and lower rows).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point b-7 in the upper row), a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point b-8 in the upper row), and then a time point b-9 Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time point b-9 in the upper row).

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 63, since the freeze occurs at the same time as the start operation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of coins will be added in the game. Further, since the number of additional coins is notified after freezing and the operation navigation is executed thereafter, the player can understand the content of the correct stop operation from the notified number of additional coins. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is turned off from being accepted, mistakes in operating the stop button 138 can be prevented.

FIG. 64 shows a game in which the push order bell_RCL was won in the specialized zone, the RCL operation was performed, the lower bell was won, and 321 additional coins were obtained. In FIG. 64, freezing occurs based on the start lever operation (starting operation), the rotation of the reels 110 to 112 starts during a wait period, and after a predetermined time t3 (>predetermined time t2), the freeze ends and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The case where 112 starts rotating is shown. In addition, in FIG. 64, time point c-1 is the time point of the start operation, time point c-2 is the time point during freezing after the start operation and the start time point when it is possible to accept the operation for the production button 192, and time point c-3 is the time point c-3. This is after time c-2, which is the start point when operations on the production button 192 are no longer accepted, and the operation navigation starts, and time c-4 is the time when the freeze ends, and the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. and the start point at which operations for the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, time c-5 is the start point at which operations for the cross button 191 can be accepted, time c-6 is the time for the first stop operation, Time c-7 is the time of the second stop operation, time c-8 is the time of the third stop operation, and time c-9 is the time of all the reels 110 to 112 being stopped after the third stop operation.

In the game shown in FIG. 64, first, a freeze occurs based on the start operation, and the reels 110 to 112 are in a wait state (see time c-1 in the upper and lower rows), and the initial image is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. d31 (for example, an image of a confrontation between a lord and a samurai) is displayed (see time point c-1 in the lower row), and then an image d32 of the first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The image d32 includes an image that encourages operation (for example, an image that urges button operation with the words "Decide with one blow!!"), and an image that indicates the operation validity period of the production button 192 (for example, an image that indicates that the operation of the production button 192 is not effective). (image of a gauge indicating the valid time). The first button operation promotion performance is an operation promotion performance that prompts the user to operate the performance button 192, and is a performance that ends with the passage of time. Note that at time c-1, operation reception on the production button 192 is not possible (see time c-1 in the upper row).

Next, at time c-2, it becomes possible to accept an operation on the production button 192 (see time c-2 in the upper row). An image d32 of the first button operation promotion effect is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time point c-2 in the lower row).

Here, since the first button operation promotion performance is a performance that ends based on the passage of a predetermined time, the problem is that the player easily overlooks the performance compared to a performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time. There is. However, in this embodiment, since the first button operation promotion effect is executed during freezing, the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without the player overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. In addition to giving a special feeling, it is possible to liven up the game.

That is, during execution of the first button operation promotion effect started in the frozen state, button operations other than the effect button 192 (for example, operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139, operations on the cross button 191, operations on the start lever 135, Operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132, operations on the settlement button 134, etc.) are disabled, so the player can concentrate on the first button operation promotion effect without overlooking the first button operation promotion effect. can be done.

Next, at time c-3, when the production button 192 becomes inoperable (see time c-3 in the upper row), the operation navigation is started (see time c-3 in the upper row), and the liquid crystal display device 157 shows the following: An image d11 of the operation navigation is displayed (see time point c-3 in the lower row). In the game shown in FIG. 64, the push order bell_RCL was won, so specifically, the number 321 indicating the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. In other words, the operation navigation in the game shown in FIG. 64 is a performance that is started during freezing, and is also an operation promotion performance that prompts the operation of the stop buttons 137 to 139, so it can also be said to be a second button operation promotion performance. This second button operation promotion performance (operation navigation) is a performance that does not end with the passage of time, and ends when the stop buttons 137 to 139 are operated.

Next, at time c-4, when the freeze ends, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating, and stop operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 become possible (see time c-4 in the upper and lower rows), and at time c-5. When this happens, it becomes possible to accept the operation of the cross button 191 (see time point c-5 in the upper row).

As described above, in this embodiment, the operation validity period of the stop buttons 137 to 139, which are prompted to operate by the second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) started in the freeze state, starts after the freeze state ends. It looks like this. In this embodiment, two button operation promotion effects (a first button operation promotion effect and a second button operation promotion effect) are started during a freeze, so the freeze state becomes long and the effects become redundant. There is a risk that it will become a thing. Therefore, the second button operation promotion effect that is executed after the first button operation promotion effect starts to be executed during the freeze, but the operation validity period of the effect button 192 that is the target of the operation is after the freeze ends. Trying to get started. This prevents the frozen state from becoming too long and makes it difficult to overlook the second button operation promotion effect.

Next, when the first stop operation is performed on the stop button 139, the right reel 112 stops (see time point c-6 in the upper row), and the image d11 of the operation navigation after the first stop operation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. (See time point c-6 in the bottom row).

Next, a second stop operation is performed on the stop button 138 (see time point c-7 in the upper row), a third stop operation is performed on the stop button 137 (see time point c-8 in the upper row), and then a time point c-9 Then, all the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (see time c-9 in the upper and lower rows), and the effect image d12 indicating the number of additional sheets is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time c-9 in the lower row). ). In the game shown in FIG. 64, specifically, 321 coins are added based on the number 321 notified by the operation navigation.

As described above, according to the game shown in FIG. 64, since the freeze occurs at the same time as the start operation, it is possible to improve the expectation that the number of coins will be added in the game. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is executed after freezing and the number of additional coins is notified after the stop operation, the player can grasp the number of additional coins before the stop operation. Furthermore, since the operation navigation is displayed before the stop button 138 is turned off from being accepted, mistakes in operating the stop button 138 can be prevented.

Note that the first button operation promotion effect explained with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 is an effect that encourages an operation on the effect button 192, but regardless of whether or not the effect button 192 is operated and the number of times, a predetermined effect is performed. This is a performance that ends based on the passage of time. On the other hand, the second button operation promotion effect (operation navigation) explained with reference to FIGS. 63 and 64 is a effect that does not end based on the elapse of a predetermined time period. Therefore, the first button operation promotion performance has a special feeling compared to the second button operation promotion performance, and can improve interest in the game. However, there is a concern that the first button operation promotion effect that ends based on the passage of time is easily overlooked by the player, so in this embodiment, the first button operation promotion effect is executed during the freeze, and the first button operation promotion effect ends based on the passage of time. I am trying to draw attention to the 1st button operation promotion effect.

In addition, in FIGS. 62 to 64, the volume setting can be executed outside the freeze period (the cross button 191 can be accepted), but the volume setting cannot be executed even during the game, such as while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. (The cross button 191 is not accepted), and the volume setting may be executed during non-gaming when the reels 110 to 112 are stopped (the cross button 191 is accepted).

<Summary of Embodiment A>
(1) As described above, according to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, embodiment A),
A game progression means (for example, main control unit 300) that advances the game;
A performance control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500) that executes a performance based on instructions from the game proceeding means;
A game machine equipped with operation means (for example, a performance button 192, an information display button 191, stop buttons 137 to 139, etc.) that can be operated by a player,
The game proceeding means is
It is possible to generate a freeze state that waits for the progress of the game (for example, the freeze in FIGS. 62 to 64),
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a first operation promotion effect (for example, the first button operation promotion effect in FIG. 63 (b-2) and FIG. 64 (c-2)) that may be terminated based on the passage of a predetermined time. It is a thing,
The first operation promotion effect may be started after the freeze state is started by the game proceeding means (for example, FIG. 63(b-2), FIG. 64(c-2)). Basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, the first operation promotion effect is executed which may end based on the elapse of a predetermined time in the frozen state, so the first operation promotion effect is promoted without overlooking the first operation promotion effect. It is possible to draw attention to the performance and make the player feel special.

In the first basic configuration,
The performance control means is
A preferred configuration 1 is a means for terminating the first operation promotion performance started in the frozen state in the frozen state.

According to preferred configuration 1, since the first operation promotion performance that starts in the frozen state ends in the freeze state, it is possible to draw attention to the first operation promotion performance without overlooking the first operation promotion performance, and the player can It can make you feel special.

In the first basic configuration, preferred configuration 1,
The operating means includes a first operating means (for example, a production button 192, etc.) capable of changing the production being executed based on the operation,
The first operation promotion performance is
Preferably, configuration 2 is an effect that prompts the user to operate the first operating means.

According to preferred configuration 2, it is possible to draw attention to the first operation promotion effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means, and it is possible to make the player feel special.First basic configuration, preferred configuration 1 In ,2,
The performance control means is
It is possible to execute a second operation promotion effect that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time (for example, the second button operation promotion effect in FIGS. 63(b-3) and 64(c-3)). It is a thing,
The performance control means is
The second operation promotion effect may be started in the freeze state after the first operation promotion effect started after the freeze state has started (for example, FIG. 63(b-3)) , FIG. 64(c-3)) is a preferred configuration 3.

According to preferred configuration 3, since the second operation promotion performance that does not end based on the passage of a predetermined time in the frozen state is executed, the second operation promotion performance can be executed without overlooking the second operation promotion performance. It can attract attention and make the player feel special.

In preferred configuration 3,
The second operation promotion performance is
Preferred configuration 4 is an effect that prompts the operation of the first operation means (for example, FIG. 63(b-3)).

According to the preferred configuration 4, since two operation promotion effects that prompt the player to operate the same operation means are executed in succession, it is possible to improve expectations for the game.

In preferred configuration 3,
A plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and driven to rotate;
further comprising a start operation means (for example, a start lever 135) operated to start rotation of the plurality of reels,
The operating means includes a second operating means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accepts a stop operation for individually stopping rotation of the plurality of reels,
The second operation promotion performance is
Preferred configuration 5 is an effect that prompts a stop operation of the second operation means (for example, FIG. 64(c-3)).

According to preferred configuration 5, since two operation promotion effects that prompt the player to operate different operation means are executed in succession, it is possible to encourage the progress of the game and to improve expectations for the game.

(2) As described above, according to the game machine (for example, slot machine 100) of the above embodiment (for example, embodiment A),
A lottery means (for example, main control unit 300, internal lottery process for winning combinations) that determines the success or failure of winning of multiple types of winning combinations by lottery;
A gaming state transition means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing) that controls the transition of gaming states;
A game machine comprising a performance execution means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500, a liquid crystal display device 157, etc.),
The game state transition means is configured to perform a game state when a first transition condition is satisfied (for example, when a weak cherry or a strong cherry is won) in a first state (non-play state) during a first period (for example, an advantageous section normal state). , and in the case of winning in the accompaniment lottery process, as shown in FIG.
The second state when the first prize (for example, weak cherry or strong cherry) is won by the lottery means is better than the first state when the first prize is won by the lottery means. The situation is advantageous (for example, the CZ winning probability is high, Fig. 54(b)),
When the first role is won in the second state of the first period, the effect execution means executes a first suggestive effect that suggests that the first role has been won (for example, While executing the corresponding winning notification effect, image d3 in FIG. 56(b), if the first role is won in the first state of the first period, the first suggestion effect is executed. (for example, there is no image d3 in FIG. 56(a)) is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic structure, for a player who does not know that the second state is an advantageous state if he wins the first prize, he will be given the first prize if he wins the first prize. By executing the suggestion effect, it is possible to create a special feeling, and it is possible to suggest that the second state is an advantageous state if the first winning combination is won. Furthermore, for a player who knows that the second state is an advantageous state if he wins the first prize, the first suggestion performance is performed when he wins the first prize. By doing this, you can make sure you don't miss out on the fact that you won the first prize and make your heart flutter.

In the second basic configuration,
The game state transition means is configured to control the gaming state transition means when a second transition condition is satisfied in the first state in the first period (for example, when a watermelon or a chance game is won and the game is won in the simultaneous lottery process, FIG. 54 (a)) is a means of transitioning to a third state (for example, a state with an old man),
The third state when the second prize (for example, watermelon or chance) is won by the lottery means is more advantageous than the first state when the second prize is won by the lottery means. (For example, CZ winning probability is high, Figure 54(b)),
When the second role is won in the third state of the first period, the effect execution means executes a second suggestive effect that suggests that the second role has been won (for example, While executing the corresponding winning notification effect, image d5 in FIG. 57(a), if the second role is won in the first state of the first period, the second suggestion effect is executed. A preferred configuration 11 is to not perform the following.

According to preferred configuration 11, for a player who does not know that the third state is an advantageous state if the second winning combination is won, the second suggestive performance is performed when the second winning combination is won. By executing this, it is possible to create a special feeling, and it is possible to suggest that the third state is an advantageous state if the second winning combination is won. Furthermore, for a player who knows that the third state is an advantageous state if he wins the second prize, the second suggestive performance is performed when he wins the second prize. By doing this, you can make sure you don't miss the fact that you won the second prize and make your heart flutter.

In preferred configuration 11,
The game state transition means is configured to control the gaming state transition means when a third transition condition is satisfied in the second state of the first period (for example, when a watermelon or chance is won and the game is won in the accompanying lottery process, FIG. 54 (a)) is a means of transitioning to the fourth state (for example, the state where the old man and the princess accompany each other),
The fourth state when the first prize is won by the lottery means is a more advantageous state than the second state when the first prize is won by the lottery means (for example, CZ winning probability is high, Figure 54(b)),
When the first role is won in the fourth state of the first period, the effect execution means executes a third suggestive effect (for example, A preferred configuration 12 is to execute the corresponding winning notification effect, images d3 and d5) in FIG. 57(a).

According to preferred configuration 12, for a player who does not know that the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state if the first winning combination is won, By executing the third suggestive performance, it is possible to create a special feeling, and it is possible to suggest that the fourth state is an advantageous state if the first winning role is won. In addition, for players who know that the fourth state is more advantageous than the second state if they win the first prize, if they win the first prize, By performing the suggestive effect, it is possible to make the player not miss the fact that he has won the first role and make him feel excited.

Note that the third condition may be the same as the second condition.

In preferred configuration 12,
The first state is a state in which neither the first character image (for example, the princess image) nor the second character image (for example, the old man image) is displayed (for example, FIG. 53(a)),
The second state is a state in which the first character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 53(b)),
The third state is a state in which the second character image is displayed (for example, FIG. 53(c)),
A preferred configuration 13 is that the fourth state is a state in which both the first character image and the second character image are displayed (for example, FIG. 53(d)).

According to preferred configuration 13, the player can clearly judge each state during the first period based on the character image.

In preferred configuration 12 or 13,
When the first falling condition is satisfied in the fourth state of the first period (for example, when the player wins in the Grandfather Accompanying End Lottery after the guaranteed number of games has elapsed), the gaming state transition means It is a means of transitioning to the state of
The game state transition means is configured to transfer the game state to the third game state when the second fall condition is satisfied in the fourth state of the first period (for example, when the winning party is won in the princess accompaniment ending lottery after the number of guaranteed games has elapsed). It is a means of transitioning to the state of
The gaming state transition means is a means for transitioning to the first state when the second fall condition is satisfied in the second state of the first period,
Preferably, the gaming state transition means is a means for shifting to the first state when the first falling condition is satisfied in the third state of the first period. .

According to the preferred configuration 14, since the advantageous state may shift to the disadvantageous state, it is possible to provide the player with a more exciting, tense, and interesting game.

In preferred configurations 11, 12, 13, or 14,
a second period (e.g., CZ) different from the first period;
In the second period, the second state may occur;
In a preferred configuration 15, the third state may occur during the second period.

According to preferred configuration 15, the game transitions to the second state or the third state even in the second period different from the first period, so that the player is provided with a variety of games and the interest is improved. be able to.

In addition, a third role (for example, push order bell) that is different from both the first role and the second role is provided,
In the second period, in the second state or the third state when the third prize is won by the lottery means, the first benefit is given (for example, the winning probability of AT transition is (becomes expensive),
In the first period, the second state when the first prize is won by the lottery means or the third state when the second prize is won by the lottery means is the second state. (For example, the probability of winning for CZ migration increases).

According to this configuration, even if the conditions are the same, the conditions for awarding benefits and the benefits differ depending on the period, so it is possible to provide a wide variety of performances and games.

<Setting suggestion>
Next, the setting suggestion performance will be explained in detail.

In the slot machine 100 of Embodiment A, six types of setting values such as settings 1 to 6 are prepared as described above. Setting 1 is the default setting value initially displayed on the setting value display 293. In other words, the default setting values may be changed immediately after shipping from the factory, after clearing the RAM including the storage area for storing setting values (RAM of the main control unit), or if the backup power supply that continues to store the storage area for storing setting values is lost. Setting 1 is set as .

The degree of advantage for players in earning profits (or the degree of advantage in terms of payout rate) is higher in setting 2 than in setting 1, higher in setting 3 than in setting 2, higher in setting 4 than in setting 3, and higher in setting 4 than setting 3. Setting 5 is higher than Setting 5, and Setting 6 is higher than Setting 5. That is, setting 6 is the most advantageous setting for the player to earn profits (or setting 6 has the highest payout rate).

Note that setting b may be provided instead of setting 3. This setting b is a setting that is more disadvantageous than setting 1 in terms of the player's ability to earn profits. That is, setting b is the most disadvantageous setting for the player to earn profits (or setting b has the lowest payout rate). In the slot machine 100, a set value display is provided on the back side of the front door 102 along with a reset switch and a setting change button, and the set value display cannot be seen unless the front door 102 is opened. This setting value display is a display such as a 7-segment LED. The set value display displays numerically the set value set by the setting change button. Setting b is displayed on the 7-segment LED setting value display with a difference of only one segment from setting 6, and is displayed next to setting 6, which is the most advantageous. That is, it is displayed last among the six types of setting values. If an unauthorized person who illegally opens the front door 102 performs an unauthorized operation thinking that the last setting displayed is the most advantageous setting, and as a result, setting b is displayed on the setting value display, the unauthorized person There are cases where the setting is mistakenly changed to setting 6 and changed to setting b. In this case, the fraudster can be disadvantaged.

The player usually cannot know the setting value, and one of the players' interests is which setting value the setting value is currently set to. Therefore, in the slot machine 100, a setting suggestion effect that suggests the currently set setting value may be executed. Suggesting a setting value also includes cases where the setting value is vaguely suggested (setting-related effects, setting-related notifications). Furthermore, although a setting value is suggested, it also includes a case where a notification that a certain setting value is 100% true (setting confirmation notification) is also included. That is, there are multiple types of setting suggestion effects. This setting suggestion effect may be executed after the third stop operation is performed in the final game in the AT state (see FIG. 52).

FIG. 65(a) is a diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestion effect A.

The lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 45. Changing (setting) the setting value is performed on the main control unit 300 side, and information representing the set setting value is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400. The main control unit 300 also manages the difference in the number of sheets. The difference in number of medals refers to the difference in the amount of gaming value obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game (number of medals inserted) from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game (number of medals paid out). . The difference number includes the cumulative difference number, the difference number in the AT state, and the like. The cumulative difference in the number of coins is the cumulative number of coins since the slot machine 100 was powered on at the earliest timing on the same day, and power-on after power restoration due to a momentary power outage is ignored. The cumulative difference number of sheets is reset (returned to 0) when the main power is turned off across dates. It is also reset when RAM is cleared or settings are changed. Note that the reset may be performed by turning off the main power after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power was turned on. Note that the timing for resetting may be not the timing when the main power is turned off, but the timing when the main power is turned on. Information representing the latest cumulative difference number of sheets is also transmitted from the main control section 300 to the first sub-control section 400. Note that the difference number of sheets may be counted by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) in addition to the main control unit 300, or by another control unit (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) instead of the main control unit 300. For example, it may be counted in the first sub-control unit 400). In the final game in the AT state, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 executes a lottery process according to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) based on the currently set setting value and the cumulative difference number of sheets. Note that the difference number in the AT state may be used instead of the cumulative difference number. The final game in the AT state may be the final game in the pullback chance zone shown in FIG. 52 (the 30th game played without winning the AT pullback lottery after moving to the pullback chance zone), or An example is the final game in the ending state shown in (the game when the difference in the number of sheets in the AT state reaches the second threshold (for example, 2400 sheets in the case of this embodiment)).

In setting suggestion performance A, the execution probability of the performance differs depending on whether the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more or less than 0. Furthermore, the execution probability of the effect also differs depending on the currently set setting value. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(A), the probability that setting suggestion effect A is not executed tends to increase as the setting value is set to a lower value. This tendency is the same whether the cumulative difference in number of sheets is 0 or more or less than 0. However, the probability that setting suggestion performance A will not be executed is higher when the cumulative difference number is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more.

When setting suggestion performance A is executed, a character appears on the liquid crystal display device 157, but the character that appears differs depending on the content of the suggestion. The baby panda character is a character that suggests setting 6 is confirmed, the panda character is a character that suggests setting 5 is confirmed, and the princess character is a character that suggests setting 4 is confirmed. Setting suggestion performance A in which these three characters appear is a setting suggestion performance that suggests that it is certain that the current setting value is a certain setting value. Further, among settings 1 to 6, settings 4 and above are high settings. Therefore, setting suggestion performance A in which these three characters appear is also a setting suggestion performance that suggests that the high setting is confirmed. The setting suggestion performance A described above is a setting suggestion performance A for determining a specific high setting value. These three specific settings suggestion effect A that confirms the high setting value will be executed with a 5% execution probability if the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more, but with a 1% execution probability if it is less than 0 sheets. It is only executed in That is, it is more difficult to execute when the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more. If the cumulative difference in number of coins is less than 0, the player is in a losing state. Even if the setting value is set to a high setting, if the cumulative difference in number of sheets is less than 0 (in case of losing), the setting suggestion effect of setting 6 confirmed, setting 5 confirmed, or setting 4 confirmed will be executed. This gives the player a greater sense of loss and disappointment than usual. In addition, there is a risk that the player may have a bad impression of the slot machine 100 that he or she is playing. Therefore, when the setting value is set to high and the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is less than 0, the execution probability of the setting suggestion effect A that confirms the specific high setting value is set so that the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is 1 or more. It is kept lower than the state. Note that the execution probability in a state where the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0 may be set to 0% instead of 1%. Also, the execution probability in a state where the cumulative difference number is less than 0 is set to 1%, but setting 5 is confirmed (panda character appears) than setting 4 is confirmed (princess character appears). The execution probability may be lower for the setting suggestion effect with setting 6 confirmed (a baby panda character appears) than the setting suggestion effect with setting 5 confirmed. For example, in a state where the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0, the execution probability of setting suggestion effect with setting 4 confirmed is 3%, the execution probability of setting suggestion effect with setting 5 confirmed is 2%, and the execution probability of setting suggestion effect with setting 6 confirmed is execution The probability may be set to 1%.

On the other hand, the ronin character is a character that suggests that the setting value is 2 or more, and although the specific setting value is unknown, it is never the setting 1. The old man's character is a character that suggests a high setting may be possible, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes cases where the setting is not high (false). The lord character is a character that suggests that the setting is 4 or higher, and although the specific setting value is unknown, the setting is never lower than 3. Setting suggestion performance A in which these three characters appear is a setting suggestion performance in which it is unclear which setting value is the current setting value. In other words, this is a setting suggestion performance in which the specific setting value is unknown, merely suggesting that it may be a certain setting value without suggesting a specific setting value. In the setting suggestion effect where a Ronin character appears that suggests that the setting value is 2 or more, if the setting value is low (settings 1 to 3), even if the cumulative difference number is 0 or more The execution probability is the same even if the number of sheets is less than 0 (however, the execution probability is 0% for setting 1), but if the setting value is high (settings 4 to 6), the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0. The execution probability is higher when the number of sheets is less than 0 than in the above cases, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when there are fewer than 0 sheets. In the setting suggestion effect where an old man character appears that suggests the possibility of a high setting, when the setting value is low, the cumulative difference number of sheets is more than 0 than when it is less than 0. has a high execution probability, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when the number is 0 or more, but when the setting value is set high, on the contrary, the cumulative difference number is less than 0 than when it is 0 or more. The execution probability is higher in the case of , and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed in the case of less than 0 sheets. In the setting suggestion effect where a character of the palace appears that suggests that the setting is 4 or higher, if the setting is 3 or lower, the execution probability is 0%, and if the setting is 4 or higher, the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more. The execution probability is higher when the number of sheets is less than 0 than when the number of sheets is less than 0, and the setting suggestion effect is more likely to be executed when there are fewer than 0 sheets.

Below, the lottery table for setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 65(a) will be summarized once again, including explanations that overlap with the previous explanations.

Setting suggestion performance A is a performance that varies the execution probability depending on the setting value and the difference number of sheets. When settings 4 to 6 are set and the difference in number of sheets is 0 or more, the confirmation system (setting 6 confirmed, setting 5 confirmed, setting 4 confirmed) is more effective than when the difference in number of sheets is less than 0. The execution probability of setting suggestion effect A is high. In addition, only when the setting value is set to the highest setting (the most advantageous setting for gaming, the same applies hereafter) (setting 6 in this example), if the difference number of sheets is 0 or more, the difference number The execution probability of setting suggestion performance A with setting 6 confirmed may be higher than when the number is less than 0.

In addition, when settings are set to 4 to 6 and the difference number of sheets is 0 or more, setting suggestion effect A (setting 4 or more or setting 2 or more) is more ambiguous than when the difference number is less than 0. , the execution probability of setting suggestion effect A) with a high setting possibility is low. Note that when the setting value is set to a high setting value (settings 4 to 6 in this example), if the difference in number of sheets is 0 or more, setting 4 is set higher than if the difference in number of sheets is less than 0. The execution probability may be increased only for the setting suggestion effect A described above.

When the setting value is set to a high setting (settings 4 to 6) or the highest setting (setting 6) and the difference in the number of sheets is less than 0, the setting suggestion effect is a confirmation setting suggestion. If the settings suggestion effect to be notified is executed, there is a risk that the player will feel a greater sense of loss or disappointment than usual, and may also have a negative impression of the slot machine 100 that he or she is playing. There is. Therefore, if the setting value is set to a high setting or the maximum setting and the difference in the number of sheets is less than 0, the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect of the definite type is lowered as a setting suggestion effect, and an ambiguous setting is By increasing the execution rate of the setting suggestion effect, it is possible to prevent the player from feeling a greater sense of loss or disappointment than usual, and to avoid giving the player a bad impression of the slot machine 100 they are playing. It can also reduce the fear you have.

Also, if the setting value is set to a low setting (settings 1 to 3) and the difference in number of sheets is 0 or more, the setting is suggested to be set higher than if the difference in number of sheets is less than 0. The probability of execution of performance A is high. In addition, only when the setting value is set to the lowest setting (the most disadvantageous setting for gaming, the same applies hereinafter) (in this example, setting 1), if the difference number of sheets is 0 or more, the difference number The execution probability of setting suggestion performance A with a high setting possibility may be made higher than when the number of sheets is less than zero. Even if the setting is low, if the difference in the number of sheets is 0 or more, it is made easier to execute setting suggestion effect A indicating the possibility of a high setting, thereby making the player guess that the setting may be high, and encouraging the player to play for a long time. I can do it.

FIG. 65(b) is a diagram showing a lottery table for setting suggestion effect B.

The lottery table shown in FIG. 65(b) is also stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. In the lottery using this lottery table, the lottery is performed based on the currently set setting value but not based on the cumulative difference in the number of sheets. Therefore, even in setting suggestion effect B, the execution probability of the effect differs depending on the currently set setting value, but in setting suggestion effect B, the effect is effective even if the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more or less than 0. The execution probabilities are the same. Setting suggestion presentation B is a presentation using the background image of the liquid crystal display device 157. If the setting suggestion effect B is not executed, the background image of the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes the background image A. According to the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(B), the probability that setting suggestion performance B will not be executed tends to increase as the setting value is set to a lower value.

Background image B is a background image that suggests that the setting value may be an even number, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes cases where the setting value is an odd number (false). Background image C is a background image that suggests that the setting value may be an odd number, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes cases where the set value is an even number (false). Background images D and F are background images that suggest that the setting value may be set high, and the specific setting value is unknown. It also includes cases where the setting is not high (false). The background image G is a background image that suggests that the setting is 4 or higher, and although the specific setting value is unknown, the setting is never lower than 3. The setting suggestion performance B of the background images B to G explained above is a setting suggestion with an unknown specific setting value that only suggests a possibility of a certain setting value without suggesting a specific setting value. It's a performance. On the other hand, the background image H is a background image that suggests that setting 6 is confirmed, and the setting suggestion effect B of this background image H is a setting suggestion effect that confirms the specific high setting value. In setting suggestion performance B, there are more types of setting suggestion performance where the specific setting value is unknown than there are types of setting suggestion performance where the specific high setting value is confirmed, and the setting suggestion performance is more specific than the setting suggestion performance where the specific high setting value is confirmed. Setting suggestion effects with unknown setting values are more likely to be executed.

Further, when comparing the background image A of the setting suggestion effect B with the setting suggestion effect A without execution, it can be said that the setting suggestion effect A is a performance that is less likely to be executed than the setting suggestion effect B. On the other hand, when comparing the background image H that suggests the setting 6 is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect B and the baby panda character that suggests the setting 6 is confirmed in the setting suggestion effect A, if the cumulative difference number is 0 or more, the setting It can be said that the suggestion effect B is more difficult to execute than the setting suggestion effect A, but if the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0, the setting suggestion effect B is easier to execute than the setting suggestion effect A.

As explained above, setting suggestion performance B is a performance that is executed regardless of the difference in the number of sheets, and is executed more frequently than setting suggestion performance A. Further, setting suggestion performance B includes more types of setting suggestion representations in which specific setting values are unknown (ambiguous setting suggestion performance) than setting suggestion performance A.

FIG. 66 is a diagram showing step-by-step an example in which the setting suggestion effect A is executed after the setting suggestion effect B is executed.

FIG. 66(a) is a diagram showing the liquid crystal display device 157 when the 30th and final game is started without winning the AT pull-back lottery after moving to the pull-back chance zone shown in FIG. 52. On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 66(a), a background image of the moon surface on which the Earth can be seen is displayed as a background image of the moon stage, and an animation of the crest running on the moon surface is displayed. . In this final game, the push order bell_RCL is won, and the number 321 indicating the RCL operation, which is the correct stop operation, is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157.

In FIG. 66(b) following FIG. 66(a), the third stop operation is performed, and the AT state result display ATR is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The result display ATR in the AT state is a display of the number of medals acquired in the AT state, and in this example, it is displayed as 1080 medals. Further, in this example, when the third stop operation is performed, the background image on the liquid crystal display device 157 is switched from the background image of the moon stage to the background image D of the setting suggestion effect B. That is, setting suggestion effect B that is unrelated to the value of the cumulative difference number of sheets is executed, and the background image D (background image of the sea) that suggests that the setting value may be set to a high value is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. Displayed.

FIG. 66(c), which follows FIG. 66(b), is a diagram showing the liquid crystal display device 157 after a predetermined period of time has passed since the third stop operation was performed. In the state shown in FIG. 66(c), the AT state has transitioned to the normal state. More specifically, the non-advantageous section is transitioning to a normal state. However, the first game after transitioning to the normal state has not started. On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 66(c), an AT state result display ATR is displayed on a background image of the sea, and furthermore, a character of setting suggestion effect A is displayed at the lower left. In this example, the character SS4U of the lord indicating that the setting is 4 or higher is displayed. The character display of the setting suggestion effect A (the character display SS4U of the lord) is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the result display ATR of the AT state. Further, it is displayed in a layer before the background image of setting suggestion effect B (background image of the ocean).

Eventually, the start lever 135 is operated, and the first game after transitioning to the non-advantageous section normal state is started. When the first game starts, as shown in FIG. 66(d), on the liquid crystal display device 157, the background image of setting suggestion effect B (background image of the sea) disappears, and the character display of setting suggestion effect A (the palace) disappears. The character display SS4U) also disappears, and a stage change display is displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 157. A stage change display SC1 is displayed on the entire surface of the liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. 66(d) to notify that the vehicle has entered the ●×▲ stage, which is the stage of the non-advantageous section normal state.

As explained above, setting suggestion performance B and setting suggestion performance A are executed at the same opportunity (for example, at the end of the AT state). Furthermore, setting suggestion performance A and setting suggestion performance B may be executed in parallel, and in this case, setting suggestion performance A is displayed on top of setting suggestion performance B. In other words, effects that are executed less frequently are displayed with priority. In addition, as mentioned above, setting suggestion performance A has fewer types of setting suggestion performances with unknown specific setting values (ambiguous setting suggestion performances) than setting suggestion performance B, and setting suggestions with unknown specific setting values. Setting suggestion performance A having fewer types of performances (ambiguous setting suggestion performance) is displayed with priority over setting suggestion performance B.

Next, a modification of the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 65(a) will be explained. Hereinafter, the differences from the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A shown in FIG. 65(a) will be mainly explained, and redundant explanations may be omitted.

FIG. 67(a) is a diagram showing a first modified example of the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A.

In the lottery table of the first modification, as well as the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a), the execution probabilities are different depending on whether the cumulative difference number of tickets is 0 or more and less than 0. The execution probability that the cumulative difference number of tickets in the lottery table of this first modification is 0 or more is the execution probability that the cumulative difference number of tickets in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is less than 0, and The execution probability that the cumulative difference number of tickets in the lottery table is less than 0 is the execution probability that the cumulative difference number of tickets in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is 0 or more. Therefore, the setting suggestion effect (princess, panda, baby panda) that suggests that the high setting is confirmed will be executed with a 5% probability of execution if the cumulative difference in the number of sheets is less than 0, but In this case, the execution probability is only 1%. In other words, it is more difficult to execute when the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more than when it is less than 0. Even if the player is losing (accumulated difference in number of coins is less than 0), by suggesting that the setting is set to 6, the player will develop a desire to play, and will be able to win in a little while. It can give hope that there is a possibility of change.

FIG. 67(b) is a diagram showing a second modified example of the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A.

The ronin character that was included in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) and that suggests that the setting value is 2 or more is a character that suggests that setting 1 is confirmed in the lottery table of the second modification. The execution probability of setting suggestion performance A in which a ronin character suggesting confirmation of setting 1 appears is 30%. That is, the execution probability of the setting display indicating that it is certain that the setting value with the lowest advantage for the player is set is a predetermined probability, for example, a predetermined probability of less than 100%. However, it may be 100%. In other words, if the setting value is the lowest setting (setting 1 in this example), setting 1 is confirmed with the same execution probability regardless of the number of sheets difference (even if the number of sheets difference is 0 or more or less than 0 sheets) The setting suggestion effect A that suggests setting 1 may be executed, and the setting suggestion effect A that suggests setting 1 confirmation may be executed, or it may be always executed. If the setting value is the lowest setting (setting 1 in this example), it is helpful for the player to indicate that the setting value is the lowest setting, whether the player is winning or losing. Unlike the case of a high setting or a maximum setting, the game machine becomes liked by players by executing a setting suggestion performance regardless of the difference in the number of sheets.

Note that in this second modification as well, the execution probability that the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more and the execution probability that the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0 may be replaced as in the first modification.

FIG. 68 is a diagram showing a third modified example of the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A.

In the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a), the execution probability of setting suggestion performance A differs depending on whether the cumulative difference number is 0 or more or less than 0, but in this third modification, the cumulative difference number is 0. Even if the number of sheets exceeds 0, it is divided into two, and even if the cumulative difference in number of sheets is less than 0, it is divided into two. That is, the execution probability of setting suggestion performance A differs for each of the four categories in which the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more and less than 1500, 1500 or more, less than 0 -1500 or more and less than -1500. These four categories are based on the extent of the player's wins and losses: 0 coins or more and less than 1500 coins means the player has a small win, 1500 coins or more means the player has a big win, and less than 0 coins - A value of 1,500 coins or more means that the player has a small loss, and a value of less than -1,500 coins means that the player has a large loss. The execution probability of setting suggestion effect A is set higher in a big win state where the cumulative difference is 1500 or more than in a small win state where the cumulative difference is 0 or more and less than 1500 (settings 4 to 4). 6), it is high, but when the setting value is low (settings 1 to 3), it is low. In addition, the execution probability of setting suggestion effect A is set lower in a large negative state where the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than -1500 sheets than in a small loss state where the cumulative difference number is less than 0 sheets - 1500 sheets or more. (Settings 1 to 3), it is high, but when the setting value is high (Settings 4 to 6), it is low. Note that in any of these four categories, the higher the setting value is, the higher the probability of execution of setting suggestion effect A becomes.

Also, setting suggestion performance A where a ronin character appears that suggests the setting value is 2 or more, setting suggestion performance A where a lord character appears that suggests the setting value is 4 or more, and a princess who suggests that setting 4 is confirmed. Setting suggestion performance A where a character appears, setting suggestion performance A where a panda character suggesting setting 5 is confirmed, and setting suggestion performance A where a baby panda character suggesting setting 6 is confirmed, each have a cumulative difference in the number of sheets. The execution probability in the case of a small win of 0 or more and less than 1500 coins is the same as the execution probability in the case where the cumulative difference number of coins in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is 0 or more. Furthermore, in setting suggestion performance A where a ronin character suggesting that the setting value is 2 or more appears, and setting suggestion performance A where a lord character suggesting that the setting value is 4 or more appears, the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0. The execution probability in the case of a small loss of less than 1500 coins or more is the same as the execution probability in the case where the cumulative difference in the number of coins in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is less than 0 coins. Also, setting suggestion effect A where a princess character appears that suggests setting 4 is confirmed, setting suggestion effect A where a panda character appears that suggests setting 5 is confirmed, and setting where a baby panda character appears that suggests setting 6 is confirmed. For each suggestion effect A, the execution probability in the case of a big loss where the cumulative difference in the number of coins is less than -1500 coins is the same as the execution probability in the case where the cumulative difference in the number of coins in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a) is less than 0 coins. .

In addition, also in this third modification, the execution probability that the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more and the execution probability that the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0 may be replaced as in the first modification.

Further, in the third modification, the difference number of sheets is divided into four stages (four stages), but it is not limited to four stages, but may be divided into three stages, five stages or more.

Next, a fourth modification of the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A will be explained. Setting suggestion performance A in this fourth modification is a performance that varies the execution probability depending on the setting value and the number of games. In other words, when the setting values are set to settings 4 to 6, and the number of games is 1000 or more, the fixed type (setting 6 fixed, setting 5 fixed) , setting 4 confirmed), the execution probability of setting suggestion effect A is high. As the number of games increases, the probability of execution of the definite setting suggestion effect A increases, so long-term play can be encouraged. Note that the number of games here refers to the cumulative number of games. The cumulative number of games is the cumulative number of games since the slot machine 100 was powered on at the earliest timing on the same day, and power-on after power restoration due to a momentary power outage is ignored. The cumulative number of games is reset (returned to 0) when the main power is turned off across dates. It is also reset when RAM is cleared or settings are changed. Alternatively, the reset may be performed when the main power is turned off after a predetermined time has elapsed since the main power was turned on. Note that the timing for resetting may be not the timing when the main power is turned off, but the timing when the main power is turned on. Furthermore, instead of the cumulative number of games, it may be the number of games in the AT state, the number of games in the normal AT state among the AT states, or the number of games in another predetermined state. However, it may also be the number of games in a specific period. Further, the number of games is not limited to 1000 games, but may be a predetermined number of games, and may be divided into cases where the number of games is greater than the predetermined number and cases where the number of games is less than or equal to the predetermined number.

When the setting value is set to 4 to 6, and the number of games is 1000 or more, vague setting suggestions (setting 4 or more or setting 2 or more) are more likely than when the number of games is less than 1000. , high setting possibility), the execution probability of setting suggestion effect A is low. Note that when the setting value is set to a high setting value (settings 4 to 6 in this example) and the number of games is 1000 or more, the number of games is less than 1000. The execution probability may be increased only for the setting suggestion effect A with a setting of 4 or more and the setting suggestion effect A with a high setting possibility.

In addition to dividing the number of games into 1000 games or more and less than 1000 games, the number of games may be divided into more finely divided categories such that the larger the number of games, the more likely the definite setting suggestion effect A is to be executed. For example, up to 1000G, a definite setting suggestion effect A is executed with a 1% execution probability, from 1001G to 3000G, a definite setting suggestion effect A is executed with a 5% execution probability, and after 3001G, a 10% execution probability is executed. The setting suggestion effect A of a definite type may be executed with an execution probability.

Also, if the setting value is the minimum setting value (in this example, setting 1), it is suggested that the minimum setting value is confirmed (in this example, setting 1 is confirmed) regardless of the number of games (the execution probability is the same regardless of the number of games). Setting suggestion performance A may also be executed. Note that, when the setting value is the minimum setting value, the setting suggestion performance A that suggests the determination of the minimum setting value may be always executed regardless of the number of games.

Further, when the number of games is 1000 or more, the execution probability of the entire setting suggestion effect A may be made higher than when the number of games is less than 1000.

Further, the setting suggestion performance A may be a performance with different execution probabilities depending on the setting value, the number of games, and the difference number of sheets. For example, up to the 1000th game, the execution rate of the definite setting suggestion effect A is lowered regardless of the number of difference sheets, and after the 1001st game, the execution probability is set according to the number of difference sheets as shown in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). It is also possible to perform a different version. Alternatively, up to the 1000th game, the execution rate of setting suggestion effect A with ambiguous setting suggestion is increased regardless of the number of difference sheets, and after the 1001st game, the execution rate is increased according to the number of difference sheets as shown in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). It may also be a performance with different execution probabilities. In other words, an example in which the execution probability is different depending on the set value and the difference number of sheets, such as this fourth modification, the present embodiment of FIG. 65(a), the first modification, the second modification, and the third modification, is May be combined.

Furthermore, in this fourth modification as well, the execution probability when the number of games is 1000 or more and the execution probability when the number of games is less than 1000 may be replaced as in the first modification.

Next, a fifth modification of the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A will be explained. Setting suggestion performance A in this fifth modification is a performance that varies the execution probability depending on the setting value and time period. In other words, when the setting value is set to Settings 4 to 6, and it is before 12:00 noon, the confirmation system (Setting 6 confirmed, Setting 5 confirmed, The execution probability of setting suggestion effect A for setting 4 (confirmed) is low. After 12:00 noon, the execution probability of the definite setting suggestion performance A increases, so the operating rate of the gaming machine in the afternoon can be improved. In addition, only when the setting value is set to the highest setting value (setting 6 in this example), the setting suggestion effect of setting 6 is confirmed after 12:00 noon than before 12:00 noon. The execution probability of A may be increased. Alternatively, in all settings, not only when the setting value is set to settings 4 to 6, the overall execution probability of setting suggestion effect A will be higher after 12:00 noon than before 12:00 noon. You can also do this.

Also, if the setting value is set to 4 to 6, and it is before 12:00 noon, vague setting suggestions (such as setting 4 or higher or setting 2) are more likely than when it is after 12:00 noon. As described above, the execution probability of setting suggestion effect A (high setting possibility) is high. Note that only when the setting value is set to the highest setting value (setting 6 in this example), ambiguous settings including setting 6 will be displayed after 12:00 noon than before 12:00 noon. The execution probability of setting suggestion performance A of setting suggestion (setting 4 or higher, setting 2 or higher, possibility of high setting) may be increased.

Further, the time zones may be further divided into finer divisions. For example, the later the time period becomes, the more likely the setting suggestion performance A of a definite type is to be executed, or the more likely it is that the setting suggestion performance A of an ambiguous setting suggestion is executed. More specifically, until 12:00 noon, a definite setting suggestion performance A is executed with a 1% execution probability, and from 12 noon to 17:00, a definite setting suggestion performance A is executed with a 5% execution probability. After 17:00, the definite setting suggestion performance A may be executed with a probability of execution of 10%. Alternatively, the execution probability may be increased every predetermined time (for example, 3 hours).

Also, if the setting value is the lowest setting value (in this example, setting 1), the setting suggests that the lowest setting value is fixed (in this example, setting 1 is fixed) regardless of the time zone (the execution probability is the same at any time). Suggestion effect A may be executed. Note that when the set value is the lowest set value, the setting suggestion performance A that suggests the lowest set value confirmation may be always executed regardless of the time period.

Furthermore, the setting suggestion performance A may be a performance with different execution probabilities depending on the setting value, time period, and difference number of sheets. For example, until 17:00, the execution rate of the definite setting suggestion effect A is made low regardless of the number of difference sheets, and after 17:00, the execution probability is set according to the number of difference sheets as shown in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). It is also possible to perform a different version. Alternatively, until 17:00, the execution rate of setting suggestion effect A with ambiguous setting suggestion is increased regardless of the number of difference sheets, and after 17:00, the execution rate is increased according to the number of difference sheets as shown in the lottery table shown in FIG. 65(a). It may also be a performance with different execution probabilities.

Also in this fifth modification, the execution probability when the time slot is before 12 o'clock and the execution probability when the time slot is after 12 o'clock may be interchanged as in the first modification.

Note that in the above description, lowering the execution probability includes setting it to 0%.

In addition, in the lottery table of setting suggestion effect A explained so far, the execution probability was changed according to the cumulative difference number of sheets, but instead of the cumulative difference number of sheets, the execution probability was changed according to the difference number of sheets in the AT state. The execution probability may be changed depending on the difference number of sheets in the normal AT state among the AT states, or the execution probability may be changed depending on the difference number of sheets in other predetermined states. The execution probability may be changed depending on the difference in the number of sheets in a specific period. Further, instead of distinguishing the difference number of sheets into 0 or more sheets and less than 0 sheets, a difference may be made between a case where the difference is more than 0 sheets and a case where it is 0 or less sheets.

Furthermore, although the above description of the setting suggestion effect was for the slot machine 100, it can also be applied to pachinko machines. Alternatively, the slot machine 100 may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals (hereinafter referred to as (also referred to as gaming value), the input of gaming value is performed using a predetermined external device (a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals, or a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning). It involves inputting digitized data from a functional electronic storage device), and the payout of gaming value requires outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). It includes.

<Summary of setting suggestion effects>
According to the above description,
``Setting means [for example, setting change button 292] that can set one setting value among a plurality of setting values [for example, settings 1 to 6];
a production means [for example, a liquid crystal display device 157] capable of executing a setting suggestion production that suggests the setting value that has been set;
A game machine comprising:
The setting values include a first setting value [for example, setting 6] and a second setting value [for example, setting 2] that is less advantageous for the player than the first setting value,
The presentation means is capable of executing at least a first setting suggestion presentation that makes a suggestion regarding the first setting value [for example, setting suggestion presentation A in which a baby panda character appears that suggests setting 6 is confirmed]. ,
The performance means executes the first setting suggestion performance with a first probability [for example, 5%] when a first condition [for example, a condition that the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more] is satisfied, It is executed with a second probability [for example, 1%] when the second condition [for example, the condition that the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0] is satisfied,
the second probability is a lower probability than the first probability;
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this gaming machine, since the first setting suggestion performance is performed under different conditions and with different execution probabilities, the conditions are set so as not to motivate the player to play or disappoint the player. By doing so, the first setting suggestion effect can be effectively utilized.

The first setting value may be a setting value that is most advantageous to the player (for example, setting 6) among the plurality of setting values.

The presentation means may perform a third setting suggestion presentation (for example, a background image of the liquid crystal display device 157) regarding the set value, regardless of whether the first condition and the second condition are satisfied. It may be possible to execute setting suggestion effect B) using . The third setting suggestion effect is a effect that suggests that the setting value that has been set may be any of the setting values (for example, a background image effect of background images B to G). Alternatively, it may be an effect that suggests a specific setting value (for example, a background image effect of background image H).

The production means may produce a fourth setting suggestion production that suggests that the setting value that has been set is the second setting value (for example, a ronin's display that suggests that setting 1 is confirmed as shown in FIG. 67(b)). It is possible to execute a setting suggestion effect A) in which a character appears, and the effect means executes the fourth setting suggestion effect when the first condition (for example, the condition that the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more) is executed. If the second condition is satisfied (for example, the condition that the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0), the execution is performed with a fifth probability (for example, 30%). ). Note that the fifth probability may be higher than the first probability or higher than the second probability. The sixth probability may also be higher than the first probability or higher than the second probability. Further, the fifth probability may be the same probability as the sixth probability.

As explained using the lottery table in FIG. 67(a), the first condition is to obtain the amount of gaming value obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game. The condition includes that the difference number is less than 0, and the second condition is the amount of gaming value obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game. The condition may include that the number of acquired differences is 0 or more.

The first setting suggestion performance is a performance that suggests the setting value with a lower degree of ambiguity than the second setting suggestion performance (for example, a definite setting suggestion performance). It may be A). In other words, the first setting suggestion performance may be a performance that more specifically specifies the setting value that has been set than the second setting suggestion performance. For example, the first setting suggestion effect may be an effect suggesting that the setting value being set is a specific setting value (for example, the first setting value).

The first setting suggestion performance is a performance suggesting that the setting value that has been set may be a relatively high setting value (for example, setting suggestion performance A where the specific setting value is unknown). Alternatively, it may be an effect that suggests a relatively high setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect A that confirms a specific high setting value). The second setting suggestion performance is a performance suggesting that the setting value that has been set may be a relatively low setting value (for example, setting suggestion performance A where the specific setting value is unknown). It may be an effect that suggests that the setting value that has been set is a relatively low setting value (for example, a setting suggestion effect A of a confirmed type), or it may be an effect that suggests that the setting value that is set is a relatively low setting value, may be included (for example, relatively low setting values may not be included), or may include relatively low setting values. It may be an effect that suggests that there is a certain value (for example, that a relatively low setting value is always included).

Also,
``The production means is capable of executing at least a second setting suggestion production that makes a suggestion regarding the first setting value [for example, setting suggestion production A in which a character of the palace appears suggesting that the setting is 4 or more]. It is a thing,
The second setting suggestion performance is a setting value that is more advantageous to the player than the setting value that is least advantageous to the player among the setting values suggested in the first setting suggestion performance [for example, setting 6]. This is a production that also includes suggestions regarding low setting values [for example, settings 4 and 5],
The rendering means executes the second setting suggestion rendering with a third probability [for example, 2%] when the first condition [for example, the cumulative difference number of sheets is 0 or more] is satisfied; It is executed with a fourth probability [for example, 3%] when the second condition [for example, the cumulative difference number of sheets is less than 0] is satisfied,
The fourth probability is a higher probability than the third probability,
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

Note that the first setting suggestion effect is a first effect suggesting that the setting value being set is the first setting value [for example, setting suggestion effect A of confirming a specific high setting value or It may be a definite setting suggestion effect A]. Further, the second setting suggestion effect is a second effect suggesting that the setting value that has been set may be the first setting value [for example, a setting suggestion effect where the specific setting value is unknown] A or ambiguous setting suggestion effect A].

Further, as an example of a case where the first setting suggestion performance is a definite setting suggestion performance A, and the second setting suggestion performance is a setting suggestion performance A with an unknown specific setting value, the first setting The suggestion effect is setting suggestion effect A that suggests setting 5 is confirmed, and the second setting suggestion effect is setting suggestion effect A that suggests setting 4 or higher or setting suggestion effect suggesting that there is a possibility of a high setting. An example is A. Further, as an example of a case where the first setting suggestion performance is a setting suggestion performance A in which the specific setting value is unknown, and the second setting suggestion performance is also the setting suggestion performance A in which the specific setting value is unknown, The first setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests either setting 5 or setting 6, and the second setting suggestion effect is a setting suggestion effect A that suggests setting 4 or higher; Setting suggestion effect A that suggests there is a possibility of a high setting, setting suggestion effect A that suggests that the setting value may be an even number, or setting suggestion effect that suggests that the setting value may be an odd number. An example is A. That is, the first setting suggestion effect may be any effect that has a lower degree of ambiguity than the second setting suggestion effect and suggests that the setting is higher.

Further, it is also possible to ignore the level of the setting value, and the second setting suggestion effect may be an effect having a higher degree of ambiguity than at least the first setting suggestion effect. For example, the first setting suggestion effect is setting suggestion effect A that does not include the false case where the specific setting value is unknown, and the second setting suggestion effect includes the false case where the specific setting value is unknown. As an example of a case where the setting suggestion effect is setting suggestion effect A, the first setting suggestion effect is setting suggestion effect A that suggests setting 4 or higher, and the second setting suggestion effect is setting suggestion effect A that indicates a possibility of a high setting. An example is the setting suggestion performance A that also includes a case where it is not (a case where it is false).

Also,
“The first condition is the amount of gaming value obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game [for example, the number of medals inserted] from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game [for example, the number of medals paid out]. The condition includes that the number of winning differences is 0 or more [for example, a state in which the player has not lost],
The second condition is a number where the difference in the amount of gaming value obtained by subtracting the amount of gaming value used in the game from the amount of gaming value awarded as a result of the game is less than 0 [for example, the player is losing Conditions that include being in a state of
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

The difference in the amount of gaming value obtained is the cumulative amount since the main power of this gaming machine was turned on at the earliest timing on the same day, and is reset (returned to 0) when the main power is turned off across dates. . It is also reset when RAM is cleared or settings are changed. Furthermore, the reset may be performed when the main power is turned off after a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the main power was turned on. Note that the timing for resetting may be not the timing when the main power is turned off, but the timing when the main power is turned on.

The first condition may be only a condition that the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained is a number greater than or equal to zero, and the second condition may be only that the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained is less than 0. The condition may be only a number.

The first condition is at least a condition where the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained is a number of 1 or more, and the second condition is at least a condition where the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained is 0 or less. The condition may be a number.

As explained using the lottery table of FIG. 68, the first condition may include other conditions in addition to the condition that the number of differences in the amount of gaming value acquired is a number of 0 or more, The second condition may include other conditions in addition to the condition that the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained is less than zero. For example, the first condition may include whether the acquired difference in the amount of gaming value is less than a first number (for example, +1500 coins) or greater than or equal to the first number. The second condition may be a condition in which a condition is added, and the second condition is whether the difference in the number of winnings is equal to or greater than a second number (for example, -1500 coins) in addition to the condition for the difference in the number of winnings in the amount of gaming value. The condition may include a condition that the number of sheets is less than the second number. In addition, in this case, if the number of acquisition differences in the amount of gaming value is a number greater than or equal to 0 and the number of acquisition differences is less than the first number of coins, the first setting suggestion effect (e.g. , the setting suggestion performance A) in which a baby panda character suggesting setting 6 is confirmed is executed with a seventh probability (for example, 5%), and the difference in the amount of game value obtained is equal to or greater than the first number. number, the first setting suggestion performance is executed with an eighth probability (for example, 7%), and the number of earned differences in the amount of gaming value is a number less than 0, and the number of earned differences is is greater than or equal to the second number of coins, the first setting suggestion effect is executed with a ninth probability (for example, 2%), and the difference in the amount of gaming value obtained is equal to or greater than the second number. If the number is less than the number of sheets, the first setting suggestion effect is executed with a tenth probability (for example, 1%), and the eighth probability is higher than the seventh probability. , the ninth probability is higher than the tenth probability, and the seventh probability is higher than the ninth probability. Furthermore, the eighth probability may be higher than the first probability, and the ninth probability may be higher than the second probability.

The first condition and the second condition may be a condition obtained by adding a condition of the number of games played (number of games) to the condition of the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained. For example, the first condition is at least a condition that the number of earned differences in the amount of gaming value is larger than 0 and the number of games played is a predetermined number (for example, 1000 games) or more, and the second condition The conditions may be at least such that the number of differences in the amount of game value obtained is a number smaller than 0, and the number of games played is less than the predetermined number of times. Alternatively, the first condition and the second condition may be a condition for the number of games played (number of games) instead of the condition for the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained. For example, the first condition is at least a condition that the number of games played is a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 games) or more, and the second condition is at least a condition that the number of games played is less than the predetermined number of times. It may be. Furthermore, the first condition may be that the number of games played is a predetermined number of times (for example, 1000 games) or more, and the second condition may be that the number of games played is less than the predetermined number of times. good. Further, as an example of the predetermined number of times, it is preferable to set the number to be larger than the denominator number of the winning probability (AT, bonus, etc.) at the lowest setting. For example, if the probability of winning at the lowest setting is 1/300, it is preferable that the predetermined number of games be more than 300 games. The purpose of setting the number of games as a condition is to make it easier for players who have played the game for a long time to execute the first setting suggestion effect, or to encourage them to play for a long time. Since this may be the goal, it is preferable to hit at least once as a guide.

The first condition and the second condition may be a condition obtained by adding a condition of the current time to the condition of the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained. For example, the first condition is at least that the number of differences in the amount of gaming value obtained is a number greater than 0, and that the current time is after a predetermined time (for example, 12:00 noon); The second condition may be at least such that the number of differences in the amount of game value obtained is a number smaller than 0, and the current time is before the predetermined time. Alternatively, the first condition and the second condition may be a condition of the current time instead of the condition of the difference in the amount of gaming value obtained. For example, the first condition may be at least a condition that the current time is after a predetermined time, and the second condition may be at least a condition that the current time is before the predetermined time. . Further, the first condition may be that the current time is after a predetermined time, and the second condition may be that the current time is before the predetermined time.

In addition, in the explanation so far, the classification of more than and less than may be divided into more and less. Furthermore, the later and earlier divisions may also be the later and earlier divisions.

In addition, in the second modification, setting suggestion effect A in which a ronin character that suggests setting 1 is confirmed is the same regardless of the number of difference sheets (regardless of whether the difference number is 0 or more or less than 0 sheets). Although execution was performed based on the execution probability, instead of suggesting setting 1, an effect may be used that suggests setting b described above.

The functions and effects described so far in the explanation of the setting suggestion effect are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are limited to the functions and effects described here. It is not something that will be done. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. May be applied. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, constituent elements included only in each description of the embodiment, modifications, various examples, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. However, it still stands as a cohesive technical idea.

<Display regarding numerical values>
Next, the display regarding numerical values will be explained in detail.

As described above, in the normal AT state and the specialized zone, the number of medals may be added to the ending differential number of medals that is a condition for ending the normal AT state. Regarding this additional effect of increasing the number of medals, there are several modes of effects other than the adding of the number of medals shown in FIGS. 61 to 64, and below, the additional effect 1 in which an updated display is performed will be explained.

FIG. 69 is a diagram showing the relationship between the number of additional sheets and the display mode in the additional effect 1.

The number of additional sheets in the additional effect 1 is determined in units of 10 sheets within the range of 30 sheets to 500 sheets. Therefore, the minimum number of additional sheets is 30, and the maximum number of additional sheets is 500. If you win the lottery for the number of additional tickets according to the lottery table shown in FIG. From among these, the final number of coins to be added in this additional performance 1 (final number of additional coins) is determined. A numerical image indicating the final number of additional tickets determined here is displayed at the end of the additional effect 1 on the liquid crystal display device 157. At this time, the number image indicating the final number of additional sheets of 30 to 490 sheets is displayed in gold, and the number image indicating the final number of additional sheets of 500 sheets is displayed in rainbow color.

Furthermore, in the additional performance 1, an updated display is performed for each section. In the update display, a display suggesting a numerical value is displayed in response to one press of the effect button 192 shown in FIG. 44. More specifically, each time the production button 192 is pressed once, a numeric image incremented by a predetermined number is updated and displayed. The final number of additional sheets determined by the CPU 304 of the main control section 300 is transmitted to the first sub-control section 400. The CPU of the first sub-control unit 400 determines how to set the section according to the final number of additional sheets. In the last section, the number of tickets at the end of the section becomes the final additional number of tickets. The first section is determined from 30 sheets, 40 sheets, 50 sheets, 60 sheets, 70 sheets, 80 sheets and 90 sheets, and from the second section onwards, the minimum section length is 30 sheets and the unit is 10 sheets. arbitrarily determined. For example, if the final number of additional sheets is 90, the first section may be 90 and only the first section, or the first section may be 30, the second section 30, and the third section 30. Alternatively, the number of sections may be divided into three sections.

FIG. 70 is a diagram showing a specific example of updating interval determination when the first section has 80 sheets.

The CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 sets the sections and also determines the update interval in the update display for each section. The update interval in the additional effect is an addition interval, and is shown as an "addition number" in FIG. 70.

In the update display, a numerical value is displayed each time the production button 192 is pressed once. If the updated display ends only in the first section, the last value of the first section becomes the final number of additional sheets. On the other hand, if the second and subsequent sections are prepared, the last value of the first section is only a value that is being added.

In FIG. 70, the numerical value displayed each time the production button 192 is pressed once is indicated as a "display number." The multiple numbers of displayed numbers shown in FIG. 70 include multiple numbers that gradually approach the final number of additional sheets (which may be 80 sheets or more than 80 sheets). include. Furthermore, as the number of additional sheets approaches the final number, the difference from the previous value may become smaller. That is, the number of additions may become smaller as the number approaches the final number of additional sheets. In addition, when continuing to the next section, the above-mentioned difference (number of additions) may become wide once and become smaller toward the last value of the section.

In the example shown in FIG. 70, by repeatedly pressing the production button 192 10 times, the last updated number image is displayed, and even if the production button 192 is repeatedly pressed for more than 10 times, the number image indicating a larger number is not displayed. Not done.

First, until the production button 192 is pressed five times, a value ("13") obtained by dividing "80", the last numerical value of the first section, by 6 and rounding it off is added. As a result, the number image displayed in the update display becomes a multiple of "13". The value added when the production button 192 is pressed for the 6th time will be described later, and when the production button 192 is pressed for the 7th time, the value obtained by dividing "80" by 6 and further halving the value is subtracted by 3. Add the rounded value (“4”). When the production button 192 is pressed for the 8th to 10th time, "1" corresponding to the minimum addition number is added. The value added when the effect button 192 is pressed for the sixth time is the value ("8") obtained by subtracting the value to be added as described above from "80". As explained above, by setting the last three times as the minimum number of additions, it is possible to make the player aware that the final number of additional coins or the value at the end of the first section is approaching, and to give a thrilling feeling.

FIG. 71 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the additional effect 1 in which updated display of up to 80 images is performed as described using FIG. 70.

The opening display of the additional effect 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(a). In this additional effect 1, the player is prompted to repeatedly press the effect button 192 shown in FIG. 44.

The lord's character UNT is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(b). After this, the character UNT of this hall continues to be displayed during the operational validity period of the production button 192.

On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 71(c), display of the operation promotion display 192i of the production button 192 is started. This operation promotion display 192i includes a button image imitating the performance button 192, a downward arrow image instructing to press the button, and a character image PUSH. The operation promotion display 192i also continues to be displayed during the operation validity period of the production button 192.

In FIG. 71(d), the production button 192 is pressed for the first time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 starts updating display, and a numeric image of "13" is displayed as the additional sheet number display AUN during addition. In the update display, the value of the added number display AUN during addition is updated and displayed each time the production button 192 is pressed a predetermined number of times (10 times in this example). The additional number of coins displayed during addition AUN, which is displayed thereafter, is displayed in a layer before the display of the lord's character UNT, and is displayed with priority over the display of the lord's character UNT. On the other hand, the number of additional sheets during addition display AUN is displayed in a layer deeper than the operation promotion display 192i, and is not displayed with priority over the operation promotion display 192i. Note that the number of additional sheets during addition display AUN may be displayed on a layer before the operation promotion display 192i.

In FIG. 71(e), the production button 192 is pressed for the second time, and the updated number of additional sheets during addition AUN is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. That is, a number image of "26" is displayed, which is 13 added to the number of additional sheets added during addition AUN. Thereafter, the production button 192 is pressed repeatedly (the pressing operation is repeated), and the additional number display AUN during addition is updated and a new number image is displayed. Specifically, in FIG. 71(f) for the third operation, a number image of "39" with 13 added is displayed, and in FIG. A number image is displayed, and in the fifth operation (h) of the same figure, a number image of "65" with 13 added is displayed. In the subsequent sixth operation of FIG. 71(i), a numeric image of "73" with 8 added is displayed. In FIG. 71(j) for the seventh operation, a number image of "77" with 4 added is displayed, and the added value (update interval) is gradually narrowing. In Figure 71(k) for the 8th operation, a number image of "78" with only 1 added is displayed, and in the same figure (l) of the 9th operation, a number image of "79" with only 1 added as well. Is displayed.

As mentioned above, the minimum number of additional sheets is 30, so any number less than "30" cannot be displayed as the final number of additional sheets. Furthermore, since the final number of additional sheets is in increments of 10 sheets, numbers whose first digit is 1 to 9 cannot be displayed as the final number of additional sheets. In the add-on number display AUN during addition, a numerical value that cannot be displayed as the final add-on number is displayed. Players who know that the final number of additional coins is in 10-coin increments should note that while the first digit is a non-zero number, the number of additional coins being added is displayed AUN instead of the final number of additional coins. Understandably, you can play the game with anticipation toward the display of the final number of additional coins, which may improve the interest of the game.

FIG. 72 is a diagram continuing from FIG. 71.

In FIG. 72(a), the production button 192 is pressed for the 10th time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays "80" with only 1 added to the number image of "79" displayed in FIG. 71(l). ” is displayed. This number image "80" is the last updated number image FUN, and is displayed in normal size. When the last number of the first section is the final number of additional sheets, the last updated number image FUN becomes a type of number image indicating the final number of additional sheets, and corresponds to an example of the second number image. The last updated number image FUN is also displayed on a layer in front of the display of the lord's character UNT, and is displayed with priority over the display of the lord's character UNT, but is displayed on a layer behind the operation promotion display 192i. and is not displayed with priority over the operation promotion display 192i.

In the update display described above, nine numeric images of the number of additional sheets during addition display AUN and one numeric image of the last updated numeric image FUN are displayed. That is, 10 number images are displayed. As explained using FIG. 70, the number of 10 pieces is the number predetermined by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400, and is the number of integers when counting up to 80 without including 0. The number is smaller than the certain 80. By doing so, it is possible to reduce the amount of presentation data and reduce the processing load. Furthermore, it is possible to give the impression that the update display is progressing at a good pace.

The operational validity period of the production button 192 is a period until the production button 192 is operated 20 times, but if the production button 192 is not pressed 20 times before the predetermined time elapses, it ends at the time when the predetermined time elapses. In this example, the effect button 192 is pressed 20 times within a predetermined time (FIGS. 72(b) to 72(c)), and the valid operation period ends.

The updated display ends when the last updated number image FUN is displayed. Therefore, the last updated number image FUN becomes the image displayed at the end of the updated display.

When the last number of the first section is the final number of additional sheets, the character UNT, the operation promotion display 192i, and the last updated number image FUN disappear from the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 72(d). , a numerical enlargement display VLI is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. This numerical enlargement display VLI is a type of numerical image indicating the final additional number of sheets, is larger than the last updated numerical image FUN, and corresponds to an example of a third numerical image. By displaying the numerical enlargement display VLI, it is possible to make the additional performance 1 more exciting than the final additional number of sheets added. Note that, as shown in FIG. 72(d'), the enlarged numerical value display VLI may be displayed at a different angle from the last updated numerical image FUN. However, angles of 90 degrees or more are displayed without changing the angle.

After the numerical enlargement display VLI is displayed, the result display of the additional effect 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The result display of the additional effect 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(e). As shown in FIG. 72(e), this result display includes a number display RUN1 of "80" which is the final additional number of sheets, a display RUN2 of "TOTAL", a symbol display RUN3 of "+", and a number display of "sheets". It consists of a unit display RUN4. The sheet number display RUN1 of "80" is a type of numerical image indicating the final additional sheet number, and corresponds to an example of a certain numerical image. This number display RUN1 of "80" is a smaller image than the numerical enlargement display VLI, and is displayed in gold. By displaying the numerical enlargement display VLI with a large display size in advance, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the numerical value of the number display RUN1 of "80" ("80"). In addition, by adding "TOTAL" display RUN2, "+" symbol display RUN3, and "sheets" unit display RUN4 to the number display RUN1 of "80", it is possible to indicate that it is the result display of additional effect 1, i.e. The player can easily recognize the final number of additional coins in the current additional performance 1. The display RUN2 of "TOTAL", the symbol display RUN3 of "+", and the unit display RUN4 of "sheet" correspond to an example of an additional image.

On the other hand, if the final number of additional sheets is 90 or more and the process does not end in the first section but continues after the second section, the process proceeds from FIG. 72(c) to FIG. 72(f). That is, even when continuing to the second section, the character UNT, the operation promotion display 192i, and the last updated numeric image FUN disappear from the liquid crystal display device 157, but the numeric enlargement display VLI is not displayed, and instead, a continuation display is displayed. Is displayed. On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(f), a continuation display CTI is displayed in which the character of the lord appears again and a text display such as "Not yet" is displayed.

As shown in FIG. 72(c), when the last updated number image FUN is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, the player pays attention to whether or not the number of the last updated number image FUN is the final number of additional coins. We hope to continue to the next section shown in Figure 72(f). Here, the numerical value of the last updated number image FUN is a numerical value with 0 in the first digit, and since a numerical value with 0 in the first digit is not displayed in the add-on number display AUN during addition, the player When the numerical value is displayed, the user realizes that the last updated numerical image FUN has been displayed. However, it is also possible to display a value in which the first digit is 0 (for example, 10, which is less than the minimum number of additional sheets, 40, etc., which is greater than or equal to the minimum number of additional sheets) in the display AUN of the number of additional sheets during addition.

When continuing to the next category, the display 192i for promoting the operation of the effect button 192 has started to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 72(g), and the first pressing operation of the effect button 192 after continuing is being carried out. The pressing operation here corresponds to the first pressing operation in the second section. For the second section as well, the number of additions is determined as described using FIG. 70. In FIG. 72(g), the number image "98", which is 18 added to "80", which was the last number in the first section, is displayed as the additional sheet number display AUN during addition in the update display in the second section. ing.

In addition, when the production button 192 is pressed for the second time, the additional number display AUN during addition is updated as shown in FIG. 72(h), and a new numerical image of "116" with 18 added again is displayed. Thereafter, the updated display continues, and the second section ends soon. If the last number of the second section is the final number of additional tickets, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a numerical enlargement display VLI (see FIG. 72(d)), and finally displays the result of the additional effect 1 (see FIG. 72(d)). (d)) is displayed. On the other hand, if the second section does not end and continues to the third section, a continuation display CTI (see FIG. 72(f)) is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and the third section is started.

Next, a modification of the update display in the additional performance 1 will be explained.

As shown in FIG. 72(a), the production button 192 is pressed for the tenth time, and the last updated number image FUN, which is a number image of "80", is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The last updated number image FUN starts to be displayed in the standard size, but is displayed in an enlarged/reduced manner until the effect button 192 is operated 20 times.

FIG. 73(a) is a diagram showing enlarged/reduced display as a first modification.

In the enlarged/reduced display in FIG. 73(a), the display size of the last updated number image FUN changes from the standard size to the enlarged size, then returns once from the enlarged size to the standard size, and then changes from the standard size to the reduced size. Then, the display repeats, returning from the reduced size to the standard size, and then changing from the standard size to the enlarged size.

FIG. 73(b) is a diagram showing an enlarged display as a second modification.

In the second modified example shown in FIG. 73(b), the standard size and the enlarged size are displayed alternately, and the reduced size is not displayed.

In both the first modification example and the second modification example, the timing of the change in display size may be every predetermined time, or may be the timing of the pressing operation of the production button 192. That is, the display size may change each time the presentation button 192 is pressed.

Further, whether the enlarged size in the enlarged/reduced display or the enlarged size in the enlarged display is smaller than the display size of the numerical image "80" which is the numerical enlarged display VLI in FIG. 72(d).

Further, although it has been described that the last updated number image FUN is displayed in an enlarged/reduced manner, the display of the number of additional sheets during addition AUN may also be displayed in an enlarged/reduced manner.

Next, an example in which the update interval (addition interval) of the update display in the additional performance 1 is changed will be explained.

FIG. 74 is a diagram showing an example in which the update interval (addition interval) of the update display in the additional performance 1 is changed.

In this example, up to a three-digit value is allowed as the final number of additional sheets. The display AUN of the number of additional sheets during addition skips the 1-digit value and starts from the 2-digit value.

FIG. 74(A) is a table showing possible numerical values of the first digit of the 2-digit and 3-digit addition number display AUN.

The first digit can be 0, 3, 5 or 9.

FIG. 74(a) is a table showing possible numerical values for the second digit of the 3-digit addition number display AUN.

The second digit can be 1, 4, 6 or 8.

Note that the maximum digit of the additional sheet number display AUN during addition is a numerical value that increases by one from 1. Therefore, in the case of a 2-digit add-on number display AUN, the second digit can take a value from 1 to 9, and in the case of a 3-digit add-on number display AUN, the third digit can also be a number from 1 to 9. You can take numerical values.

The opening display of additional performance 1 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 74(a), as in FIG. 71(a), and the player is prompted to repeatedly press the performance button 192 shown in FIG. ing.

On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 74(b), the lord's character UNT is displayed, and furthermore, the display of the operation promotion display 192i of the production button 192 has started.

In FIG. 74(c), the production button 192 is pressed for the first time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a number image of "10", which is a two-digit number, as the additional sheet number display AUN during addition. In FIG. 74(d) for the second operation, a number image of "13" with a 3 in the first digit is displayed, and in FIG. 74(e) for the third operation, a number image of "15" with a 5 in the first digit is displayed. In the fourth operation shown in FIG. 74(f), a number image of "19" with the first digit being 9 is displayed. In the subsequent fifth operation shown in FIG. 74(g), the second digit of the largest digit is incremented by one, and a number image of "20" with the first digit being 0 is displayed.

In addition, after the number image of "99" is displayed as the number of additional sheets during addition AUN, the number image of "110" is displayed, and after the number image of "189" is displayed as the number of additional sheets during addition AUN. The number image “210” is displayed.

In this way, the display AUN for the number of additional coins during addition is displayed, and when it is updated to the next display AUN for the number of additional coins during addition, if the final number of additional coins is exceeded, the final number of additional coins is displayed instead of the display AUN for the number of additional coins during the next addition. The last updated numeric image FUN of the numeric image indicating . For example, if the final number of additional sheets is 200, a number image of "189" is displayed as the number of additional sheets displayed AUN during addition, and then a number image of "200" is displayed as the last updated number image FUN. .

Next, additional performance 2 will be explained. Explanations that overlap with those explained in additional effect 1 may be omitted. In addition, the same symbols as those used in the explanation of the additional effect 1 are used for the same names as those explained in the explanation of the additional effect 1.

In the add-on performance 1 described so far, the add-on number display AUN during addition is updated and displayed in the update display. In other words, the number of additional sheets itself was displayed. On the other hand, in the additional performance 2, an additional amount display indicating the number of additions (increased numerical value) is displayed.

FIG. 75(a) is a diagram showing the relationship between the final number of additional sheets and the display mode in the additional effect 2.

The final number of additional coins in the additional performance 2 is determined in units of 10 within the range of 30 to 200. Therefore, the minimum number of additional sheets is 30, and the maximum number of additional sheets is 200. The final number of additional tickets is displayed as a numerical image at the end of the additional performance 2 as a result display of the additional performance 2. At this time, if the final number of additional sheets is 2 digits, it is displayed in gold, and if it is 3 digits, it is displayed in rainbow colors.

FIG. 75(b) is a diagram showing the relationship between the increased numerical value and the display mode of displaying the additional number of sheets.

In the additional performance 2, four values are prepared as the increase number (addition number). In the display of the additional number of sheets representing the increased numerical value, a numerical image of "+1" representing that the increased numerical value is 1 and a numerical image of "+5" representing that the increased numerical value is 5 are displayed. These additional amount display numbers are displayed in blue. In addition, in the additional amount display, a number image of "+10" indicating that the increase number is 10 and a number image of "+20" indicating that the increase number is 20 are also displayed. These additional amount display numbers are displayed in red. That is, the additional number of sheets is displayed in a blue display mode in the case of a one-digit increase value, and in a red display mode in the case of a two-digit increase value.

As mentioned above, since the minimum number of additional coins is 30 even in the additional performance 2, the increased numerical value is composed of a numerical value that cannot be displayed as the final number of additional coins. However, an increment of 30 may be added.

In addition, the display of the number of additional sheets is regulated so that it does not consist only of ``+1'' number images, and ``+5'' number images, ``+10'' number images, and ``+20'' number images also appear. The updated display progresses at a good pace.

FIG. 75(c) is a diagram showing a modification of the display mode of displaying the number of additional sheets.

In this modification, in the case of a two-digit increase number, the number image of the increase number, which is the additional number of sheets displayed, is displayed in the enlarged/reduced display explained using FIG. 73(a), and for a one-digit increase number, In case of increasing numbers, the digit image will be displayed in standard size. Note that instead of the enlarged/reduced display, the enlarged display described using FIG. 73(b) may be used.

FIG. 76 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the additional effect 2.

The opening display of the additional effect 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(a). Also in this additional effect 2, the player is encouraged to repeatedly press the effect button 192 shown in FIG. 44.

A panda character UNP is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(b). After this, the panda character UNP continues to be displayed during the operational validity period of the production button 192.

In the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(c), the display of the display 192i promoting the operation of the effect button 192 has started, and the first press operation of the effect button 192 has been performed. As a result, in response to the pressing operation of the production button 192, the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a blue numeric image of "+1" which is the additional sheet number display PUN.

In FIG. 76(d), the second pressing operation of the production button 192 is performed, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red "+10" which is the additional number of sheets PUN corresponding to the second pressing operation of the production button 192. A numerical image is displayed. In addition, a blue number image of "+1" which is the additional number display PUN corresponding to the first pressing operation of the production button 192 is also displayed, but this number image is replaced with a red number "+10" which is displayed later. '' number images are displayed overlapping each other. In this way, the additional sheet number display PUN may be displayed in an overlapping manner. This overlap will be explained in detail using FIG. 76(d'). FIG. 76(d') shows an arrow PUN1v representing the vertical display range of the previously displayed numeric image "+1" and an arrow PUN1s representing the horizontal display range thereof. Also shown are an arrow PUN2v representing the vertical display range of the numeric image "+10" displayed later, and an arrow PUN2s representing the horizontal display range thereof. In the vertical direction, an arrow OLv indicates the overlap between the previously displayed numeric image “+1” and the later displayed numeric image “+10”. On the other hand, in the horizontal direction, the number image of "+1" displayed first is completely within the display range of the number image of "+10" displayed later, and the number image of "+1" is displayed in the horizontal direction. The range is the horizontal overlap (see arrow PUN1s). In the number images of the two additional number display PUN displayed in the additional effect 2, the vertical overlap does not exceed half of the number image, and the horizontal overlap does not exceed half of the number image. The range may be exceeded. Note that the opposite relationship may be adopted, in which the horizontal overlap does not exceed half the range of the number image, and the vertical overlap does not exceed half the range of the number image. It may be possible to do so in some cases.

In FIG. 76(e), the production button 192 is pressed for the third time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red "+20" which is the additional number of sheets PUN corresponding to the third depression of the production button 192. A numerical image is displayed. This red "+20" number image is displayed in a layer deeper than the display of the operation promotion display 192i of the production button 192, and is overlapped with the operation promotion display 192i, making it partially difficult to see. . Note that the numeric image of the additional sheet number display PUN may overlap the operation promotion display 192i. Moreover, the blue number image of "+1" which is the additional number display PUN corresponding to the first press operation of the production button 192 has disappeared. The additional sheet number display PUN is a display that disappears after a certain period of time has elapsed. On the other hand, the red number image of "+10" corresponding to the second pressing operation is still displayed.

In FIG. 76(g), the production button 192 is pressed for the 10th time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a blue "+5" which is the additional number of sheets PUN corresponding to the 10th depression of the production button 192. A numerical image is displayed.

In the subsequent liquid crystal display device 157 of FIG. 76(h), the panda character UNP, the operation promotion display 192i, and the additional sheet number display PUN disappear, and the update display end effect display is displayed on the entire screen. The update display ends when the end effect display is displayed. Therefore, in the update display in the top-up effect 2, the numerical image indicating the final number of top-up sheets is not displayed, and the sum of the numerical values of the top-up sheet number display PUN displayed so far becomes the final top-up sheet number. Note that the display timing of the end effect display is the timing when a predetermined period of time has elapsed since the update display was started, that is, the timing when the operation validity period of the effect button 192 has elapsed, but when the number of operations of the effect button 192 reaches the predetermined number of times The timing may be reached.

After the update display end effect display is displayed, the numerical enlargement display VLI is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, as shown in FIG. 76(i). This numerical enlargement display VLI is a type of numerical image indicating the final number of additional sheets, is larger than the additional sheet number display PUN, and corresponds to an example of a third numerical image. Note that the numerical value enlargement display VLI here may also be displayed at a different angle from the additional sheet number display PUN. However, angles of 90 degrees or more are displayed without changing the angle.

After the numerical enlargement display VLI is displayed, the result display of the additional performance 2 is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157. The liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 76(j) displays a number display RUN1 of "60" which is the final number of additional tickets, a display RUN2 of "TOTAL", and a symbol display of "+" as the results of the additional performance 2. It consists of a RUN3 and a unit display RUN4 of "sheets". The sheet number display RUN1 of "60" is a type of numerical image indicating the final additional sheet number, and corresponds to an example of a certain numerical image. This number display RUN1 of "60" has a smaller display size than the numerical enlargement display VLI, and is displayed in gold.

Next, an example in which the display method of the number of additional sheets PUN in the additional effect 2 is changed will be described.

In this example, the additional sheet number display PUN does not disappear after a certain period of time has elapsed, but continues to be displayed until the update display end effect display is displayed.

FIG. 77 is a diagram showing step by step the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 in a modified example of the additional effect 2.

77(a) to FIG. 77(d) are the same as FIG. 76(a) to FIG. 76(d).

In FIG. 77(e), the production button 192 is pressed for the third time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a red "+20" which is the additional number of sheets PUN corresponding to the third depression of the production button 192. A numerical image is displayed. In this example, in addition to the red number image "+10" corresponding to the second press operation, the blue number image "+1" corresponding to the first press operation of the production button 192 is also displayed without disappearing. There is even.

In FIG. 77(g), the production button 192 is pressed for the 10th time, and the liquid crystal display device 157 displays a blue "+5" which is the additional number of sheets PUN corresponding to the 10th depression of the production button 192. A numerical image is displayed. In addition, all of the numeric images representing the additional sheet number display PUN that have been displayed in response to each of the first to ninth operations remain displayed without disappearing. On the liquid crystal display device 157 shown in FIG. 77(g), a total of 10 numeric images of the additional sheet number display PUN are displayed. For this reason, the numeric images of the additional sheet number display PUN may overlap with each other. When the number images in the additional sheet number display PUN overlap, the number image displayed later is displayed overlapping the number image displayed earlier. Note that none of the 10 numerical images of the additional number display PUN overlaps with the operation promotion display 192i of the production button 192, and the operation promotion display 192i is displayed on the nearest layer. Note that the numeric image of the additional sheet number display PUN may overlap the operation promotion display 192i.

Subsequently, on the liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. 77(h), the panda character UNP, the operation promotion display 192i, and the numeric image of the 10 additional sheets number display PUN all disappear, and the end effect display of the update display is displayed on the entire screen. ing. Note that the player does not know whether the update display will end or not until the update display end effect display is displayed, but the 10 additional points displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in FIG. 77(g) By adding up the values of the partial number display PUN, the final additional number of sheets can be known in advance. On the other hand, by displaying the 10 additional coins display PUN, at first glance it can give the impression that the final number of additional coins has been added to a considerable number, which may improve the interest of the game.

After the update display end effect display is displayed, the numerical enlargement display VLI is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see FIG. 77(i)), and the final additional number of sheets is notified for the first time. Finally, as the results of the additional performance 2, the number display RUN1 of "60" which is the final number of additional tickets, the display RUN2 of "TOTAL", the symbol display RUN3 of "+", and the unit display RUN4 of "sheets" are displayed. (See Figure 77(j)).

FIG. 77(d') shows an example in which the additional sheet number display PUN is displayed at a different angle. When a plurality of additional sheets number display PUN is displayed, the display may be displayed at different angles in different directions. By doing so, it may be possible to avoid overlapping the additional quantity display PUNs. Note that even if the angle is changed, the angle should not be changed by more than 90 degrees.

In addition, in the above explanation, an example was shown in which numerical values are displayed, such as the number display RUN1 of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e) and the number display RUN1 of "60" shown in FIG. 76(j). It may be a display of associated characters or symbols, or a numerical value based on the number of characters. In addition, an example of displaying numerical values such as the number image of the number of additional sheets during addition AUN shown in FIGS. 71(d) to (l) and the number of additional sheets PUN shown in FIGS. 76(c) to (g) etc. However, it may be a display of characters or symbols that are associated with a numerical value, or a numerical value may be displayed by the number of characters.

Further, although the numerical value is the number of medals, the additional effect described here may be the number of games, the number of stages, or the number of sets. Alternatively, it may be a numerical value that increases or decreases in the performance (for example, a numerical value representing the number of enemies, a numerical value representing remaining physical strength, or a numerical value representing remaining time). Alternatively, it can be applied to pachinko machines, and the number of balls may be used.

Further, the slot machine 100 may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the game medium includes electronic data equivalent to medals (hereinafter referred to as "slot machine 100"). (also referred to as gaming value), the input of gaming value is performed using a predetermined external device (a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals, or a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning). It involves inputting digitized data from a functional electronic storage device), and the payout of gaming value requires outputting the digitized data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). It includes.

Further, although the updated display is displayed with the value updated each time the effect button 192 is pressed once, the value may be updated and displayed every predetermined time period without pressing the effect button 192. Further, although the production button 192 is pressed repeatedly, it may be pressed for a long time.

Furthermore, although we have explained the update display in the additional effect where the numerical value increases, the display in which the numerical value decreases (for example, the display in the countdown effect, the display that displays the number of enemies remaining in a mission to defeat enemies, etc.) This technology is also applicable to

<Summary of numerical display>
According to the above description,
``Display means [for example, liquid crystal display device 157],
A certain number to be displayed on the display means [for example, the number of final additional sheets] is set among a plurality of numbers [for example, the numbers from 30 to 500 shown in FIG. 69 and the numbers from 30 to 200 shown in FIG. 75(a)]. a determining means [for example, the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400],
A game machine comprising:
The display means displays a display suggesting the certain numerical value [for example, the number display RUN1 of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e) or the number display RUN1 of "60" shown in FIG. 76(j)]. In between, an update display that displays a display suggesting a numerical value in response to a predetermined trigger [for example, pressing the production button 192] [for example, the display from FIG. 71(d) to FIG. 72(c) or the display shown in FIG. (c) to FIG. 76(g)], and finally displays a display suggesting the certain numerical value,
The display that suggests a numerical value that is displayed in the update display [for example, the display of the number of additional sheets during addition AUN and the display of the number of additional sheets PUN] includes a display that suggests a numerical value that is different from any of the plurality of numerical values. [For example, the number displayed in FIG. 70, the increased value shown in FIG. 75(b)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
explained.

According to this game machine, it is possible to increase the variation of the update display. Further, in the update display, by also displaying a display suggesting a numerical value different from any of the plurality of numerical values, it is possible to prevent the final numerical value from being revealed.

Moreover, the display can be more diverse than displaying only the plurality of numerical values that can be determined by the determining means in the update display that suggests numerical values. In addition, by including the numerical values displayed on the display means not only the numerical values that can be determined by the determining means but also numerical values that are not actually determined, it is possible to avoid uniformity using only numerical values that can be determined. This reduces the impression that a lottery is taking place, gives a greater sense of randomness as if there are a variety of selection candidates, and in turn gives players the impression that they are actually deciding the numbers, not just the numbers that can actually be decided. It is possible to induce people to think about numerical values that will never be determined, as if they had the possibility of being determined.

Note that the display suggesting a certain numerical value may be a display of characters or symbols that are associated with the certain numerical value.

The certain numerical value may be a numerical value representing the number of game media, a numerical value representing the number of games, or a numerical value that increases or decreases in the production (for example, a numerical value representing the number of enemies or a numerical value representing the number of remaining players). It may also be a numerical value representing the current physical strength or a numerical value representing the remaining time.

The predetermined trigger may be an operation of the operating means (for example, every operation) or the passage of a predetermined time (for example, every second).

The display means displays an update display for displaying a numerical value according to a predetermined opportunity until the certain numerical value is displayed, and finally displays the certain numerical value, The numerical value displayed in may include a numerical value different from any of the plurality of numerical values.

Also,
“The display suggesting a certain numerical value is a certain numerical image indicating the certain numerical value [for example, the number display RUN1 of “80” shown in FIG. 72(e)],
The display suggesting the numerical value in the update display is a numerical image indicating the numerical value [for example, the display of the number of additional sheets during addition AUN],
The display means displays a numerical image indicating an integer value in the update display,
In the update display, displaying a number image indicating each of a specific number [for example, 10] of the integer values;
The specific number is a number smaller than the number of integers [for example, 80] when counting up to the certain number without including 0.
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, data capacity can be reduced and processing load can be reduced.

In addition, in the update display, by displaying a number that is smaller than the number of integers when counting up to the certain number without including 0, it gives the impression that switching is happening even faster. It is possible to prevent the number of displayed numerical values from becoming limited while still maintaining the

For example, if the certain numerical value is "10", the number of integers when counting up to the certain numerical value without including 0 is "1", "2", "3"... "10" Thus, the number is 10, but the specific number is a number smaller than 10.

The updated display may be such that the numerical value indicated by the numerical image increases or decreases each time the numerical image indicating the numerical value is updated and displayed.

The display means may display, in the update display, a numerical image showing an integer numerical value that approaches the certain numerical value [for example, an additional sheet number display AUN during addition].

The numerical value indicated by the numerical image displayed in the update display may be a numerical value representing an increase or decrease [for example, additional sheet number display PUN].

The number image displayed in the update display may be one that disappears after being displayed [for example, the additional number display PUN in the example of FIG. 76]. For example, it may be something that disappears when a new number image is displayed, or it may be something that disappears after a predetermined period of time has elapsed.

The number image displayed in the update display may be displayed continuously [for example, the additional number display PUN in the example of FIG. 77]. For example, it may be displayed continuously until the certain number image or the third number image is displayed, or it may continue until just before the certain number image or the third number image is displayed. The information may be displayed continuously for a predetermined period of time.

The numerical value indicated by the numerical image displayed in the update display includes a plurality of numerical values [for example, 13, 26, 39, 52, 65, 73] that gradually approach the certain numerical value [for example, 80]. , 77, 78, 79] [for example, the specific example in FIG. 70]. Furthermore, there may be a case where the difference [for example, the number of additions] from the numerical value displayed before becomes smaller as the value approaches the certain value [for example, from 13 to 8, from 8 to 4, from 4 to 1]. .

The numerical value indicated by the numerical image displayed in the update display may include any one of the plurality of numerical values. In this case, even if a numeric image indicating any one of the plurality of numeric values is displayed, it does not necessarily mean that the certain numeric image has been displayed, and attention should be paid to the display of the numeric image until the very end. I can do it.

Also,
“In the update display, a second number image indicating the certain number [for example, the last updated number image FUN] that is different from the certain number image is displayed last,
The display means displays a third numeric image [for example, numeric enlargement display VLI] between displaying the second numeric image and displaying the certain numeric image in the update display. can be,
The third number image is an image indicating the certain numerical value and is larger than the second number image [for example, the example shown in FIG. 72],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by displaying the third number image, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the final certain number, and it is also possible to increase the excitement beyond the certain number.

The display means may display the numerical images displayed in the update display [for example, the additional sheet number display PUN in the example of FIG. 77] at different angles [for example, the number images shown in FIG. )].

When displaying the certain number image, the display means may display the certain number image in a color corresponding to the number [for example, gold or rainbow color].

Also,
"The certain numerical image [for example, the number display RUN1 of "80" shown in FIG. 72(e)] is smaller than the third numerical image [for example, the numerical enlargement display VLI shown in FIG. 72(d)] is an image,
In displaying the certain number image, the display means may display an additional image indicating that the certain number image is the certain number image [for example, a display RUN2 of "TOTAL", a symbol display RUN3 of "+", and a unit of "sheet". [Display RUN4] and displays the certain number image [for example, FIG. 72(e)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this game machine, the final number image can be easily recognized by the additional image.

The additional image may be, for example, a total character image, a + or - symbol image, or a character image representing a unit such as a sheet.

The display means enlarges and displays the numeric image to be displayed in the update display from the normal size display, displays it in the normal size display, further reduces the number image from the normal size display, and then displays it in the normal size. [For example, the enlarged/reduced display of FIG. 73(a)] may be used.

Also,
"The display means displays a third number between the end of displaying the update display and the display of the certain number image [for example, the number of sheets display RUN1 of "60" shown in FIG. 76(j)]. Displays an image [for example, numerically enlarged display VLI shown in FIG. 76(i)],
The third number image is an image indicating the certain numerical value and is larger than the certain number image [for example, FIG. 76(i)],
A game machine characterized by: ”
Also explained.

According to this gaming machine, by displaying the third number image, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the final number, and it is also possible to make the game more exciting than the certain number.

In the updated display, a numeric image indicating the certain numerical value that is different from the certain numerical image is not displayed.

The functions and effects described so far in the explanation of the setting suggestion effect are merely a list of the most suitable functions and effects, and the functions and effects of the present invention are limited to the functions and effects described here. It is not something that will be done. Furthermore, even if the constituent elements are included only in the embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. described above, those constituent elements may be included in other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. May be applied. In other words, unless there is a factor that prevents the application, constituent elements included only in each description of the embodiment, modifications, various examples, etc. may not be applied to other embodiments, modifications, various examples, etc. However, it still stands as a cohesive technical idea.

Next, a game machine to which the present invention can be applied (for example, a reel game machine such as the slot machine 100 or a pinball game machine such as a pachinko machine) will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 78 to 106. Note that the symbols shown in FIGS. 78 to 106 are, in principle, used only for explanations using FIGS. 78 to 106, and even if the same symbols are shown in other drawings, In the explanation using FIG. 106, priority will be given to the symbols shown in FIGS. 78 to 106.

In the slot machine of this example, a predetermined number of game media are inserted, and a plurality of reels each having a plurality of types of symbols start rotating when a predetermined rotation start instruction operation is received. Based on the reception of the start instruction operation, the internal winning of multiple types of winning combinations is determined by lottery, and each of the plurality of reels stops rotating individually by receiving a predetermined rotation stop instruction operation, and then If the conditions determined by the winning combination based on the result of the lottery and the combination of symbols when the plurality of reels are stopped match the predetermined payout conditions, the game media will be paid out and the game will end; if not, the game media will be paid out. This is a game machine that allows you to play a series of games that end without stopping.

<Overall configuration>
First, the overall configuration of the slot machine 100 will be described using FIGS. 78 and 79. FIG. 78 is an external perspective view of the slot machine 100 seen from the front side (player side). FIG. 79 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open.

A slot machine 100 shown in FIG. 78 corresponds to an example of a game machine to which the present invention can be applied, and includes a main body 101 and a front door that is attached to the front of the main body 101 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 101. 102. Three reels (left reel 110, middle reel 111, and right reel 112) each having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer circumferential surface are stored in the center of the main body 101 (not shown), and are rotated inside the slot machine 100. It is configured so that it can be done. These reels 110 to 112 are rotationally driven by a driving device such as a stepping motor.

In this example, each pattern is printed in an appropriate number on a band-like member at equal intervals, and this band-like member is attached to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame member to constitute each reel 110 to 112. From the player's perspective, the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 are displayed in approximately three vertical directions through a reel window 113 provided in front of each reel 110 to 112, making a total of nine symbols visible. . To explain specifically using FIG. 80(a), the symbol displayed in the upper row of the left reel 110 (position 1 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 1) is the left reel upper row symbol, and the symbol displayed in the middle row of the left reel 110 ( The symbol displayed at position 2 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 2 is the middle symbol on the left reel, and the symbol displayed at the bottom row of the left reel 110 (position 3 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 3) is the left reel symbol. The symbols displayed on the lower reel 111, the upper row of the middle reel 111 (position 4 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 4) are the upper symbols of the middle reel, and the symbols displayed on the middle row of the middle reel 111 (position 5 shown in the diagram; symbol position 5). The symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel 111 (position 6 shown in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 6) are the symbols displayed on the lower row of the middle reel, and the symbols displayed on the upper row of the right reel 112 ( The symbol displayed at position 7 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 7) is the upper symbol on the right reel, and the symbol displayed at the middle row of the right reel 112 (position 8 shown in the diagram; also referred to as symbol position 8) is the symbol displayed on the right reel. The symbols displayed in the middle reel symbol and the lower symbol of the right reel 112 (position 9 in the figure; also referred to as symbol position 9) are called the right reel lower symbol, and each symbol on each reel 110 to 112 is displayed in the reel window 113. Throughout, three reels are displayed vertically on each reel 110 to 112, nine in total. By rotating each of the reels 110 to 112, the combination of symbols visible to the player changes. In other words, each reel 110 to 112 functions as a display device that variably displays combinations of a plurality of types of symbols. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display device. Further, in this example, three reels are provided inside the center of the slot machine 100, but the number of reels and the installation positions of the reels are not limited to this.

A reel backlight (not shown) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the reel window 113 is arranged on the back side of each reel 110 to 112. It is desirable that the reel backlight be shielded for each symbol so that each symbol can be illuminated evenly. Note that inside the slot machine 100, an optical sensor (not shown) consisting of a light emitting part and a light receiving part is provided near each of the reels 110 to 112. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel is configured to pass between the two. The position of the symbol on the reel in the rotational direction is determined based on the detection result of this sensor, and the reels 110 to 112 are stopped so that the desired symbol is displayed on the winning line.

In this example, one winning line 114 is provided, which is a middle winning line L1 consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel middle symbol (symbol position 8). There is. The winning line 114 is a line that is set at the stop position of symbols that are visible through the reel window 113, and is the line on which it is determined whether or not a symbol combination corresponding to a winning combination has been displayed. . This winning line L1 is shown in FIG. 80(a). A valid winning line (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as "valid line") 114 is predetermined by the number of medals bet as gaming media. The slot machine 100 of this example is a three-copy betting machine, and if the number of inserted medals is less than three, the winning line 114 will not be activated, and if the number of medals inserted is three, the winning line 114 will not be activated. becomes effective. When the winning line 114 becomes valid, the game can be started by operating the start lever 135.

Note that the active line (winning line) is not limited to the above-mentioned middle winning line L1, but includes, for example, the left reel upper symbol (symbol position 1), the middle reel upper symbol (symbol position 4), and the right reel upper symbol (symbol position 4). 7) There may be one upper active line consisting of the left reel lower symbol (symbol position 3), the middle reel lower symbol (symbol position 6), and the right reel lower symbol (symbol position 9). One is fine. In addition, there may be one effective line descending to the right, consisting of the left reel upper row symbol (symbol position 1), the middle reel middle row symbol (symbol position 5), and the right reel lower row symbol (symbol position 9), and the left reel lower row symbol (symbol position 9). There may be one active line rising to the right, consisting of position 3), middle reel middle row symbol (symbol position 5), and right reel upper row symbol (symbol position 7). Alternatively, there may be one irregular active line consisting of a left reel middle symbol (symbol position 2), a middle reel middle symbol (symbol position 5), and a right reel upper row symbol (symbol position 7). Further, the number of winning lines 114 is not limited to one line. For example, in addition to the middle winning line L1, there is also a winning line that drops to the right, which is made up of left reel upper symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel lower symbols, and left reel lower symbols, middle reel middle symbols, and right reel upper symbols. A total of three winning lines, including the winning lines rising to the right, may be set as valid winning lines, or a number of winning lines corresponding to the number of bets may be set as valid winning lines.

The notification lamp 123 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus combination) has been internally won in an internal lottery for winning combinations, which will be described later, or that a bonus game is in progress. be. The game medal insertion possible lamp 124 is a lamp for informing the player that game medals can be inserted. The replay lamp 122 indicates that the current game can be replayed (no need to insert medals) when a replay combination (details will be described later) is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. This is a lamp that informs the player of the

The medal insertion buttons (also referred to as bet buttons) 130 to 132 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) electronically stored in the slot machine 100. In this example, one coin is inserted each time the bet button 130 is pressed, two coins are inserted when the bet button 131 is pressed, and three coins are inserted when the bet button 132 is pressed. There is. Hereinafter, the operations on the bet buttons 130 to 132 will be referred to as bet operations, and the bet button 132 will also be referred to as the MAX bet button. In this example, a light emitting body (referred to as a bet button lamp) is provided inside the bet buttons 130 to 132, and when the bet buttons 130 to 132 can be operated, the light emitting body is lit to notify the player. be able to. In addition, the game medal insertion lamp 129 lights up a number of lamps according to the number of inserted medals, and when a specified number of medals are inserted, a game start signal indicating that the game start operation is possible. Lamp 121 lights up.

The medal slot 141 is an slot for the player to insert medals at the time of starting a game. That is, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 130 to 132, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal slot 141, and "insertion" includes both. be.

The stored medal number display 125 is a display device for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100. The game information display 126 is a display for numerically displaying various internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game). The payout number display 127 is a display for displaying the number of medals paid out to the player as a result of winning some winning combination. In this example, the stored token number display 125, the game information display 126, and the payout token number display 127 are composed of seven segment (SEG) displays.

The start lever 135 is a lever-type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 110 to 112. That is, when a desired number of medals is inserted into the medal slot 141 or the bet buttons 130 to 132 are operated and the start lever 135 is operated, the reels 110 to 112 start rotating. The operation on the start lever 135 is called a game start operation.

The stop button unit 136 is provided with stop buttons 137 to 139, each of which includes a left stop button 137, a middle stop button 138, and a right stop button 139. The stop buttons 137 to 139 are button-shaped switches for individually stopping the reels 110 to 112 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 135, and are provided in association with each reel 110 to 112, respectively. More specifically, by operating the left stop button 137, the left reel 110 can be stopped, by operating the middle stop button 138, the middle reel 111 can be stopped, and by operating the right stop button 139, the middle reel 111 can be stopped. By operating the right reel 112, it is possible to stop the right reel 112.

Hereinafter, the operations on the stop buttons 137 to 139 will be referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation will be referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation will be referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation will be referred to as a third stop operation. Further, the reel that is the target of the first stop operation is called the first stop reel, the reel that is the target of the second stop operation is called the second stop reel, and the reel that is the target of the third stop operation is called the third stop reel. Furthermore, the order in which the stop buttons 137 to 139 are stopped in order to stop all of the rotating reels 110 to 112 is called an operation order or a pressing order. The operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called a "sequential push operation order" or simply "sequential push", and the first stop reel is the left reel 110. , the operation order of the stop operation in which the second stop reel is the right reel 112 is called "sequential nipping", and the operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called the "middle press operation order" or simply "middle press". The operation order of the stop operation in which the first stop reel is the right reel 112 and the second stop reel is the middle reel 111 is called "reverse push operation order" or simply "reverse push", and the first stop reel is the right reel 112. The order of stop operations in which the reel 112 is used as the second stop reel and the left reel 110 is used as the second stop reel is called "reverse pinching." In this example, a light emitting body (referred to as a stop button lamp) is provided inside each of the stop buttons 137 to 139, and when the stop buttons 137 to 139 can be operated, the light emitting body is lit to notify the player. I can let you know.

The medal return button 133 is a button that is pressed to remove the inserted medals when the medals are jammed. The settlement button 134 is a button for settling medals electronically stored in the slot machine 100 and bet medals, and discharging them from the medal payout port 155. The door key hole 140 is a hole into which a key for unlocking the front door 102 of the slot machine 100 is inserted. The medal payout port 155 is a payout port for paying out medals.

A title panel 162 is provided at the bottom of the stop button unit 136 for displaying the model name and pasting various certificate stamps. At the bottom of the title panel 162, a medal payout opening 155 and a medal receiving tray 161 are provided.
The sound hole 145 is a hole for outputting sound from a speaker provided inside the slot machine 100 to the outside. Side lamps 144 provided on the left and right sides of the front door 102 are decorative lamps to enliven the game. A title panel 160 and a sound hole 143 are provided at the top of the front door 102.

A liquid crystal display device (effect image display device) 157 is provided in an area including the reel window 113 and its surroundings. Of these, the area inside the reel window 113 (the area covering the reel window 113) is a so-called transmissive liquid crystal that allows the reels 110 to 112 to be viewed through the reel window 113.

The PUSH button 192 is a button that can be operated when executing a predetermined effect. In this example, based on the operation of the PUSH button 192, the history of the number of acquired coins in the AT state can be displayed. In this example, a light emitting body (referred to as a PUSH button lamp) is provided inside the PUSH button 192, and when the PUSH button 192 can be operated (can be accepted as a valid operation), the light emitting body is turned on. The player can be informed of this.

FIG. 79 is a front view of the slot machine 100 with the front door 102 open. The main body 101 is a box that is surrounded by a top plate 261, a left side plate 260, a right side plate 260, a bottom plate 264, and a back plate 242, and has an opening at the front. Inside the main body 101, a main control board storage case 210 that stores a main control board inside is arranged at a position that does not overlap with the ventilation hole 249 provided at the top of the back plate 242. Three reels 110 to 112 are arranged below. On the side of the main control board storage case 210 and the reels 110 to 112, that is, on the left side plate 260, there is a first sub-control board that stores therein a first sub-control board constituting the first sub-control unit 400. A board storage case 220 is provided. Furthermore, an external centralized terminal board 248 is attached to the side plate 260 on the right side as viewed from the outside, which is connected to the main control board and outputs information about the slot machine 100 to an external device.

A medal payout device 180 (a device for paying out medals accumulated in a bucket) is disposed on the bottom plate 264, and a power supply board is provided above the medal payout device 180, that is, below the reels 110 to 112. A power supply device 252 is provided, and a power switch 244 is provided in front of the power supply device 252. The power switch 244 can be operated by opening the front door 102, and is difficult or impossible to operate when the front door 102 is closed.

The power supply device 252 converts AC power supplied from the outside to the slot machine 100, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and powers each of the main control section 300, first sub-control section 400, second sub-control section 500, etc., which will be described later. Supplies to the control unit and each device. Furthermore, it is equipped with a power storage circuit (e.g., a capacitor) for supplying power to predetermined components (e.g., RAM 308 of the main control unit 300, etc.) for a predetermined period (e.g., 10 days) even after external power is cut off. There is.

A medal auxiliary storage 240 is provided on the right side of the medal payout device 180, and an overflow terminal is provided behind this storage (not shown). The power supply device 252 is provided with a power cord connection part to which a power cord 265 is connected, and the power cord 265 connected here extends to the outside through a power cord hole 262 formed in the back plate 242 of the main body 101. There is.

The front door 102 is hinged to the left side plate 260 of the main body 101 via a hinge device 276, and a second sub-control board constituting the second sub-control unit 500 is housed above the liquid crystal display device 157. A second sub-board case 230 and an upper speaker 272 are provided. At the bottom of the liquid crystal display device 157, there are provided a medal selector 170 for sorting the inserted medals, and a passage 266 through which the medals pass when the medal selector 170 drops fraudulent medals, etc. into the medal receiving tray 161. There is. Furthermore, a bass speaker 277 is provided at a position corresponding to the sound hole 145.

Referring to FIGS. 78 and 79, a liquid crystal display device 157 includes a transmissive color liquid crystal panel 157A equipped with a color filter, and a backlight 157B that illuminates the color liquid crystal panel 157A with white light from the back side. It is a liquid crystal display. The liquid crystal panel 157A is a rectangular panel that extends to both the inner region and the outer region of the reel window 113, and a well-known liquid crystal panel can be used. The liquid crystal panel 157A includes, for example, R, G, and B (red, green, and blue) filters for each pixel, and also has a liquid crystal between transparent substrates such as glass on which signal lines, switching elements, pixel electrodes, etc. are formed. A liquid crystal layer is formed by enclosing the liquid crystal layer, and this liquid crystal layer is sandwiched between polarizing plates. The liquid crystal panel 157A may be of a normally white type, but in this example, it is of a normally black type.

The backlight 157B includes a light guide plate, a light source such as an LED that irradiates the light guide plate, an optical member such as a diffusion sheet, and the like. The light source is arranged, for example, along the edge of the light guide plate, and the light propagating inside the light guide plate is reflected to the liquid crystal panel 157A. In the case of this example, the backlight 157 has an opening 157b formed in the inner region of the reel window 113 and penetrating in the thickness direction, so that the player can view each reel 110 to 112 without using a light guide plate or the like. Visible. In this example, backlights provided in each of the reels 110 to 112 are used to illuminate the portion where the liquid crystal panel 157A and the opening 157b overlap from behind. Since the reel band has a white color (or a milky white color), each reel 110 to 112 can realize illumination that is not much different from the backlight 157, and the backlight of each reel 110 to 112 is one part of the backlight 157. or the entirety thereof can also be referred to as a backlight unit.

In the case of this example, the opening 157b is a single rectangle with an outline adapted to the reel window 113, but three openings corresponding to the reels 110 to 112 are formed so as to fill the gaps between the reels 110 to 112. It may also be rectangular. The clarity of images displayed in the gaps between reels can be improved.

By blocking the transmission of light in the liquid crystal panel 157A, it appears to the player that a black image is being displayed. Furthermore, by transmitting backlight light equally in R, G, and B, it appears to the player that a white image is being displayed. Displaying a white image can also be said to be a state in which the transparency of the liquid crystal panel 157A is increased, and when R, G, and B are each controlled to the maximum brightness, the light transmittance is the highest. It can be said that it is a state. The display of black, white, or other colors can be controlled on a pixel-by-pixel basis.

The operation of this liquid crystal display device 157 will be explained using FIGS. 80(b) to 80(d). This figure is a diagram showing an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 80(b) shows the state of the liquid crystal display device 157 when power is not supplied to the slot machine 100. As mentioned above, in this example, the liquid crystal display device 157 is a normally black type liquid crystal display, and when the power is off, it appears to the player that a black image is displayed, and the reels 110 to 111 is difficult to see.

FIG. 80(c) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157. This figure shows that the entire liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display images. At this time, in the area inside the reel window 113, light etc. from the reels 110 to 112 serve as a backlight, and the image on the liquid crystal display device 157 becomes visible in this area. However, due to the image display on the liquid crystal display device 157, the visibility of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is reduced (they become difficult to see).

FIG. 80(d) shows an example of the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 that is different from FIG. 80(c). In this figure, the area inside the reel window 113 is different from the example in (c) above. Specifically, by displaying a white image in the area inside the reel window 113, visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is ensured. In this example, this state occurs after medals are inserted in one game. That is, in order to ensure the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, the state shown in FIG. 80(d) is maintained at least from the start to the stop of rotation of the reels 110 to 112.

As explained above, in this example, an area is provided for the liquid crystal display device 157 to cover the reel window 113, and a white image is displayed to make the reels 110 to 112 visible, and when an image other than white is displayed. The visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is reduced. In order to improve the visibility of the reels 110 to 112, it is possible to set the transmittance of each pixel that makes up the image of the area covering the reel window 113, and the transmittance is set to 100% (transparent state). It's okay.

Note that the device for displaying images is not limited to a liquid crystal display device, but may be any display device that can display various effect images and various game information, such as a multi-segment display (7-segment display), a dot matrix display, etc. It may be a display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, a reel (drum), or a display device consisting of a projector and a screen. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the entirety can be viewed by the player. In this example, the display screen is rectangular, but it may also be square. Furthermore, a decoration (not shown) may be provided around the periphery of the display screen so that a part of the periphery of the display screen is hidden by the decoration, making the display screen appear oddly shaped. Although the display screen is a flat surface in this example, it may be a curved surface.

<Circuit configuration of control section>
Next, the circuit configuration of the control section of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 81. Note that this figure is a circuit block diagram of the control section.

The control unit of the slot machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the progress of the game, and a main control unit 300 that controls the main performance according to command signals (hereinafter simply referred to as “commands”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The second sub-control unit 500 controls various devices based on commands sent from the first sub-control unit 400.

<Main control section>
First, the main control section 300 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300, and this basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, control program data, lottery data used for internal lottery of winning combinations, and reel symbols. A ROM 306 for storing arrays, etc., a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 310 for controlling input/output of various devices, a counter timer 312 for measuring time, number of times, etc., and a WDT. (watchdog timer) 314 is installed. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and RAM 308, and the same applies to the first sub-control unit 400 and second sub-control unit 500, which will be described later. However, in this example, data is stored in a non-volatile manner. ROM, which is a storage device with a storage area for storing data, and RAM, which is a storage device with a storage area to temporarily store data, are used together.

The CPU 304 of this basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 315b as a system clock. Furthermore, when the power is turned on, the CPU 304 transmits the frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 306 to the counter timer 312, and the counter timer 312 sets the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data. An interrupt request is sent to the CPU 304 at each interrupt time. The CPU 304 uses this interrupt request as a trigger to monitor each sensor and transmit drive pulses. For example, if the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b is set to 8 MHz, the frequency division value of the counter timer 312 is set to 1/256, and the frequency division data of the ROM 306 is set to 47, the reference time of the interrupt is 256 x 47 ÷ 8 MHz. =1.504ms.

The main control unit 300 includes a random number generation circuit 316 used as a hardware random number counter that fluctuates a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 based on a clock signal input from a crystal oscillator 315a, and a startup signal The CPU 304 starts the game control (starts the main control section main processing described later) when the start signal is input from the start signal output circuit 338. Start).

In addition, the main control unit 300 includes a sensor circuit 320, and the CPU 304 detects various sensors 318 (bet button 130 sensor, bet button 131 sensor, bet button 132 sensor, medal input from the medal slot 141) at each interrupt time. A medal reception sensor for medals, a start lever 135 sensor, a left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, a right stop button 139 sensor, a payment button 134 sensor, a medal payout sensor for medals paid out from the medal payout device 180, and a left reel 110. , the index sensor of the middle reel 111, the index sensor of the right reel 112, the PUSH button 192 sensor, etc.) are monitored.

Note that when the sensor circuit 320 detects the H level of the start lever sensor, it outputs a signal indicating this detection to the random number generation circuit 316. Upon receiving this signal, the random number generation circuit 316 latches the value at that timing and stores it in a register that stores the random number value used for the lottery.

Two medal reception sensors are installed in the internal passage of the medal slot 141, and detect whether or not a medal has passed. Two start lever 135 sensors are installed inside the start lever 135 and detect a start operation by a player. A left stop button 137 sensor, a middle stop button 138 sensor, and a right stop button 139 sensor are installed on the corresponding stop buttons 137 to 139, respectively, and detect operations of the stop buttons by the player.

A bet button 130 sensor, a bet button 131 sensor, and a bet button 132 sensor are installed in each of the corresponding medal insertion buttons 130 to 132, and are used to insert medals electronically stored in the RAM 308 into a game. Detects input operation when inputting as . The payment button 134 sensor is provided on the payment button 134. When the settlement button 134 is pressed once, the electronically stored medals are settled. The medal payout sensor is a sensor for detecting medals paid out by the medal payout device 180. Note that each of the above sensors may be a non-contact type sensor or a contact type sensor.

The index sensor of the left reel 110, the index sensor of the middle reel 111, and the index sensor of the right reel 112 are installed at predetermined positions on the mounting base of each reel 110 to 112, and a light shielding piece provided on the reel frame passes through them. Every time I do it, it becomes L level. The rotational position information indicating how far the reel is rotating from the reference position from once reaching the L level until the next time it becomes the L level is calculated based on the counted value of the clock signal output by the crystal oscillator 315b. be done. When the CPU 304 detects the L level signal, it determines that the reel has rotated once, and resets the rotational position information of the reel to zero. This rotational position information is stored in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300.

The main control unit 300 includes a drive circuit 322 that drives the stepping motors provided on the reels 110 to 112, a drive circuit 324 that drives a solenoid provided on the medal selector 170 that sorts the inserted medals, and a drive circuit 324 that drives the solenoids provided on the medal payout device 180. A drive circuit 326 that drives the motor, various lamps 339 (notification lamp 123, game medal insertion possible lamp 124, replay lamp 122, game medal insertion lamp 129, game start lamp 121, stored tokens display 125, game information display 126 and a payout number display 127).

Further, an information output circuit 334 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 connects a slot to an information input circuit 652 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 334. Outputs gaming information (for example, information indicating gaming status) of the machine 100.

The main control unit 300 also includes a voltage monitoring circuit 330 that monitors the voltage value of the power supply supplied to the main control unit 300 from a power management unit (not shown). If the value is less than a predetermined value (9V in this embodiment), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has decreased is output to the basic circuit 302.

Further, the main control section 300 is provided with an output interface for transmitting commands to the first sub-control section 400, and enables communication with the first sub-control section 400. Note that information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 is one-way communication, and the main control unit 300 is configured to be able to send signals such as commands to the first sub-control unit 400. However, the configuration is such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 to the main control unit 300.

<Sub-control unit>
Next, the first sub-control unit 400 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the control command sent by the main control unit 300 via the input interface. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based on this control command, and this basic circuit 402 is connected to a CPU 404 for temporarily storing data. It is equipped with a RAM 408, an I/O 410 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time, number of times, etc. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The first sub-control unit 400 also has a ROM 406 that stores control programs and data for controlling the entire first sub-control unit 400, backlight lighting patterns, data for controlling various indicators, etc. It is set up.

The CPU 404 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 406 to the counter timer 412 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 412 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 404 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sound source IC 418, and speakers 272 and 277 are provided with the sound source IC 418 via an output interface. The sound source IC 418 controls the audio output from the amplifier and speakers 272 and 277 in accordance with commands from the CPU 404. The sound source IC 418 is connected to an S-ROM (sound ROM) in which audio data is stored, and the audio data acquired from this ROM is amplified by an amplifier and output from the speakers 272 and 277.

In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a drive circuit 422, and various lamps 420 (upper lamp, lower lamp, side lamp 144, title panel 162 lamp, game medal input possible lamp 124, bet button lamp, reel backlight, stop button 137 to 139 lamps, PUSH button lamp, etc.) are connected.

Further, the first sub-control unit 400 is provided with a sensor circuit 423, and the CPU 404 monitors the detection result of the door sensor 421 that detects the opening of the front door 102.

Further, the CPU 404 transmits and receives signals to and from the second sub-control unit 500 via the output interface. The second sub-control unit 500 performs display control of the effect image display device 157.

Next, the second sub-control unit 500 of the slot machine 100 will be explained. The second sub-control unit 500 receives the control command transmitted by the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface, and operates a basic circuit 502 that controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on this control command. This basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I/O 510 for controlling input/output of various devices, and a counter for measuring time, number of times, etc. It is equipped with a timer 512. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a ROM 506 in which control programs and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, etc. are stored.

The CPU 504 transmits frequency division data stored in a predetermined area of the ROM 506 to the counter timer 512 via the data bus at a predetermined timing. The counter timer 512 determines the interrupt time based on the received frequency division data, and transmits an interrupt request to the CPU 404 at each interrupt time. The CPU 504 controls each IC and each circuit based on the timing of this interrupt request.

Further, the second sub-control unit 500 is provided with a VDP 534 (video display processor), and a ROM 506 and a VRAM 536 are connected to the VDP 534 via a bus. The VDP 534 reads image data etc. stored in the ROM 506 based on a signal from the CPU 504, generates a display image using the work area of the VRAM 536, and displays the image on the effect image display device 157.

<Design arrangement>
The symbol arrangement on each of the reels 110 to 112 described above will be explained using FIG. 82. Note that this figure is a plan view showing the arrangement of symbols on each reel (left reel 110, middle reel 111, right reel 112).

On each reel 110 to 112, a predetermined number of symbols (in this example, 20 symbols with numbers 0 to 19) of a plurality of types (10 types in this example) shown on the right side of the figure are arranged. Further, the numbers 0 to 19 shown at the left end of the figure are numbers indicating the arrangement positions of the symbols on each reel 110 to 112. For example, in this example, the number 0 piece on the left reel 110 has a “bell symbol,” the number 1 piece on the middle reel 111 has a “replay symbol,” and the number 1 piece on the right reel 112 has a “watermelon 1 symbol.” ” are arranged respectively.

In addition, the "Blue Seven 2 pattern" and "Watermelon 2 pattern" are marked with a star mark, but this means that the "Blue Seven 2 pattern" and "Watermelon 2 pattern" are the same as the "Blue Seven 1 pattern" and the "Watermelon 2 pattern". It has a similar design to "Watermelon 1 Design", but it means that it is a different design (also referred to as the same type of design). ``Similar designs'' include cases where the drawn characters are the same but have different facial expressions, or the drawn objects (watermelons) are the same but have different patterns. In this example, a star mark is attached to make it easier to distinguish between similar designs.

<Type of winning role>
Next, types of winning combinations of the slot machine 100 will be explained.

The winning combinations of the slot machine 100 include a replay combination (replay) and a small combination. Note that the types of winning combinations are not limited to these winning combinations, and can be arbitrarily adopted. Among the winning combinations in this example, the re-gaming combination (replay) is a re-gaming combination that allows replaying without inserting new medals, and is sometimes called an "activation combination" to be distinguished from the winning combination. In this example, "winning" includes cases where a symbol combination of an active role that does not involve a medal payout (does not involve a payout of medals) is displayed on the active line, and includes, for example, a winning of a re-gaming role. It will be done.

A replay role (replay) is a winning role (activation role) that allows you to play the next game without inserting medals (gaming media) by winning a prize. Games can be played, and medals are not paid out. A small winning combination is a winning combination in which a predetermined number of medals are paid out upon winning.

<Types of internally elected roles>
Next, a part of the internal winning combination (condition device) of the slot machine 100 will be explained using FIG. 83. FIG. 83 is a table showing the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content of the common bell and the push order combination among the internal winning combinations. The push order combination refers to an internal winning combination in which the winning combination (display format of the reels 110 to 112) differs depending on the content of the stop operation (in this example, the order of operations from the first stop operation to the third stop operation). .

In this example, (1) the stop operation of the left center right (stop operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112) is performed by the LCR operation. , (2) LRC operation for the stop operation of left and right middle (stopping operation in which the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the second stop reel is the right reel 112, and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111), (3) middle left and right (Stopping operation in which the first stop reel is the middle reel 111, the second stop reel is the left reel 110, and the third stop reel is the right reel 112) is performed by CLR operation, CRL operation for the stop operation of the middle reel 111, the second stop reel as the right reel 112, and the third stop reel as the left reel 110), (5) the right and left middle reel (the first stop reel as the right reel 112, and the RLC operation for the stop operation (stopping operation in which the stop reel is the left reel 110 and the third stop reel is the middle reel 111), (6) the right center left (the first stop reel is the right reel 112, the second stop reel is the middle reel) 111, a stop operation in which the third stop reel is the left reel 110) is sometimes referred to as an RCL operation.

The winning combination in the game is one of the combinations corresponding to this internal winning combination. These internal winning combinations are determined by a lottery (internal winning combination lottery) at the time of the game start operation. Here, to outline the winning probability of each internal winning combination, the probability of winning for each internal winning combination is determined by obtaining numerical data that falls within the range of lottery data associated with each internal winning combination during the internal lottery described later. It is calculated by dividing the value by the numerical data in the range of random numbers (65536 in this example). The lottery data is divided in advance into several numerical ranges, and each numerical range is associated with each internal winning combination and loss. In the winning combination internal lottery process to be described later, it is determined whether the random number value obtained as a result of executing the internal lottery is a value corresponding to the lottery data corresponding to any internal winning combination, and the internal winning combination is determined. In reality, this lottery data has settings 1 to 6 with different winning probabilities for at least one internal winning combination, and game parlor staff can arbitrarily select and set any of the settings. I can do it.

Regarding the setting values, while the winning probability of the internal winning combination is the same for each setting value, the winning probability of AT (ease of transition to AT), which will be described later, is different for settings 1 to 6. For example, in setting 1, the AT lottery probability when a certain internal winning combination is determined is set to probability A, while in setting 6, the AT lottery probability when a certain internal winning combination is determined is set to probability A. It is also possible to set the probability B to be higher than that.

For example, if push order bell _CLR1 or push order bell_CLR2 is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery, and (1) LCR operation or LRC operation is performed, it will be a loss or a 1-card winning prize. If 0 or 1 medal is paid out and (2) CLR operation is performed, the bell will be won and 9 medals will be paid out, and (3) if CRL operation is performed. If you win a 1-coin winning combination and 1 medal is paid out, and (4) RLC operation or RCL operation is performed, it will be a loss or a 1-coin winning combination, and 0 or 1 medal will be paid out. is paid out. In other words, the push order bell_CLR1 or the push order bell_CLR2 is awarded a bell when the CLR operation is performed, and the maximum number of medals is paid out. Hereinafter, when the push order combination is internally elected, the operation content when the maximum number of medals is paid out may be referred to as "correct operation". In this example, the correct operation means that the order of operations from the first stop operation to the third stop operation is correct.

Similarly, for push order bell_CRL1 or push order bell_CRL2, the CRL operation is the correct operation, and in the case of the CRL operation, the bell is won and nine medals are paid out. In addition, the push order bell_RLC1 or push order bell_RLC2 is an operation in which the RLC operation is the correct answer, and in the case of the RLC operation, the bell is won, 9 medals are paid out, and the push order bell_RCL1 or push order bell_RCL2 , the RCL operation is the correct operation, and in the case of the RCL operation, the bell is won and nine medals are paid out.

On the other hand, for example, if the common bell is internally won in the winning combination internal lottery, the bell will be won and nine medals will be paid out regardless of the operation details. Hereinafter, the above-mentioned push order bell_CLR1, push order bell_CLR2, push order bell_CRL1, push order bell_CRL2, push order bell_RLC1, push order bell_RLC2, push order bell_RCL1, and push order bell_RCL2 will be collectively referred to as "Push order bell_RCL2". It's called "Bell." Of these "push order bells", push order bell_CLR1, push order bell_CLR2, push order bell_CRL1, and push order bell_CRL2 are called "middle first bell" for convenience of explanation, and push order bell_RLC1, push order bell_RLC1, push order bell_CRL2 Bell_RLC2, push order bell_RCL1, and push order bell_RCL2 are sometimes referred to as "first right bell." In addition, the number of common bells to be paid out is 9 pieces, which is the same number as the pressed order bells, but it is not limited to this, and the number may be smaller than the pressed order bells, and by reducing the number of common bells, the normal state medal payout can be suppressed.

In this example, there is no press order bell for which the correct answer is LCR operation or LRC operation (forward press or forward pinch), and CLR operation or CRL operation (middle press) and RLC operation or RCL operation (reverse push or reverse pinch) is not present. The specification is such that there is a bell in the order of pressing that indicates the correct answer.

Note that when the internal winning combination (condition device) is one-card combinations 1 to 6 and replays 1 to 7, the display mode and the number of coins to be paid out for each operation content are as shown in FIG. Note that internally elected roles are not limited to these, and include rare roles such as watermelon and cherry.

<Type of gaming state>
Next, the types and transitions of gaming states of the slot machine 100 will be explained. FIG. 84 is a transition diagram of the gaming state (specifically, the AT-based gaming state) of the main control unit 300 of the slot machine 100. The AT system game state is a game state related to the performance. Note that the lottery data used in the winning combination internal lottery process described above is set for each RT-type gaming state (not shown).

The gaming state of the slot machine 100 is roughly divided into a normal mode and an AT mode. The normal mode is a state in which the operation navigation is not executed, and the AT mode is a state in which the operation navigation may be executed. Here, the operation navigation is a notification effect that notifies the stop operation mode (information regarding the content of the stop operation), and it is said that performing the stop operation according to the notification contents of the operation navigation will bring an advantageous result to the player. It has become. The operation navigation can be roughly divided into (1) a push order navigation that notifies information including the operation order (press order) of stop operations, and (2) information that includes operation timing (for example, stop target symbols, etc.). There is a pattern navigation to inform you. In other words, the push order navigation is an operation navigation that does not include the press timing, and the symbol navigation is an operation navigation that includes the press timing. In this example, for example, in the AT mode, if the push order bell is internally selected, the correct operation details (operation order) may be notified.

The normal mode includes a normal stage and a challenge zone 1 (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ1). The AT mode includes a challenge zone 2 (hereinafter abbreviated as CZ2), an additional zone, an AT normal state, and an ending state.

In addition to the above-mentioned six gaming states, the concept of an advantageous section and a non-advantageous section is provided. The advantageous section consists of most of the period of the normal stage, most of the period of CZ1 and CZ2, the additional zone, the AT normal state, and the ending state, and the non-advantageous section consists of the period of the normal stage. It consists of a part of the period of CZ2 and a part of the period of CZ2. The advantageous period in this example is a period in which an upper limit number of games is set, and a period in which an upper limit differential number of coins is set. Specifically, the upper limit number of games is 3,000 games, and the upper limit difference in number of coins is 2,400 coins. Here, the difference in number of medals is the cumulative value of the difference between the number of medals inserted and the number of medals paid out in one game (number of medals paid out - number of medals put in). The upper limit number of games (upper limit number of games) and upper limit difference number of coins in an advantageous section are values that determine the end of the advantageous section, and the number of games is updated by one game, and the difference number of coins is updated by the result of one game. .

In addition, in this example, there is an additional zone, an AT normal state in which it is not possible to specify that the maximum difference number of sheets can be reached or a number close to the maximum difference number, and an ending state in which it can be specified that it is possible to reach the maximum difference number of sheets or a number close to the maximum difference number. and may be collectively referred to as the "AT state". Further, in contrast to this AT state, states other than the AT state, that is, the normal stage, CZ1, and CZ2 may be collectively referred to as the "normal state."

Generally, in order to realize a gameplay that increases the payout of medals in a state advantageous to the player such as an AT state, it is necessary to suppress the payout of medals in the normal state. Furthermore, regarding the stopping operation of the game machine, it is often recommended for the player to perform a stopping operation (pushing forward or pinching forward) in which the first stopping operation is on the left. Therefore, when providing push order combinations, in this example, as a method to realize the gameplay that suppresses the medal payout in the normal state, the push order bell (the push order with the first stop operation left as the correct answer) as shown in FIG. There is no bell, but there is a bell in the order of pressing during the first stop operation or with right as the correct answer). Although the winning probability of each conditional device is not shown in FIG. 83, in this example, the internal winning probability of the common bell is set lower than the internal winning probability of the pressed order bells. For example, let the internal winning probability of the common bell be probability X, the internal winning probability of the middle first bell be probability Y (the winning probability of each middle first bell is Y/4), and the internal winning probability of the right first bell. When is probability Z (the winning probability of each first bell on the right is Z/4), probability X is lower than probability Y + Z, which is the sum of probability Y and probability Z (probability X < probability Y + Z). Note that the internal winning probability is not limited to this, and may be probability X<probability Y, probability X<probability Z, or probability X=probability Y=probability Z.

In this example, there is no push order bell for which the correct answer is the first stop operation left, but it may be provided separately. In this case, the internal winning probability of the push order bell whose correct answer is the first stop operation left is the internal winning probability of the push order bell whose correct answer is during the first stop operation, and the internal winning probability of the press order bell whose correct answer is the first stop operation left. It is sufficient to set it lower than the sum of the internal winning probabilities of the first bell.

The details will be described later, but in this example, in the normal state, it is recommended to perform a stop operation (push in order or sandwich in order) with the first stop operation on the left, and in a game where the push order bell in the normal state is internally won, If a stop operation other than the first stop operation left (specifically, during the first stop operation, the first stop operation right) is performed, a penalty is given. Here, the penalty is specifically a penalty related to the transition from the normal state to the AT state, and in this example, an AT lottery is held to determine whether to transition from the normal state to the AT state in the game. There is a penalty for not being able to do so. Of course, the content of the penalty is not limited to this, and any penalty related to transition from the normal state to the AT state may be used. For example, if a gameplay feature is adopted in which the number of games in the normal state after the end of the AT state reaches a predetermined threshold (hereinafter referred to as the number of ceiling games), the state shifts to the AT state, A penalty may be adopted in which the game is not counted as a game. In addition, when AT performs a stock lottery according to an internal winning combination during a predetermined omen (so-called main omen), there are cases in which the stock lottery is not performed, or when an internal winning combination is drawn during the main omen. There may also be a penalty in which preferential treatment is suppressed or not carried out, such as not holding a lottery to upgrade an AT when a lottery is held to upgrade the AT to move to a better AT in accordance with the situation.

FIG. 84 shows the six gaming states described above, and the transition conditions for these are written on the arrows. When the transition condition corresponding to each arrow is established, the gaming state transitions in the direction of the arrow.

The normal stage is the initial state after the settings have been changed. When condition A is satisfied in the normal stage (more specifically, after winning a winning combination other than losing in the normal stage of the non-advantageous section which is the initial state and moving to the advantageous section, in the normal stage of the advantageous section, a rare combination is won. (If you win the CZ transfer lottery based on the above), you will transfer to CZ1. CZ1 is in a gaming state for a finite period in which the number of games is fixed. If condition C is satisfied in CZ1 (in detail, if you win the CZ2 lottery to decide whether to transfer to CZ2 in CZ1), if you transfer to CZ2 and condition B is satisfied in CZ1 (in detail, if you win in CZ1) (If you do not win the CZ2 lottery), you will move to the normal stage.

CZ2 is in a gaming state for a finite period in which the number of games is fixed. If condition D is satisfied in CZ2 (more specifically, if you win the AT lottery that determines whether or not to transition to AT state in CZ2), you will move to the additional zone, and if condition E is satisfied in CZ2 (more specifically, , if the player does not win the AT lottery in CZ2), the player moves to the normal stage.

The add-on zone is a state in which an add-on lottery is executed to add on the number of games played (number of games) in the AT state. That is, in the AT state, it is possible to play games equal to the number of games in which the number of AT games awarded in this addition zone is added to the initial number of AT games awarded immediately after winning the AT lottery. The add-on zone is a gaming state for a finite period in which the number of games is fixed. When condition F is satisfied in the add-on zone (more specifically, when the add-on zone ends after playing the number of games), the AT normal state is entered. Note that the number of AT games may not be given immediately after winning the AT lottery, but the initial number of AT games may be determined in the additional zone.

If condition I is satisfied in the AT normal state (more specifically, when all the assigned AT state games have been played), the transition will proceed to CZ2, and if condition G is satisfied in the AT normal state (more specifically, if the number of games in the AT state that has been given has been played) (If you win the additional zone transition lottery that determines whether or not to move to the additional zone), you will move to the additional zone. The additional zone transfer lottery is a lottery based on the winning combination of the winning combination internal lottery.

Further, when condition H is satisfied in the AT normal state (more specifically, when the ending transition condition is satisfied), the AT normal state is transitioned to the ending state. Here, the cases where the ending transition condition is satisfied are (1) when the remaining number of games in the advantageous section is less than the specified number of games (for example, 300 games), (2) when the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section is the specified difference (3) When the number of additional games when transitioning from the additional zone to the AT normal state is equal to or greater than the specified number of games (for example, 2,500 games).

The ending state is the final state of the AT state (advantageous section). When condition J is satisfied in the ending state (more specifically, when the advantageous section end condition is satisfied), the process moves to CZ2. When the conditions for ending the advantageous section are met, (1) the number of games in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of 3000 games, (2) the difference in the number of sheets in the advantageous section reaches the upper limit of 2400 sheets. (Note that since the upper limit of the differential number of sheets is 2400 sheets, it is also possible for the advantageous section to end when the number of sheets exceeds 2400 sheets, taking into account the negative amount until the AT mode is reached.) When the ending state ends and the transition is made to CZ2, the transition is made from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section. That is, the CZ2 state after the ending state is a non-advantageous section CZ2 state, but in this example, it is configured to shift to an advantageous section immediately (for example, after playing several games). For example, although it is CZ2 in presentation, internally it may be a non-advantageous section. Further, when shifting to CZ2, it may be possible to specify whether it is a non-advantageous section or an advantageous section in terms of presentation. For example, in the non-advantageous section after condition J is satisfied, a screen such as "CZ2 in preparation" may be displayed, and the CZ2 effect may be executed after the transition to the advantageous section is determined. In this way, by resetting the advantageous section at the timing of transition to CZ2, it becomes possible to transfer to the AT state again, and it is possible to improve gaming enjoyment at a gaming machine equipped with an advantageous section. .

In addition, in this example, when condition I is satisfied in the AT normal state and the transition to CZ2 is made, it remains in the advantageous section. However, even in this case, there may be a transition from an advantageous section to a non-advantageous section. Further, even if the performance is CZ2, if it is internally a non-advantageous section, condition D will not be satisfied, but if it is CZ2 and an advantageous section, condition D can be satisfied.

In this example, when the AT state (AT normal state, ending state) ends, the game moves to CZ2, and when the AT lottery is won in CZ2, the game moves to the AT state again. In other words, it has the ability to repeat the AT state via CZ2. In this example, the AT state when transitioning to the AT state via the normal mode (normal stage, CZ1) is referred to as the AT state of the first hit (first time, first set). In addition, the case where the AT state is transitioned to the AT state again via CZ2 that has transitioned from the AT state is called a consecutive attack, and such an AT state is the Nth consecutive (Nth time, Nth set; N is an integer greater than or equal to 2). This is called the AT state.
<Reel stop control>
Next, the stop control of the reels 110 to 112 will be outlined. The reel stop control is performed by selecting one of the predetermined types of reel stop control data based on predetermined conditions (for example, the result of the internal winning processing of the winning combination described above), and stopping the selected reel. Performed based on control data.

In this example, so-called pull-in control (frame slipping control) is performed. Pull-in control is to shift the stop position of the reels 110-112 within a certain number of frames (number of symbols) (pull-in range; here, maximum 4 frames) after the player operates each of the stop buttons 137-139. Control. The reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300. Each reel stop data includes a permission control that allows symbol combinations of a predetermined winning combination to be displayed on the winning line 114, and a prohibition that prevents symbol combinations of any winning combination from being displayed on the winning line 114. It is broadly divided into control and control.

Examples of permissible control include when a certain winning combination is internally won, or when BB is internally won (flag carried over), and the timing at which the player operates each of the stop buttons 137 to 139 is determined. At worst, control is performed so that the symbol combinations of winning combinations are displayed within the range of the above-mentioned number of frames. However, since it is only "allowed", the symbol combinations may not be aligned depending on the timing of operating each of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

For example, when a watermelon is won internally, the watermelon symbols are arranged over four frames, so unless the timing of operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 is appropriate, the watermelon symbols will not stop on the winning line 114.

Note that the above-mentioned pull-in control is a stop control that is executed in the reel stop control process (step S108 in FIG. 85 described later) of a normal game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as the main game), and is a In games, the control is not limited to this pull-in control. That is, in the pseudo game, the above-mentioned pull-in control may or may not be performed. For example, a predetermined symbol may be stopped beyond the pull-in range, or may be stopped with reel action. To explain the gameplay of the pseudo game, the pseudo game is a game that is executed before the reel rotation of the main game starts when a predetermined condition is satisfied (hereinafter also referred to as the case when the pseudo game execution condition is satisfied). In the pseudo game, all the reels 110 to 112 start rotating by operating the start lever, and each of the corresponding reels 110 to 112 stops by operating the stop lever. Depending on the manner in which the reels 110 to 112 are stopped in the pseudo game, it may be possible to improve the player's sense of anticipation prior to the actual game.

<Operation of slot machine>
Next, the processing of the main control section 300, the first sub-control section 400, and the second sub-control section 500 will be explained using the drawings.

<Main control unit main processing>
First, the main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. 85. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing by the main control section.

When the slot machine 100 is powered on, first, in step S101, various initial setting processes are performed. In this initial setting, the stack initial value is set to the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304, interrupts are disabled, the I/O 310 is initialized, various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is enabled and initialized. Configure values, etc.

In step S102, a medal insertion/start operation reception process is executed. Here, it is determined by detection by the sensor circuit 320 whether there is an electronic medal insertion operation using the bet buttons 130 to 132 or a direct medal insertion operation from the medal insertion slot 141. turns on the winning line display lamp 120 according to the number of medals inserted. Also, preparations are made to transmit a medal insertion command indicating that medals have been inserted to the first sub-control unit 400. Note that if the player wins a replay combination in the previous game, the process of inserting the same number of medals as the number of medals inserted in the previous game is performed, so there is no need for the player to insert medals.

In addition, a check is made based on the detection of the sensor circuit 320 to determine whether or not the start lever 135 has been operated while a specified number (3) of medals have been used, and if it is determined that the start lever 135 has been operated, The number of medals and the valid winning line are determined, and the game is started. Further, preparations are made to transmit a start lever acceptance command indicating that the start lever 135 has been operated to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S103, an internal lottery process for winning combinations is performed. In the internal lottery process for winning combinations, the winning combination lottery table stored in the ROM 306 is read out according to the current gaming state (RT system gaming state), and this and the random number value obtained from the random number generation circuit 316 are used. An internal lottery (lottery for winning roles) will be held to determine internal winning roles. As a result of the internal lottery, if any of the internal winning combinations is internally won, the condition device (flag) for the internal winning combination is activated (the flag for the internal winning combination is turned ON). Further, in this step S105, preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating the result of the winning internal lottery to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, if a watermelon is internally won, preparations are made to send an internal winning command indicating that a watermelon has been internally won to the first sub-control unit 400, and the result of the internal lottery for the winning combination is a loss (the winning combination is not the winning combination). (non-winning), preparations are made to transmit an internal winning command indicating a loss to the first sub-control unit 400.

It should be noted that the internal winning command includes information on the internal winning combination as well as information that allows identification of the AT lottery results and the like. Of the above information, in the AT state, the internal winning command that includes the internal winning of the push order bell also includes operation instruction information that indicates the operating order (pressing order) of the stop buttons 137 to 139.

In step S104, it is determined whether the pseudo game flag is set on. If the pseudo game flag is on, the process proceeds to step S105; otherwise, the process proceeds to step S106. The pseudo game flag is a flag indicating whether or not to execute a pseudo game, and when the pseudo game flag is on, it means that the above pseudo game execution conditions are met, and the pseudo game is executed in the game. do.

In step S105, pseudo game related processing (described in detail later) is executed.

In step S106, reel stop data is selected based on the results of the winning combination internal lottery in step S105. This reel stop data is stored in the ROM 306 of the main control section 300.

In step S107, reel rotation start processing is executed to start rotation of all reels 110 to 112 based on the start operation. Details of the reel rotation start processing will be described later using FIG. 91.

In step S108, reel stop control processing is performed. In the reel stop control process, stop buttons 137 to 139 can be accepted, and when any stop button is pressed, the stop data of the reel stop data is sent to stop the reel corresponding to the pressed stop button. Referring to this, any one of the reels 110 to 112 is stopped according to the number of drawn frames set in the stop data. If all the reels 110 to 112 have stopped, the process advances to step S109. In addition, in this step S108, for each stop operation, a stop button reception command related to the stop button 137 to 139 that has been stopped (in detail, for the first stop operation, a stop button reception 1 command, a second stop operation (for the stop button reception 2 command, for the third stop operation, the stop button reception 3 command) is prepared to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400, and for the stop of each reel, the reel Reel stop command regarding the stop position (in detail, for the first stop reel, reel stop 1 command, for the second stop operation, reel stop 2 command, for the third stop operation, reel stop command) 3 command) to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S109, winning determination processing is performed. In the winning determination process, a winning determination is made for the symbols that stopped when the stop buttons 137 to 139 were pressed, and if a symbol combination corresponding to any winning combination is displayed on the activated winning line 114, the winning combination is determined. It is determined that the role has been won. For example, if a symbol combination corresponding to a watermelon is aligned on the activated winning line, it is determined that a watermelon has been won. Further, in this step S109, preparations are made to transmit a display determination command indicating the result of winning determination to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S110, medal payout processing is performed. In the medal payout process, if a winning combination has been won, the number of medals corresponding to the winning combination will be paid out. Further, in step S110, preparations are made to transmit a medal payout command indicating the number of medals to be paid out to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S111, a game state control process is performed. In this gaming state control process, control for shifting the gaming state (RT-based gaming state, AT-based gaming state) is performed. Further, in this step S111, preparations are made to transmit a gaming status command indicating the gaming status to the first sub-control unit 400.

With the above, one game ends. Thereafter, the game progresses by returning to step S102 and repeating the above-described process. The various commands prepared in each of the above steps are transmitted in the command setting transmission process (step S206 in FIG. 92) of the main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later.

<Pseudo game related processing>
Next, pseudo game related processing will be explained using FIG. 86. FIG. 86 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pseudo game related processing in step S105 of FIG. In addition, a pseudo game is a type of reel performance in which the rotating reels appear to have stopped as a performance (also referred to as pseudo stop), and are caused to rotate by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139. It refers to the fact that the reels can be pseudo-stopped, or the situation where the reels can be pseudo-stopped. Furthermore, in such a pseudo-game, no gaming value is awarded in accordance with the pseudo-stop mode. Furthermore, a pseudo operation for restarting a reel that has been pseudo-stopped is also referred to as a pseudo-start operation. In order to distinguish it from such pseudo-games, a game in which the rotating reels are stopped by operating the stop buttons 137 to 139 and a gaming value can be given according to the stopping mode is called the main game. Also called.

In step S1001, reel stop data for the pseudo game is selected. For example, reel stop data that pseudo-stops when predetermined symbols line up on the winning line L1 may be selected. It should be noted that reel stop data that stops any symbol combination can be used as long as the symbol combination is different from the combination that is established in this game. Further, a plurality of types of such reel stop data may be prepared and selected from the plurality of types.

In step S1002, a pseudo game reel rotation start process (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1003, a pseudo game reel stop control process (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1004, a pseudo next game start process (details will be described later) is executed.

In step S1005, the random delay flag is set on. The random delay flag is a flag that indicates whether or not to perform a random delay. When the random delay flag is on, the reel rotation start processing with a random delay is performed, and when the random delay flag is off, the reel rotation starts as usual. Performs reel rotation start processing.

In step S1006, the pseudo game flag is set to OFF.

<Pseudo game reel rotation start process>
Next, the reel rotation start process of the pseudo game will be explained using FIG. 87. FIG. 87 is a flowchart showing in detail the process of starting the reel rotation of the pseudo game in step S1002 of FIG.

In step S1101, acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1102, preparations are made to send a pseudo game start command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1103, the rotation start of the pseudo game is set. Specifically, the reels 110 to 112 are started to rotate using the acceleration parameters set in step S1101.

In step S1104, it is determined whether the rotational speeds of the reels 110 to 112 are constant. If the rotational speed of the reels 110 to 112 is constant, the process advances to step S1105, and if not, step S1104 is repeated.

In step S1105, the operations of stop buttons 137 to 139 are enabled. Validation here means validation of a stop operation in a pseudo game, and means that the player can perform a pseudo stop.

<Pseudo game reel stop control process>
Next, the reel stop control process of the pseudo game will be explained using FIG. 88. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in step S1003 of FIG.

In step S1201, a pseudo game regulation timer is set. The pseudo game regulation timer is a timer that measures the time of one pseudo game. In this example, a pseudo game regulation timer is used to limit the execution time of one pseudo game to a predetermined time TA (specifically, about 50 seconds). In step S1201, a timer value corresponding to the predetermined time TA is set as an initial value in the pseudo game regulation timer. This timer value is decremented each time the main control unit 300 executes the timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 in FIG. 92).

In step S1202, it is determined whether the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated. If the stop buttons 137 to 139 have been operated, the process advances to step S1203; otherwise, the process advances to step S1206.

In step S1203, the reels 110 to 112 corresponding to the stop buttons 137 to 139 that have been operated to stop are pseudo-stopped.

In step S1204, preparations are made to transmit a sub-command to the first sub-control unit 400 indicating that an operation on the stop button has been accepted.

In step S1205, it is determined whether all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped. If all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped, the process advances to step S1208; otherwise, the process returns to step S1202.

On the other hand, in step S1206, it is determined whether the pseudo game regulation timer has timed out, that is, whether a predetermined time TA corresponding to the set timer value has elapsed. If the pseudo game regulation timer times out, the process advances to step S1207; otherwise, the process returns to step S1202.

In step S1207, since the predetermined time TA has elapsed without any of the stop buttons 137 to 139 being operated, all the reels 110 to 112 are pseudo-stopped. As described above, in order to promote the progress of the pseudo game, the pseudo game of this example has a function of automatically pseudo stopping the reels 110 to 112 when there is no stop operation.

In step S1208, preparations are made to send a sub-command for pseudo game winning determination to be sent to the first sub-control unit 400. For example, when a mode corresponding to some combination in a pseudo game is pseudo-stopped, a command corresponding to the pseudo-stopped mode is transmitted. As a result, the first sub-control unit 400 can perform control according to sub-commands for pseudo-game winning determination, and for example, when a symbol corresponding to a replay or a bell is pseudo-stopped, a corresponding effect can be executed. .

In addition, such processing is necessary when a stop operation at an appropriate timing is required in a pseudo game, and the first sub-control determines what kind of pattern the pseudo-stopped symbols are in. By notifying the section 400, it is possible to perform an effect according to the pseudo-stopped symbol, and this makes the effect more consistent than a configuration in which the effect is executed as if the pattern had been pseudo-stopped even though the pseudo-stop had not occurred. It is possible to provide a game with the same feeling as the main game.

In step S1209, a pseudo game end timer is set. The pseudo-game end timer is a timer that measures the time interval between the pseudo-game and the main game, and is a timer that measures the time interval between the pseudo-game and the main game, and executes a predetermined effect (for example, an effect indicating that the pseudo-game has ended, an effect indicating that the main game has started, etc.). It is provided to ensure time for execution. In this example, the time interval between the pseudo game and the main game is set to a predetermined time TC (specifically, about 1 second), so in step S1209, a timer corresponding to the predetermined time TC is set as an initial value in the pseudo game end timer. The value is set. This timer value is decremented each time the main control unit 300 executes the timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 in FIG. 92). Further, in step S1209, preparations are made to transmit a pseudo game end command indicating that the pseudo game has ended to the first sub-control unit 400.

<Pseudo next game start process>
Next, the pseudo next game start process will be explained using FIG. 89. FIG. 89 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the pseudo next game start process in step S1004 of FIG.

In this example, after the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in FIG. 88, the process of inserting medals and accepting the start operation in step S102 is performed in a pseudo manner without immediately proceeding to the main game. This allows the player to experience a pseudo game that is closer to the real game. Therefore, in a broad sense, the pseudo game of this example includes the start of this pseudo next game.

In step S1301, preparations are made for transmitting to the first sub-control unit 400 a pseudo next game start command indicating that a pseudo next game start process has been started.

In step S1302, an MB timer is set. The MB timer is a timer that measures the time during which a pseudo bet operation can be accepted, and for example, a timer value corresponding to 20 seconds is set as an initial value. This timer value is decremented each time the main control unit 300 executes the timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 in FIG. 92). In this example, the MB timer is used to limit the reception time for one pseudo bet operation so that the game can proceed smoothly.

In step S1303, it is determined whether the MAX bet button 132 has been operated by the player. If an operation is detected, the process advances to step S1305; if no operation is detected, the process advances to step S1304.

In step S1304, it is determined whether the MB timer has timed out. If the time has not expired, the process returns to step S1303; if the time has expired, the process proceeds to step S1305.

In step S1305, preparations are made for transmitting a pseudo bet acceptance command indicating that a pseudo bet operation has been accepted to the first sub-control unit 400. Even when the MB timer runs out, a pseudo bet acceptance command can be sent to allow the first sub-control unit 400 to proceed with the effect processing.

From step S1306 onwards, processing related to the pseudo start operation of the start lever 135 is executed. In step S1306, preparations are made for transmitting to the first sub-control unit 400 a pseudo lever acceptance wait start command indicating that the pseudo start operation wait has started.

In step S1307, an SR timer is set. The SR timer is a timer that measures the time during which a pseudo start operation can be accepted, and is set to a timer value corresponding to 20 seconds as an initial value, for example. This timer value is decremented each time the main control unit 300 executes the timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 in FIG. 92). In this example, the SR timer is used to limit the operation reception time for one pseudo start operation so that the game can proceed smoothly.

In step S1308, it is determined whether the start lever 135 has been operated by the player. If an operation is detected, the process ends. If no operation is detected, the process advances to step S1309, and it is determined whether or not the SR timer has timed out. If the time has not expired, the process returns to step S1308, and if the time has expired, the process ends.

<Reel rotation processing>
Next, the reel rotation start process will be described using FIG. 90. FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the reel rotation start process in step S107 of FIG. 85.

In step S1401, a wait timer of 4.1 seconds is set. This timer is a timer for keeping the interval between games at least 4.1 seconds, and regardless of whether or not a pseudo game is executed, the game interval is limited to at least 4.1 seconds. The sense of game progression can be combined with that of the main game only.

In step S1402, acceleration parameters for each reel are set.

In step S1403, preparations are made to send the main game start command to the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S1404, 7-segment setting processing is executed. In this process, display settings regarding the operation navigation are performed.

In step S1405, it is determined whether the random delay flag is set to on. If the random delay flag is set on, the process advances to step S1407; otherwise, the process advances to step S1406.

In step S1406, rotation of the reels 110 to 112 is started using the acceleration parameters set in step S1402. On the other hand, in step S1407, random delayed rotation start processing (described in detail later) is executed.

In step S1408, it is determined whether the rotation speeds of the reels 110 to 112 are constant. If the rotational speed of the reels 110 to 112 is constant, the process advances to step S1409, and if not, step S1408 is repeated.

In step S1409, the operations of the stop buttons 137 to 139 are enabled.

<Random delayed rotation start process>
Next, the random delayed rotation start process will be explained using FIG. 91. FIG. 91 is a flowchart showing in detail the flow of the random delayed rotation start process in step S1407 of FIG.

In step S1501, it is determined whether a predetermined time TC has elapsed by measuring the pseudo game end timer. If the predetermined time TC has elapsed as determined by the pseudo game end timer, the process advances to step S1502, and if not, step S1501 is repeated.

In step S1502, the left reel 110 starts rotating, and in step S1503, it is determined whether the left reel 110 has finished accelerating. If the left reel 110 has finished accelerating, the process advances to step S1504; otherwise, step S1503 is repeated.

In step S1504, a rotation start timer for the middle reel 111 is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 is decremented every time the main control unit timer interrupt process (timer update process of step S205 in FIG. 92) is executed.

In step S1505, it is determined whether the rotation start timer of the middle reel 111 has timed out, that is, whether the waiting time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer for the middle reel 111 times out, the process advances to step S1506, and if not, step S1505 is repeated.

In step S1506, the middle reel 111 starts rotating. Although the middle reel 111 starts rotating in step S1506, the middle reel 111 remains in a pseudo-stop state until it starts rotating.

In step S1507, it is determined whether the acceleration of the middle reel 111 has ended. If the acceleration of the middle reel 111 has ended, the process advances to step S1508; otherwise, step S1507 is repeated.

In step S1508, a rotation start timer for the right reel 112 is set. Specifically, a timer value corresponding to 0 to 756.512 ms is obtained by lottery, and this value is set. The value of the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 is decremented each time the main control unit timer interrupt process (timer update process in step S205 in FIG. 92) is executed.

In step S1509, it is determined whether the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 has timed out, that is, whether a waiting time corresponding to the initially set timer value has elapsed. If the rotation start timer of the right reel 112 has timed out, the process advances to step S1510; otherwise, step S1509 is repeated.

In step S1510, the right reel 112 starts rotating. Although the right reel 112 starts rotating in step S1510, the right reel 112 is in a pseudo-stop state until it starts rotating.

In step S1511, the random delay flag is set to off.

<Main control unit timer interrupt processing>
Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described using FIG. Note that this figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main control section timer interrupt processing.

The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined period (approximately once every 2 ms in this example). starts at a predetermined period.

In step S201, timer interrupt start processing is performed. In this timer interrupt start processing, processing for temporarily saving the values of each register of the CPU 304 in the stack area is performed.

In step S202, the WDT 314 is periodically activated (in this example, so that the count value of the WDT 314 does not exceed the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and a WDT interrupt occurs (in order to avoid detecting a processing abnormality). Then, the restart is performed (once every 2 ms, which is the cycle of the main control section timer interrupt).

In step S203, input port status update processing is performed. In this input port status update process, the detection signals of the sensor circuits 320 of the various sensors 318 are input through the input ports of the I/O 310, the presence or absence of the detection signals is monitored, and the RAM 308 is partitioned for each type of sensor 318. The signal state is stored in the provided signal state storage area.

In step S204, various game processes are executed, and processes according to the interrupt status are executed.

In step S205, timer update processing is performed. More specifically, various timers are updated in respective time units.

In step S206, a command setting transmission process is performed, and various commands that have been prepared for transmission are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. In the first sub-control unit 400, depending on the command type included in the received output schedule information, it becomes possible to determine performance control according to changes in game control in the main control unit 300, and also to determine the performance control according to the change in game control in the main control unit 300. Based on the information of the command data, it becomes possible to determine the content of production control.

In step S207, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is outputted to the information input circuit 652 separate from the slot machine 100 via the information output circuit 334.

In step S208, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, first, in step S203, the signal states of the various sensors 318 stored in the signal state storage area are read out, and the presence or absence of errors related to medal insertion abnormalities, medal payout abnormalities, etc. is monitored, and if an error is detected, (Illustration omitted) Executes error handling. Furthermore, settings are made for the medal selector 170 (a medal blocker operated by a solenoid provided in the medal selector 170), various lamps 339, and various 7-segment (SEG) indicators according to the current gaming state.

In step S209, it is monitored whether the low voltage signal is on. Then, if the low voltage signal is on (when power cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S211, and if the low voltage signal is off (when power cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S210.

In step S210, various processes for terminating the timer interrupt termination process are performed. In this timer interrupt termination process, the values of each register temporarily saved in step S201 are set to the original registers. Thereafter, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

On the other hand, in step S211, specific variables and stack pointers for returning to the state at power outage upon power restoration are saved to a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as recovery data, and power outage processing such as initialization of input/output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main control section main processing shown in FIG.

<Processing of the first sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 93. Note that FIG. 93(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 93(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 93(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the first sub-control unit 400.

First, the main processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 93(a).

When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S301. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 408, etc. are performed. Through this process, an area for storing internal winning information, which is information representing the result of internal winning, and an area for storing RT update information, which is information representing the gaming state, are provided in the RAM 408, respectively.

In step S302, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S303.

In step S303, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S304, command processing, which is processing corresponding to each command received from the main control unit 300, is executed.

In step S305, production control processing is performed. Here, preparations for the performance are made in accordance with the performance reservation information in the performance reservation area provided in the RAM 408. This preparation includes, for example, performing processing such as reading the effect data from the ROM 406, and performing an update process of the effect data if it is necessary to update the effect data.

In step S306, sound control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to the sound source IC 418 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the sound source IC 418.

In step S307, lamp control processing is performed based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command for the various lamps 420 in the performance data read in step S305, this command is output to the drive circuit 422.

In step S309, information output processing is performed to perform settings for transmitting a command to the second sub-control unit 500 based on the processing result of step S305. For example, if there is a command to be sent to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read out in step S305, settings are made to output this control command, and the process returns to step S302.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the first sub-control unit 400 will be explained using FIG. 93(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal output from the main control unit 300. In step S401 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the main control unit 300 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408.

Next, the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. 93(c). The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this example), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing at a predetermined rate. Execute periodically.

In step S501, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S302 in the first sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 93(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S302, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S502, the command is sent to the second sub-control unit 500 set in step S309, and the random value for effect is updated.

<Processing of second sub-control unit>
Next, the processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 94. Note that FIG. 94(a) is a flowchart of the main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 94(b) is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 94(c) is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing by the second sub-control unit 500. FIG. 94(d) is a flowchart of image control processing by the second sub-control unit 500.

First, in step S601 of FIG. 94(a), various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, initialization processing is first performed in step S601. In this initialization process, initialization of input/output ports, initialization of the storage area in the RAM 508, initialization of the storage area in the VRAM 518, etc. are performed.

In step S602, it is determined whether the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process moves to step S603.

In step S603, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

In step S604, command processing is performed. In command processing, the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 determines each command received from the CPU 404 of the first sub-control unit 400 .

In step S605, production control processing is performed. Specifically, if there is a new command in step S604, processing corresponding to this command is performed. For example, a process of reading out effect data for controlling an image related to a background image from the ROM 506 is executed. It also includes performing processes such as reading out performance data other than this from the ROM 506, and performing update processing of the performance data when it is necessary to update the performance data.

In step S606, image control processing (described in detail later) is performed based on the processing result of step S605. For example, if there is an image control command in the effect data read in step S605, image control corresponding to this command is performed. For example, image control regarding display images (notification images, background images) is performed. When this image control process ends, the process returns to step S602.

Next, the command reception interrupt processing of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 94(b). This command reception interrupt process is a process that is executed when the second sub-control unit 500 detects a strobe signal output by the first sub-control unit 400.

In step S701 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output by the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

Next, the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 94(c). The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined period (once every 2 ms in this example), and uses this timer interrupt as a trigger to perform timer interrupt processing in a predetermined manner. Execute periodically.

In step S801, 1 is added to the value in the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S602 in the second sub-control unit main processing shown in FIG. 94(a), and the value is stored in the original timer variable storage area. Therefore, in step S602, it is determined that the value of the timer variable is 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms×10).

In step S802, processing for updating the random number value for effect, etc. is performed.

Next, the image control process of step S606 in the main process of the second sub-control unit 500 will be described using FIG. 94(d). This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of image control processing.

In step S901, an image data transfer instruction is issued. Here, the CPU 504 first swaps the drawing area designations of the display area A and the display area B of the VRAM 536. As a result, one frame of the image stored in the display area that is not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the effect image display device 157. Next, the CPU 504 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of ROM 506), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of VRAM 518), etc. in the attribute register of VDP 516 based on the position information table, and then transfers the image from ROM 506 to VRAM 518. Set the command to start data transfer. The VDP 516 transfers image data from the ROM 506 to the VRAM 518 based on instructions set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 516 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 504.

In step S902, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal is input from the VDP 516. If the transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process advances to step S903; otherwise, the transfer end interrupt signal is input. wait until

In step S903, parameters are set based on the performance scenario configuration table, attribute data, and the like. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 518 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 518 in step S901, the CPU 504 displays information on image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes of the VRAM 518, image size , VRAM coordinates (location coordinates), transparency, etc.) to the VDP 516. The VDP 516 performs parameter settings according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

In step S904, a drawing instruction is given. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 504 instructs the VDP 516 to start drawing an image. The VDP 516 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer according to instructions from the CPU 504.

In step S905, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 516 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If the generation end interrupt signal has been input, the process advances to step S906; otherwise, the generation end interrupt signal is input. Wait for input.

In step S906, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 508 and counts how many scenes of images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

<Simulated game production>
Next, with reference to FIG. 95, the presentation of the pseudo game executed in the top-up zone will be explained. FIG. 95 is a diagram chronologically showing the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 and the effect image displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 in a pseudo game.

FIG. 95(a) shows the display mode and performance of the reels 110 to 112 when peach seven symbols are aligned on a predetermined production line, and FIG. 95(b) shows a peach seven symbol on a predetermined production line. It shows the display mode and performance of the reels 110 to 112 when the symbols do not line up. Here, the predetermined production lines specifically include the upper horizontal production lines of symbol position 1, symbol position 4, symbol position 7, symbol position 2, symbol position 5, and symbol position 8 shown in FIG. 80(a). Middle horizontal production line, symbol position 3, symbol position 6, lower horizontal production line of symbol position 9, symbol position 1, symbol position 5, right-down production line of symbol position 9, symbol position 3, symbol position 5, symbol position Indicates one of the upward-rightward production lines of 7.

In the pseudo game shown in FIG. 95(a), the slot machine 100 first starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start lever operation, and uses the liquid crystal display device 157 to display the message "Aim for the Peach Seven" symbol. 95(a)). Next, the slot machine 100 stops the peach seven symbol on the left reel 110 in the middle position based on the first stop operation on the left reel 110 (see (a2) in FIG. 95(a)), and then Based on the second stopping operation for 111, the peach seven symbol on the middle reel 110 is stopped at the middle position (see (a3) in FIG. 95(a)). That is, in (a2) and (a3), the player succeeds in the eye press operation in the first stop operation and the second stop operation, and is able to stop the peach seven symbol on the production line, and the peach seven symbol is This shows the case where the tile is heard. In this state where the Peach Seven symbol is played, the slot machine 100 then stops the Peach Seven symbol on the right reel 112 at the middle position based on the third stop operation on the right reel 112 (see FIG. 95(a)). (see (a4) in FIG. 95(a)), use the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute an emphasizing effect indicating that the peach seven symbols are aligned on the effect line (see (a5) in FIG. 95(a). For example, the entire screen is A large peach seven pattern is displayed to emphasize that all the peach seven patterns are aligned.) In addition, when the peach seven symbols are aligned on a predetermined performance line, there is a benefit that a predetermined number of additional games (for example, 30 games) will be given.

Specifically, in this example, when the peach seven symbol is placed on a predetermined production line, if the player successfully presses the eye in the third stop operation (the peach seven symbol is stopped within the pull-in range) In addition to the case where the peach seven symbol is placed within the pull-in range, the slot machine 100 will also move the production line where the peach seven symbol is playing ( A reel effect is executed in which special reel control is executed to stop the reel on the playing tile line (hereinafter referred to as the playing tile line). For example, a special reel control may be executed in which the third stop reel is stopped on the playing tile line with a reel action based on the third stop operation, or the third stop reel is rotated at high speed based on the third stop operation. A special reel control may be executed in which the reel is stopped on the playing tile line.

On the other hand, in the pseudo game shown in FIG. 95(b), the slot machine 100 first starts rotating the reels 110 to 112 based on the start lever operation of the pseudo game, and aims at the peach seven symbol using the liquid crystal display device 157. The execution of the "aim effect" indicating this is started (see (b1) in FIG. 95(b)). Next, the slot machine 100 stops the peach seven symbol on the left reel 110 at the middle position based on the first stop operation on the left reel 110 (see (b2) in FIG. 95(b)), and then Based on the second stopping operation for 111, the watermelon 1 symbol on the middle reel 111 is stopped at the middle position (see (b3) in FIG. 95(b)). That is, in (b2) and (b3), the player succeeds in the eye press operation in the first stop operation, but fails in the eye press operation in the second stop operation, causing the peach seven symbol to be heard on the performance line. Indicates a case where it was not possible. In this state where the peach 7 symbol is not played, the slot machine 100 stops the watermelon 1 symbol on the right reel 112 at the middle position based on the third stop operation on the right reel 112 (FIG. 95(b)). (see (b4) in FIG. 95(b)), use the liquid crystal display device 157 to execute a failure effect indicating that the peach seven symbols were not aligned on the effect line (see (b5) in FIG. 95(b). For example, if the entire screen is display a blackened image).

Specifically, in this example, when the peach seven symbol is not played on the predetermined performance line, the above-mentioned special reel control cannot be executed, regardless of the content of the third stop operation by the player. do not have.

In this way, in the pseudo game of this example, the peach seven symbol is produced based on the contents of the first stop operation and the second stop operation, that is, the display mode (roll) of the reels 110 to 112 up to the second stop operation. Decide whether or not to execute the special reel control to align on the line, and if the peach seven symbol is being played, execute the special reel control regardless of the content of the third stop operation to produce the peach seven symbol. While it is aligned on the line, if it is not, special reel control is not executed and the peach seven symbol is controlled so as not to be aligned on the production line, so it is possible to match the roll and production. It is possible to perform a reel performance in which the display mode of the reels 110 to 112 looks good.

FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing the reel stop control process of the pseudo game shown in FIG. 95. FIG. 96 is a flowchart showing in detail step S1203 of the reel stop control process of the pseudo game in FIG. 88, and the process shown in this flowchart is performed every time the pseudo game stop operation is performed. In addition, FIG. 96 shows a case where, when a peach seven symbol is played, a special reel control is executed in which the third stop reel is rotated at 4 times high speed to align the peach seven symbol on any production line. ing.

In step S2001, it is determined whether the reel that has been stopped is a reel that rotates at high speed. As described above, the reel that may rotate at high speed is the third stop reel, so if the reel on which the stop operation was performed is the first stop reel or the second stop reel, the process advances to step S2002, and the stop operation is performed. If the received reel is the third stopped reel, the process advances to step S2006.

In step S2002, it is determined whether the peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113 of the stopped reel. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 82, the peach seven symbol is placed at the second position on each reel 110 to 112, so when the peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113, it means that the peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113. This means that one of the symbols numbered 3 to 3 is stopped and displayed at the middle position on the reel window 113. If the peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113, the process advances to step S2004; otherwise, the process advances to step S2003.

In this example, the symbol number stopped and displayed at the middle position of the reel window 113 is referred to as the reel stop position. Also, in this example, numbers 0 to 19 of each reel correspond to a 1-byte value. For example, symbol number 1 has a 1-byte value of "00000001", and symbol number 3 has a 1-byte value of "00000011". becomes. In addition, in this example, when two peach seven symbols are displayed on the reel window 113 due to the first stop operation and the second stop operation, the reel control in which the peach seven symbols are not played (for example, on the left reel 110, the peach seven symbol is displayed on the reel window 113) Reel control such that the symbols stop at the lower position and the peach seven symbol stops at the upper position on the middle reel 111 is not performed.

In step S2003, 128 is set as the stop position after high-speed rotation. Here, the stop position after high speed rotation means the stop position of the third stop reel (the number of the symbol stopped at the middle position of the reel window 113) when the third stop reel is rotated at high speed. As shown in FIG. 82, the symbol number consists of numbers 0 to 19, so number 128 is the number of a symbol that does not actually exist. In other words, in the first stop operation or the second stop operation, if the peach seven symbol is not displayed on the reel window 113, 128 is set at the stop position after high speed rotation, and it is difficult to see whether it would normally be between 0 and 19. Although it is only necessary to refer to it, by purposely setting a value that greatly exceeds 19, the efficiency of the control process is improved. More specifically, the stop position after high-speed rotation is made up of a 1-byte variable, so by setting the 7th bit to 1 (bit string "10000000"), the stop position after high-speed rotation is set to 128. is set. This results in a process in which high-speed rotation processing is not executed in S2006, which will be described later. Note that the stop position after high-speed rotation is initialized based on the operation of the start lever 135.

In step S2004, it is determined whether the stop position of the reel that has been operated to stop (the number of the symbol that stops at the middle position of the reel window 113) is the stop position after high-speed rotation. Note that the stop position after high-speed rotation is initialized based on the operation on the start lever 135, so the stop position after high-speed rotation in step S2004 in the first stop operation is "00000000". If the stop position of the reel subjected to the stop operation is the stop position after high-speed rotation, the process is terminated, and if the stop position of the reel subjected to the stop operation is not the stop position after high-speed rotation, the process proceeds to step S2005. .

In step S2005, the exclusive OR (XOR) of the stop position after high-speed rotation in step S2004 and the stop position of the stopped reel is calculated, and the calculated value is used as the new stop position after high-speed rotation. Note that when the process advances to step S2005 via step S2003, even if the exclusive OR (XOR) is calculated, the seventh bit of the stop position after high-speed rotation remains set to 1. That is, when the peach seven symbol is not stopped and displayed on the reel window 113 in the first stop operation or the second stop operation, the seventh bit of the stop position after high speed rotation is set to 1.

For example, if the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the peach seven symbol is the middle stop symbol, step S2001: NO, step S2002: YES, step S2004: NO (number 2 of the middle stop symbol (value of 1 byte: 00000010) ), the stop position after high-speed rotation is the initial value number 0 (1-byte value: 00000000)), and in step S2005, the exclusive OR of 1-byte value: 00000000 and 1-byte value: 00000010 is performed. The stopping position after high-speed rotation is calculated as number 2 (value of 1 byte: 00000010).

Next, the second stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and if the peach seven symbol is a middle stop symbol, step S2001: NO, step S2002: YES, step S2004: YES (number 2 of the middle stop symbol (value of 1 byte: 00000010) ), the stop position after high-speed rotation is number 2 (value of 1 byte: 00000010)), and the process ends. In other words, when the second stop operation is performed and the peach seven symbol is placed horizontally, the process ends with YES in step S2004, so the stop position after high speed rotation is number 2 (1 byte value: 00000010) ) remains the same. Note that if the first stop operation causes the peach seven symbol to stop on the upper or lower tier, and the second stop operation causes the peach seven symbol to stop in the middle row, and the peach seven symbol is played diagonally, step S2004 becomes NO and stops. An exclusive OR operation is performed to specify the stop position after high-speed rotation for each operation, and the final stop position after high-speed rotation is determined.

On the other hand, for example, if the first stop reel is the left reel 110 and the peach seven symbol is not stopped and displayed on the reel window 113, the process proceeds to step S2001: NO, step S2002: NO, and in step S2003, after high-speed rotation, Since the stop position is number 128 (the 7th bit is set to 1), the process proceeds to step S2004: NO, and in step S2005, the stop position after high-speed rotation is number 128 (the 7th bit is set to 1). ).

Next, the second stop reel is set to the middle reel 111, and if the peach seven symbol is not stopped and displayed on the reel window 113, the process proceeds to step S2001: NO, step S2002: NO, and in step S2003, the stop after high speed rotation is performed. Since the position is number 128, the process proceeds to step S2004: NO, and in step S2005, the stop position after high-speed rotation becomes number 128 or higher (the seventh bit is set to 1). That is, when the second stop operation is performed and the peach seven symbol is not played, the seventh bit of the stop position after high speed rotation remains set to 1.

If the reel on which the stop operation was performed in step S2001 is the third stop reel (step S2001: YES), it is determined in step S2006 whether or not the peach seven symbol is played. Specifically, when the peach seven symbol is not played, the 7th bit of the stop position after high-speed rotation is set to 1, so the 7th bit of the stop position after high-speed rotation is 1. Determine whether or not. If the peach seven symbol is on the hearing tile, that is, if the seventh bit of the stop position after high-speed rotation is not set to 1 (step S2006: NO), the process proceeds to step S2007, and the peach seven symbol is on the listening tile. If not, that is, if the seventh bit of the stop position after high-speed rotation is set to 1 (step S2006: YES), the process ends.

In step S2007, since the peach seven symbol is placed on a predetermined horizontal performance line, the speed of the third stop reel is set to high speed rotation (4 times), and then in step S2008, the stop position after high speed rotation is set. is set at the stop position of the third stop reel. For example, if the first stop reel is the left reel 110, the peach seven symbol is the middle stop symbol, the second stop reel is the middle reel 111, and the peach seven symbol is the middle stop symbol, then the stop after high speed rotation Since the position is number 2 (value of 1 byte: 00000010), the right reel 112 is rotated at high speed and the peach seven symbol is stopped at the middle position of the reel window 113.

In this way, the stop position after high-speed rotation is compared with the symbols stopped by the first stop operation to the second stop operation (step S2004), and exclusive OR calculation (step S2005) is performed. By sequentially maintaining, updating, and determining the stop position after high-speed rotation, it is possible to perform a reel action according to the stop mode.

In FIGS. 95 and 96, the reel action (high speed rotation) is explained based on the third stop operation when the peach seven symbol is played, but the reel action is not limited to this. For example, when the peach seven symbol is played, wait processing is performed based on the third stop operation, a sound tile voice indicating that the weighted tile has been played is output, the reel backlight is emitted, It is also possible to perform a process of causing the side lamp 144 to emit light or freezing the third stop operation.

<Continuous performance>
Next, the continuous effect executed in CZ2 will be explained using FIG. 97. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the transition of continuous effects in chronological order. This continuous performance is a performance that is executed over four games, and is configured to notify information indicating whether or not it is possible to transition to the AT state (more specifically, the add-on zone) in the final game (fourth game). ing. For example, the continuous performance may consist of an image performance using a liquid crystal display device 157 as shown in FIG. 97, and may be a performance in which a lord and a samurai face off against each other. In this case, when the lord wins this showdown, the word "victory" is displayed and the game shifts to the AT state (more specifically, the add-on zone) from the next game.

In the continuous performance of this example, if a penalty occurs in one game of the continuous performance, the performance executed in the game where the penalty occurred (part of the continuous performance) will be executed again in the next game. . As described above, the penalty in this example occurs when a stop operation other than forward press and forward pinch (first stop left) is performed in a game in which the push order bell is won in the normal state.

In addition, in this example, in the game in the normal state, if a stop operation other than sequential push/sequential pinch (first stop left) is performed, recommended operation notification is executed to notify the recommended operation. . The recommended operation notification is an image production using the liquid crystal display device 157. For example, as shown in FIG. 97, an image (hereinafter referred to as d1 (also referred to as a left push recommended display) may be displayed superimposed on the continuous effect image. In this case, since the image of the continuous effect is displayed behind the left push recommendation display d1, a part of the image of the continuous effect becomes difficult to see. In other words, in a game where a penalty has occurred, the left push recommended display d1 blocks a part of the image of the continuous effect, so part of the image of the continuous effect becomes difficult to see. Since it is executed again in the next game, the player can understand the content of the performance (part of the continuous performance) performed in the game in which the penalty occurred.

In FIG. 97(a), the push order bell was internally won in the third game of the continuous performance (N+2 game in FIG. 97(a)), and the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed. It shows the transition of continuous performance when a penalty occurs in the game.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 97(a), since the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed in the third game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the third game of the continuous performance, and the third game of the continuous performance Since a penalty has occurred in the second game, in the next game, the fourth game of the continuous performance (N+3 game in FIG. 97(a)), the performance 3, which is the performance of the third game of the continuous performance, is executed again. As a result, the continuous performance will be a performance spanning five games, and the result of the AT lottery will be announced in the fifth game (N+4th game in FIG. 97(a)).

FIG. 97(b) shows that the first game of the continuous performance (the Nth game in FIG. 97(b)) is internally won, the first stop right stop operation is performed, and the third game of the continuous performance ( In the N+2 game of Figure 97(b), the push order bell was internally won and the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed, so the transition of the continuous performance in the case where a penalty occurred in the third game of the continuous performance is shown below. It shows.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 97(b), since the first stop right stop operation was performed in the first game of the continuous performance, recommended operation notification is executed in the first game of the continuous performance. Note that since no penalty has occurred in the first game of the continuous performance, the performance will not be re-executed in the next game. In addition, since the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed in the 3rd game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification was executed in the 3rd game of the continuous performance, and a penalty occurred in the 3rd game of the continuous performance, so the next In the fourth game (N+3rd game in FIG. 97(a)) of the continuous presentation, which is a game, presentation 3, which is the presentation of the third game of the continuous presentation, is executed again. As a result, the continuous performance will be a performance spanning five games, and the result of the AT lottery will be announced in the fifth game (N+4th game in FIG. 97(b)).

Figure 97(c) shows that in the second game (N+1th game in Figure 97(c)) and third game (N+2nd game in Figure 97(c)) of the continuous performance, the push order bell is internally won. , and the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed, so a penalty occurs in the second and third games of the continuous performance, and the transition of the continuous performance is shown.

In the continuous performance shown in FIG. 97(c), since the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed in the second game of the continuous performance, a recommended operation notification is executed in the second game of the continuous performance, and the second game of the continuous performance Since a penalty has occurred in the second game, in the next game, which is the third game of the continuous presentation, presentation 2, which is the presentation of the second game of the continuous presentation, is executed again. Subsequently, in the third game of the continuous performance, the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed, so a recommended operation notification was executed in the third game of the continuous performance, and a penalty was also issued in the third game of the continuous performance. Therefore, in the next game, the fourth game of the continuous performance, the performance 2, which is the performance of the second game of the continuous performance, is executed again and again. As a result, the continuous performance will be a performance spanning six games, and the result of the AT lottery will be announced in the sixth game (N+5th game in FIG. 97(c)).

Conventionally, when executing a continuous performance, a penalty has occurred in the counter MC of the main control unit 300 that manages the number of games in the continuous performance and the counter SC of the first sub-control unit 400 that manages the performance of the continuous performance. There is a risk that the counter value of counter MC and the counter value of counter SC may deviate from each other (for example, when a penalty occurs, counter MC does not update the counter value, but counter SC does not update the counter value). (e.g., the AT state has started, but the AT state performance has not started). FIG. 106 is a diagram showing an example of a case where a discrepancy occurs between the game progress and the presentation progress. FIG. 106(a) is a diagram showing the transition of continuous performance when no penalty is performed, and FIG. 106(b) is a diagram showing the transition of continuous performance when penalty is performed. As shown in FIG. 106(b), there is a problem that there is a discrepancy between the game progress and the production progress for the game in which the penalty was applied (for example, in an AT game, if the push order bell is won, operation navigation is not executed). Therefore, in this example, as described above, the performance performed in the game in which the penalty occurred is performed again in the next game, so that there is no discrepancy between the game progress and the performance progress.

In addition, in this example, although the continuous performance executed in CZ2 has been described, it is not limited to CZ2 that the performance executed in the game in which the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game. For example, it may be applied to continuous performance of CZ1. Furthermore, it may be applied to a continuous performance that announces whether or not to shift to CZ1 in the normal stage.

FIG. 98 is a time chart showing the progress of a game in which no penalty occurs. Specifically, FIG. 98(a) is a time chart showing the relationship between each operation of the Nth game and the N+1th game in FIG. 97(b) and the effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and FIG. 98(b) 98(a) is a diagram showing the presentation mode of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each point in time in FIG. 98(a).

The slot machine 100 starts displaying the image of effect 1 on the liquid crystal display device 157 based on the start lever operation of the Nth game (see point A1 of the start lever operation), and when the first stop operation of the Nth game is on the right. Therefore, based on the first stop operation, the left push recommendation display d1 starts to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time point A2 of the first stop operation). At time point A2, the image of effect 1 and the left push recommendation display d1 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed for the Nth game, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the NEXT display d2 at a position that does not overlap with the left-press recommended display d1 based on the third stop operation. (See point A3 of the third stop operation). The NEXT display d2 is an image display that suggests the development of the next game, and may be, for example, an image in which the characters NEXT are displayed within a rectangular frame. At time A3, on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157, an image of effect 1, a left push recommendation display d1, and a NEXT display d2 are displayed. Next, the slot machine 100 ends the left push recommendation display d1 at time A4 when a predetermined time T1 has elapsed from time A3. That is, in a game where no penalty occurs, the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed from time A2 of the first stop operation to time A4 when a predetermined time T1 has elapsed from time A3 of the third stop operation. , the display ends regardless of the player's operation. At time A4, the image of effect 1 and the NEXT display d2 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the start lever operation for the N+1st game is performed, the slot machine 100 ends the performance 1, starts the performance 2, and ends the NEXT display d2 based on the start lever operation for the N+1th game ( (See point A5 when operating the start lever). That is, the NEXT display d2 is displayed from time A3 of the third stop operation to time A5 of the start lever operation. At time A5, the image of rendering 2 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 99 is a time chart showing the transition of performance of a game in which a penalty has occurred. Specifically, FIG. 99(a) is a time chart showing the relationship between the operations of the N+2nd game and the N+3rd game in FIG. 97(b) and the effects executed on the liquid crystal display device 157, and FIG. 99(b) 99(a) is a diagram showing the presentation mode of the liquid crystal display device 157 at each point in time in FIG. 99(a).

The slot machine 100 starts displaying the image of effect 3 on the liquid crystal display device 157 based on the start lever operation of the N+2 game (see point A1 of the start lever operation), and the first stop operation of the N+2 game is on the right. Therefore, based on the first stop operation, the left push recommendation display d1 starts to be displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 (see time point A2 of the first stop operation). At time point A2, the image of effect 3 and the left push recommendation display d1 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the second stop operation and the third stop operation are performed for the N+2 game, the slot machine 100 starts displaying the blackout display d3 as the background image of the left-press recommended display d1 based on the third stop operation ( (See point A3 of the third stop operation). The darkened display d3 is an image obtained by darkening the image of the effect 3 that was displayed as the background of the left push recommendation display d1. This allows the player to understand that the game is a game for which a penalty has been given. At time A3, a left push recommendation display d1 and a darkening display d3 are displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

Next, when the start lever operation for the N+3rd game is performed, the slot machine 100 ends the effect 3 based on the start lever operation for the N+3rd game, starts the effect 3 again, and displays the left push recommendation display d1. and also ends the blackout display d3 (see point A4 when the start lever is operated). That is, in a game where a penalty has occurred, the left push recommendation display d1 will be displayed from time A2 of the first stop operation to time A4 of the start lever operation, and the display will end based on the player's operation. It is supposed to be done. Further, the blackout display d3 is displayed from the time point A3 of the third stop operation to the time point A4 of the start lever operation. Note that in a game where a penalty has occurred, the NEXT display d2 is not displayed. At time A4, the image of effect 3 is displayed on the screen of the liquid crystal display device 157.

In this way, the display period of the left press recommended display d1 is different between games where a penalty does not occur and games where a penalty occurs, but it is continuously displayed from the first stop operation to at least the third stop operation. ing. This is because a momentary display would be confused with a performance triggered by a stop operation.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 98, in a game in which no penalty occurs, the NEXT display d2 ends based on the start lever operation, but the NEXT display d2 may end based on the bet operation. In addition, as shown in FIG. 99, in the game where a penalty occurred, the left push recommendation display d1 ended based on the start lever operation, or the blackout display d3 ended, but the left push recommendation display d3 ended based on the bet operation. The display d1 may end, or the dark display d3 may end.

<Penalty game>
Next, the penalty game of this example will be explained using FIG. 100. FIG. 100(a) is a diagram showing the transition of the above-mentioned continuous performance in chronological order, and FIG. 100(b) is a diagram showing the transition of the non-continuous performance (hereinafter sometimes referred to as non-continuous performance) in chronological order. FIG. The penalty in this example is that in a game in which the push order bell is internally won in a normal game, a stop operation other than the first stop operation left (specifically, during the first stop operation, first stop operation right) is performed. However, re-execution of the effect processing is a process that is performed when a penalty occurs while the effect is being executed.

In FIG. 100(a), the push order bell was internally won in the third game of the continuous performance (N+2 game in FIG. 100(a)), and the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed. It shows the transition of continuous performance when a penalty occurs in the game. Since this is as described above, the explanation will be omitted.

On the other hand, in the non-continuous performance shown in FIG. 100(b), the push order bell was internally won in the N+1st game of the non-continuous performance, and the first stop right stop operation was performed, so the N+1st game of the non-continuous performance It is shown that recommended operation notification was executed in , and a penalty occurred in the N+1th game of non-continuous performance. However, since the continuous performance is not being executed, the performance executed in the N+1-th game will not be re-executed in the N+2 game of non-continuous performance in the next game.

In addition, in the non-continuous performance shown in FIG. 100(b), cherry was internally won in the N+3rd game of the non-continuous performance, and the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed, so it is recommended in the N+3rd game of the non-continuous performance. Operation notification is executed, but no penalty has occurred. Similarly, in the N+5th game of the non-continuous performance, the replay was internally won and the stop operation to the right of the first stop was performed, so the recommended operation notification was executed in the N+5th game of the non-continuous performance, but a penalty occurred. I haven't.

In this way, in this example, even if a penalty occurs during execution of a non-continuous performance, the performance of the game in which the penalty occurred will not be re-executed in the next game. This is because when a discontinuous performance is being performed, there is no need to synchronize the progress of the game and the progress of the performance.

As shown in FIG. 100, the left push recommendation display d1 in this example is independent of the effect image displayed in the background (for example, if the image displayed in the background is (A) lord and samurai) Even if it is a single image of a continuous performance in which they face each other, or an image of a continuous performance in which (B) Tono and Grandfather are seated opposite each other), the same display format (for example, a rectangular display superimposed on the performance image in the center of the screen) A frame screen is displayed, and the text "Pushing left is recommended within the frame" is displayed. This prevents the player from misperceiving that the left push recommendation display d1 is a type of anticipation effect.

In addition, in this example, if a penalty occurs during a continuous performance, the continuous performance of the game where the penalty occurred will be executed again in the next game, but the performance of the game where the penalty occurred will be executed again in the next game. The execution is not limited to this. For example, if a precursor state is provided that increases expectations for the AT state transition, and a precursor effect is executed in the precursor state to increase expectations for the AT state transition, if a penalty occurs during this precursor effect, the penalty will be The foreshadowing performance of the game that has occurred may be executed again in the next game.

In addition, in this example, if a penalty occurs during a continuous performance, the same performance as the performance of the game where the penalty occurred is executed again in the next game, but it is not necessary to be limited to the same performance. , the process related to the same effect may be executed again. For example, the same performance lottery process may be executed as the process related to the same performance. This performance lottery process adopts a configuration in which one of the multiple performances is determined by lottery process and the determined performance is executed, so that in the next game, a performance different from the performance of the game in which the penalty occurred. may be executed. For example, a performance including a chance-up pattern was performed in a game that resulted in a penalty, but a performance that does not include a chance-up pattern may be performed in the next game. When a penalty occurs in this way, the same effect processing may be executed in the next game.

Furthermore, special processing may be executed in the game following the game in which the penalty occurred. This special process includes not executing rare role avoidance navigation in the next game (for example, performing a push order navigation that does not win a rare role even if the rare role is internally won), or not executing preferential treatment (for example, , if a penalty has not occurred, when an AT additional lottery is to be executed in addition to the AT lottery, the AT additional lottery is not executed, etc.). By executing special processing, it is possible to prevent the player from suffering an excessive disadvantage.

<Notification mode of recommended operation notification>
Next, the display mode of the left push recommendation display d1 will be described using FIG. 101. FIGS. 101(a) to 101(d) are diagrams showing an example of a display mode of the left push recommendation display d1 on the liquid crystal display device 157.

FIG. 101(a) is the same as FIG. 80(c), and shows a case where the entire liquid crystal display device 157 is used to display an image. In this case, the visibility of the symbols on the reels 110 to 112 is reduced (hard to see). 101(b) is the same as FIG. 80(d), and shows a state in which rules 110 to 112 are being rotated, and visibility of the reels 110 to 112 is ensured in the area inside the reel window 113. It shows. In addition, in the area above the outside of the reel window 113, images of continuous effects are displayed.

FIG. 101(c1) shows a case where the dialogue d5 of the continuous performance is displayed in the area above the outside of the reel window 113 in the state of FIG. 101(b). Further, FIG. 101(c2) shows a case where the first stop operation is performed in the state of FIG. 101(c1) and a penalty occurs. Specifically, this shows a case where the push order bell is internally won during the continuous performance and the first stop operation is performed, so the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed in the game. As shown in FIGS. 101 (c1) and (c2), the left push recommendation display d1 includes a line d5 displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, a stored number display d6 that is a display related to gaming value (medals), and an inserted number display d7. The display areas of the payout number display d8 and the payout number display d8 are arranged so that they do not overlap.

FIG. 101(d) shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device when an error occurs in the slot machine 100. In this case, the image area of the error display d4 is the entire area outside the reel window 113, and the image area of the wording of the error display d4 is arranged such that at least a portion thereof overlaps with the image area of the left push recommendation display d1. It has become.

FIG. 101(c3) shows a modification of the display mode of the left push recommendation display d1 shown in FIG. 101(c2). The image area of the left push recommendation display d1 shown in FIG. 101(c3) is the entire area outside the reel window 113. In this way, the left push recommendation display d1 may be displayed over the entire area outside the reel window 113. In addition, instead of the phrase ``Press left is recommended,'' it is sufficient to use a message such as ``Caution'' or a ``!'' mark, or any other display that can identify that an operation that is not recommended has been performed. The entire screen may be grayed out without displaying the mark.

<Operation when power outage or error occurs while executing recommended operation notification>
FIG. 102(a) is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 when a power outage/power restoration occurs while executing recommended operation notification, and FIG. 102(b) is a diagram showing the operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 after executing recommended operation notification. 7 is a diagram showing the subsequent operation of the liquid crystal display device 157 when an error is detected during the operation. FIG.

FIG. 102(a1) shows an example of a case where a power outage/power restoration occurs while the left push recommendation display d1 is being displayed in a state where the reels 110 to 112 are stopped. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the active screen d11, then displays the demonstration screen d12, and then executes the effect screen of the next game based on the next game start operation. Therefore, in this case, the left push recommendation display d1 will not be displayed again after power is restored. Note that a dedicated screen for use when power is restored may be displayed instead of the demo screen d12.

FIG. 102(a2) shows an example where a power outage/power restoration occurs while the left push recommendation display d1 is being displayed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the starting screen d11, then displays the return screen d13, and then executes the performance of the next game based on the next game start operation. Therefore, in this case, the left push recommendation display d1 will not be displayed again after the power is restored.

FIG. 102(a3) shows another example where a power outage/power restoration occurs while the left push recommendation display d1 is being displayed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the screen d11 during startup, then displays the performance screen when the power is cut off again, and then executes the performance of the next game based on the next game start operation. Therefore, in this case, after the power is restored, the effect screen at the time of power outage is restored, but the left push recommendation display d1 is not displayed again.

FIG. 102(a4) shows yet another example where a power outage/power restoration occurs while the left push recommended display d1 is being displayed while the reels 110 to 112 are rotating. . In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the screen d11 during startup, then displays the effect screen at the time of power outage again, displays the left push recommendation display d1 again, and starts the next game based on the next game start operation. Execute the performance. Therefore, in this case, after the power is restored, the left push recommendation display d1 will be displayed again along with the effect screen at the time of power outage. Note that the left push recommended display d1 after power restoration ends after a predetermined time T1 has elapsed after the third stop operation (if no penalty has occurred in the game where the power was cut off, see FIG. 98); There is a case where the game ends based on the start operation of the next game (a case where a penalty has occurred in the game where the power was cut off, see FIG. 99).

FIG. 102(b1) shows an example of a case where an error is detected while displaying the left push recommendation display d1 in a state where the reels 110 to 112 of a game in which a penalty has occurred are stopped. . In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the error screen d14 when an error is detected, and then, when the error is recovered, displays the effect screen at the time of power outage again, displays the left push recommendation display d1 again, and then plays the next game. The performance of the next game is executed based on the start operation. The redisplayed left push recommendation display d1 ends based on the next game start operation. This is based on the fact that, as explained in FIG. 99, the left push recommendation display d1 displayed in the game in which a penalty has occurred is terminated by the start operation of the next game.

FIG. 102(b2) shows an example of a case where an error is detected while displaying the left push recommendation display d1 in a state where the reels 110 to 112 of a game in which no penalty has occurred are stopped. ing. In this case, the slot machine 100 first displays the error screen d14 when an error is detected, and then displays the error screen d14 when the error is recovered. (a) If the error recovery is within the predetermined time T1 from the third stop operation, the (b) If the error recovery exceeds the predetermined time T1 from the third stop operation, the effect screen at the time of power outage is displayed again. The left push recommendation display d1 is not displayed again. This is based on the fact that, as explained in FIG. 98, the left press recommendation display d1 in a game where no penalty occurs ends after a predetermined time T1 has elapsed since the third stop operation. Therefore, in the case of (a), the left push recommendation display d1 that is displayed again ends after the predetermined time T1 has elapsed since the third stop operation.

Furthermore, in recent years, so-called medalless (coinless) slot machines have been envisioned, which are managed using electronically storable information without using game media such as medals or game balls. In a medalless slot machine, the amount of game value owned by the player is stored on a card that the player can carry, and by inserting the card into a card unit connected to the slot machine, the amount of game value owned by the player can be redeemed. An amount of value is transferred to the slot machine and games can be played using that gaming value. When stopping the game, the amount of gaming value stored in the slot machine can be stored in the card by transferring (counting) the amount of gaming value from the slot machine to the card unit. Although the left push recommendation display d1 in this example is displayed even on a medalless game machine, the above-mentioned counting is possible even when the left push recommendation display d1 is being displayed. Even when the counting button is pressed, both the left push recommendation display d1 and the notification that counting is in progress (counting notification) are displayed and notified from the liquid crystal display device 157 and various speakers. Note that the display indicating that counting is in progress may be displayed at a position that does not overlap with the left push recommended display d1, or the display indicating that counting is in progress may be displayed preferentially at a position that overlaps with the left push recommended display d1. Good too.

<Other ways to deal with penalties>
In this example, if a penalty occurs while a continuous performance is being executed, as shown in FIG. 103(a), the performance executed in the game in which the penalty occurred (performance 2 in FIG. 103(a)) will be used in the next game. By re-executing the game, the discrepancy between the number of games in the game progress and the number of games in the production progress was prevented from occurring, but the method for dealing with the case where a penalty occurs during the execution of continuous production is not limited to this method.

For example, as shown in FIG. 103(b), when a presentation game counter that manages the progress of the presentation is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157, even if a method of updating the presentation game counter is devised. good. Note that it is assumed that the game number counter that manages the game progress does not update the counter value in a game in which a penalty has occurred.

In this case, in both the game where a penalty does not occur and the game where a penalty occurs, the game number counter on the presentation is incremented and updated based on the start lever operation (for example, by adding 1), but in the game where a penalty occurred, , based on the third stop operation, a subtraction update may be performed to restore the counter to its original value (for example, subtract 1). As a result, in the game in which the penalty has occurred, the discrepancy between the number of games in which the game progresses and the number of games in which the performance progresses is eliminated. The player can clearly understand that a penalty has occurred in the game because the game number counter is added and subtracted for performance in the game in which the penalty has occurred.

For example, as shown in FIG. 103(c), even if a penalty occurs, the continuous performance is executed without delay according to the story, and the final performance (AT confirmed in FIG. 103(c)) is executed again. You may also do so. In other words, even if the continuous performance ends, the final performance of the continuous performance may be re-executed for the number of games in which a penalty occurred, thereby eliminating the discrepancy between the number of games in which the game progresses and the number of games in which the performance progresses. . In addition, when an extra AT confirmation screen is displayed on the liquid crystal display device 157 as the final effect, a message such as "Waiting" is displayed so that the player understands that the progress of the effect is being adjusted. It's okay.

Note that even in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 103(b) and 103(c), the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed in a common manner, and the left push recommendation display d1 is displayed at least until the third stop operation. is now displayed. Similarly, in the modified examples shown in FIGS. 103(b) and 103(c), the left push recommendation display d1 at least partially overlaps with the error display, but is also the same as the gaming value display. are designed not to overlap.

<Display of number of acquired coins in AT state>
Next, the display of the number of acquired coins in the AT state will be explained using FIG. 104. FIG. 104(a) shows the display mode of the liquid crystal display device 157 in the first AT state. In the game shown in FIG. 104(a), since the push order bell has been internally won, the operation navigation image d21 is also displayed. In the AT state, as shown in FIG. 104(a), if the winning combination is internally won, the operation navigation image d21, the AT set number display d22 indicating the number of sets in the AT state, and the number of remaining games in the AT state are displayed. d23, an AT screen d20 including the number of medals acquired in the AT state (number of acquired medals) d24 is displayed. The number of acquired coins is the difference in the number of coins, and is the sum of the number of paid-out coins - the number of inserted coins.

FIG. 104(b) shows an acquired number history screen d30 that is displayed when the PUSH button 192 is operated on the AT screen d20 shown in FIG. 104(a). Since the AT state shown in FIG. 104(a) is the first consecutive AT state, the acquired number history screen d30 displays an icon d31 indicating that the first consecutive AT state is present, and also displays the first consecutive AT state. The current number of acquired coins d32 in the AT state is displayed. Since it is in the AT state of the first series, the number of acquired coins d24 and the number of acquired coins d32 have the same value.

FIG. 104(c) shows the AT screen d20 in the third AT state. In addition, on the AT screen d20 shown in FIG. 104(c), an explanatory image d25 showing a method of transitioning to the number of acquired coins history screen d30 is displayed along with the above-mentioned AT count display d22, number of remaining games d23, and number of acquired coins d24. There is.

FIG. 104(d) shows an acquired number history screen d30 that is displayed when the PUSH button 192 is operated on the AT screen d20 shown in FIG. 104(c). Since the AT state shown in FIG. 104(c) is the third consecutive AT state, on the acquisition number history screen d30, icons indicating the first, second, and third consecutive AT states are displayed. d31A, icon d31B, and icon d31C are displayed, and the acquired numbers d32A, d32B, and d32C obtained in the first, second, and third AT states, respectively, are displayed. In this way, on the number of winnings history screen d30, it is possible to check the number of winnings for each consecutive AT state.

FIG. 104(e) shows a modified example of the AT screen d20. As shown in FIG. 104(e), in addition to the display items of the AT screen d20 described above, the AT screen d20A may also be configured to display the total number of acquired coins d25 in all AT states. In the AT state of the second and subsequent sets, it is possible to grasp the total value of the number of acquired AT state pieces of the set and the number of acquired AT state pieces of all sets. That is, the acquired number d24 and the total d25 may be displayed on the screen of one effect image display device.

In addition, in this example, a display indicating that the specified number of sheets has been reached (for example, a display indicating that the specified number of sheets has been reached such as "XXX sheets OVER" every 250 sheets acquired) is displayed, but when the first series In the AT state, the process may be performed based on the value of the number of acquired coins d24, and in the second and subsequent AT states, the process may be performed based on the value of the total number d25. This is to prevent players from feeling bothered by avoiding displaying the same numerical value for reaching the specified number of coins for each set. Further, a setting value may be suggested (for example, "display 456 sheets, etc.") by displaying that the specified number of sheets has been reached. In this case, for example, the setting value may be suggested based on the numerical value of the number of acquired coins d24 in the first series, and the setting value may be suggested based on the numerical value of the total number d25 in the second series and thereafter.

Similar to FIG. 104(e), FIG. 104(f) is a modified example in which the total value d25 is displayed, but the total value d25 is displayed on a display means other than the liquid crystal display device 157 (for example, provided on the top of the housing). The figure shows the case where the image is displayed using a 7-segment or liquid crystal display device). When displaying the total value d25 using another display means, (a) the total value d25 may be displayed only in the AT state and not in the CZ2, or (b) the total value d25 may be displayed in the AT state and in the CZ2. It may be displayed on both sides. Further, the reaching of the specified number of sheets may be displayed on another display means. At this time, it is preferable that the size of the number displayed on the other display means be larger than the size of the number displayed for the number of acquired coins d24 and the total value d25. In this way, by displaying the total value d25 using another display means, it is possible to appeal to the surroundings the acquisition status of gaming values. In addition, recently, game machines that do not use game media such as medals and game balls are being envisioned, but when game media were used, the acquired game media could be stored in a dollar box to increase the payout of the acquired balls. I was able to communicate the situation to those around me, but this is not possible with a game machine that does not use game media. However, by displaying the total value d25 using another display means as in this example, it is possible to emphasize the status of acquired balls even in a game machine that does not use game media.

FIG. 105 is a graph showing an example of an increase/decrease in the number of differential sheets when the AT state is consecutively purchased. FIG. 105 shows a case where the AT state occurs three times in a row. In addition, FIG. 105 shows that in the first AT state, the second AT state, and the third AT state, the difference in number of sheets reached the upper limit difference number of sheets of 2400 in the advantageous section, so the AT condition (advantageous section) This shows the case where the process ends and the process moves to CZ2.

In this example, as shown in FIG. 105, in the first AT state, the number of coins acquired from the start of the AT state until the end of the AT state is counted, and the counted number of acquired coins is displayed as the number of acquired coins d20 on the AT screen d20. It is now displayed as . As a result, in the first AT state, it is possible to display 2400 or more sheets (for example, 3400 sheets in FIG. 105) as the number of acquired sheets d24. On the other hand, in the second and subsequent AT states, the number of coins acquired from the start of CZ2 (CZ2 after the advantageous section) until the end of the AT state is counted, and the counted number of acquired coins is displayed on the AT screen d20. It is displayed as the number of acquired coins d24. The reason why the counting period for the number of acquired medals in the second and subsequent AT states is set after the start of the AT state is that if the number of medals increases in CZ2, the advantageous section will be reached before the display of the number of acquired medals d24 reaches 2400 medals. This is to prevent players from dissatisfied with not reaching 2,400 coins even though they have completed the advantageous section.

In addition, when displaying the number of coins acquired in the initial AT state d24, the number of coins acquired in the AT state only was targeted, and the number acquired in CZ2 was not included, but after the ending state, the number of coins acquired in CZ2 was displayed. The number including the number of sheets may be displayed as the number of acquired sheets d24. For example, in CZ2, if the number of medals earned > 0, the AT state (advantageous section) will end when the number of medals obtained in the AT state is 2400 or less, so you will not be able to acquire gaming value up to the upper limit of the advantageous section. This is to give the player a sense of satisfaction.

<Other game machines>
Note that the slot machine may be a slot machine that only exchanges electronic data without using medals, and in this case, the gaming medium includes electronic data equivalent to the medals, and the gaming medium is The input is made from a predetermined external device (an electronic storage device with a function that can electronically store the number of lent medals or a function that can electronically store the number of medals won by winning). , includes inputting electronic data, and paying out game media includes outputting electronic data to a predetermined external device (electronic storage device). In the case of such a medalless slot machine, counting regarding game media is possible at any time, so counting is possible even when the above-mentioned recommended operation notification is being executed, and notification regarding the counting is performed.

<Summary of this example>
(1) Some game machines perform performances using reels. For example, Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2013-094347 discloses a gaming machine that executes a reel performance when a specific combination is won and a stop operation is performed in a specific operation order.

However, in the reel presentation of the above-mentioned literature, if the conditions for executing the reel presentation are provided, the reel presentation will be executed even if the eye press operation fails, so the reel presentation is not effective and the display mode of the reels is There is a problem that the reel performance is not beautiful.

This example has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine in which the reel display mode looks good when performing reel performance.

According to the gaming machine of this example (for example, slot machine 100),
A symbol display means (for example, reels 110 to 112) that is rotatably driven and has a plurality of types of symbols;
a display area (for example, reel window 113) in which the symbol display means can be visually recognized;
A specific event execution means (for example, main control unit 300, pseudo game related processing S105, etc.) capable of executing a specific event (for example, reel effects such as reel actions, audio output, lamp effects, freeze processing, etc.);
A game machine comprising:
The specific event execution means is a means for executing the specific event in a specific situation (for example, a situation of a hearing tile),
The specific event execution means is a means for not executing the specific event if the specific situation is not present,
The specific situation is a situation where the symbol display means has a specific display mode in the display area;
This is the first basic configuration.

According to the first basic configuration, when the display mode of the symbol display means is in a specific display mode, a specific event is executed, and when the display mode is not in a specific display mode, the specific event is not executed. It is possible to prevent inconsistencies between the display mode and the specific event execution. That is, according to the first basic configuration, it is possible to achieve consistency between the numbers and the performance, and it is possible to provide a game machine in which the display mode of the symbol display means has a good appearance.

In the first basic configuration,
The specific situation is such that at a first point in time (for example, at the time of the second stop operation), the symbol display means displays the specific display mode in the display area (for example, a peach seven symbol is displayed on a predetermined production line). The situation is that the display mode is
The specific event execution means executes the specific event at a second time point after the first time point (for example, at the time of a third stop operation) when the specific situation is at the first time point. is a means,
The specific event execution means is a means for not executing the specific event at the second time point if the specific situation is not present at the first time point.
This is a preferred configuration A1.

According to the preferred configuration A1, it is possible to prevent inconsistency between the display mode of the symbol display means at the first time point and the specific event execution at the second time point.

In preferred configuration A1,
The symbol display means is composed of a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112),
comprising a plurality of stop operation receiving means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that accept a stop operation to stop each of the plurality of reels,
The first time point is a time point after the first stop operation and before the final stop operation on the plurality of reels,
the second time point is the time point of the final stop operation;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A2.

According to preferred configuration A2, it is possible to determine whether or not to execute a specific event based on the final stop operation according to the display mode before the final stop operation, thereby improving the player's sense of expectation. .

In preferred configuration A2,
The plurality of types of designs include a specific design (for example, peach seven design),
The specific display mode is a display mode in which the specific symbol is being played in the display area.
This is a preferred configuration A3.

According to the preferred configuration A3, since a specific event is executed when a specific symbol is displayed in a display mode, it is possible to improve the player's interest.

In preferred configuration A3,
The specific event execution means executes the specific event regardless of which line the specific symbol is being played on in the display area.
This is assumed to be a preferred configuration A4.

According to the preferred configuration A4, it is possible to give a degree of freedom to the timing of the player's stop operation, and it is possible to enjoy the variety of games.

In preferred configuration A4,
The specific event is an effect related to the plurality of reels;
This is referred to as a preferred configuration A5.

According to the preferred configuration A5, it is possible to prevent mismatch between the display mode of the reels and the reel performance.

In preferred configuration A5,
The specific event is an effect that causes the specific symbol to be displayed on the line where the specific symbol is being played in the display area based on the final stop operation.
This is a preferred configuration A6.

According to preferred configuration A6, a reel effect is executed in which a specific symbol is stopped on the line where the specific symbol is played based on the final stop operation, so that the player feels a sense of accomplishment and special feeling. be able to.

In preferred configuration A6,
The specific event execution means executes the specific event regardless of which reel among the plurality of reels the final stop operation is performed on.
This is a preferred configuration A7.

According to the preferred configuration A7, it is possible to give a degree of freedom to the order of the player's stop operations, and it is possible to enjoy the diversity of the game.

In preferred configuration A1, preferred configuration A2, preferred configuration A3, preferred configuration A4, preferred configuration A5, preferred configuration A6, or preferred configuration A7,
comprising a permission means (for example, main control unit 300, pseudo game flag, etc.) that allows the specific event execution means to execute the specific event at a time before the first time;
The specific event execution unit is a unit that allows the permission unit to execute the specific event and executes the specific event when the specific situation is present;
The specific event executing means is a means that allows the allowing means to execute the specific event and does not execute the specific event when the specific situation is not present.
This is a preferred configuration A8.

According to the preferred configuration A8, by allowing execution of a specific event in advance, the control load at the first time point and the second time point can be reduced.

(2) Some game machines impose a penalty when a stop operation that is not recommended is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2011-125640 and 2016-107129).

However, gaming machines that give such penalties are configured to notify a caution message when giving a penalty, but the notification is uniform and does not correspond to the progress of the game. There are cases.

This example has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into account the progress of the game even when a penalty is given.

According to the gaming machine of this example (for example, slot machine 100),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by the player;
Notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
Specific event execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 400, control unit 500);
A game machine comprising:
When the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the first game in which the specific event was executed, the specific event execution means executes the specific event again in the game following the first game. (e.g., FIG. 97),
This is the second basic configuration.

According to the second basic configuration, when a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in the first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so that the player cannot grasp the content of the specific event. I can do it.

In the second basic configuration,
The operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, sequential pressing (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined notification is a notification regarding the recommended operation mode,
The notification means is configured to send the predetermined notification when a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (for example, middle press (during the first stop operation), reverse press (first stop operation right)) is performed. is a means of carrying out
The specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B1.

According to the preferred configuration B1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation in a game in which the first effect process is executed and a predetermined notification is performed, the first effect process is executed again in the next game. Since the process is executed, even if the content of the first performance process cannot be grasped due to an operation error by the player, the content of the first performance process can be grasped in the next game.

In preferred configuration B1,
The notification means includes a display means (for example, a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a predetermined display regarding the recommended operation mode (for example, a left press recommended display d1) as the predetermined notification on a display unit (for example, a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157). , a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500),
The specific event execution means includes a first effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of displaying a first effect display (for example, a continuous effect effect image) on the display unit based on the execution of the first effect process. device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display (for example, as shown in FIG. 97),
When the display means displays the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 97);
This is a preferred configuration B2.

According to the preferred configuration B2, even if a part of the first performance display cannot be grasped due to the predetermined display, the content of the first performance display can be grasped in the next game.

In preferred configuration B2,
comprising a lottery result means (for example, main control unit 300, internal lottery process for winning combinations) that determines the lottery result of the winning combination based on the lottery information,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (for example, winning a push order bell) as the lottery result,
The first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of gaming value awarded (for example, the number of medals paid out) differs depending on the operation mode of the operating means,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B3.

According to preferred configuration B3, by limiting the conditions for re-executing the first performance display, it is possible to prevent the first performance display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In preferred configuration B3,
It includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stop rotation of the plurality of reels,
The specific lottery result is based on a specific operation mode (for example, forward press, first stop operation left ), the award is given more when the stop operation means corresponding to the reel other than the specific reel among the plurality of reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode. The lottery result has a large number of gaming values (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.),
This is a preferred configuration B4.

According to preferred configuration B4, the basis for awarding gaming value can be lowered by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of gaming value awarded differs depending on the operating mode of the stop operation means.

In preferred configuration B4,
A first gaming state (e.g., normal state) and a second gaming state (e.g., AT state), which is more advantageous than the first gaming state and in which notification of the operation mode is executed. comprising a gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing S111) for controlling the transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation mode is the non-recommended operation mode,
The game state control means causes a transition from the first game state to the second game state when the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Regarding control, the first process (for example, processing that does not perform an AT lottery, lowers the execution probability of an AT lottery, does not perform an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, or suppresses it, increases the number of games to a ceiling) It is a means to perform processing such as not counting),
The game state control means controls the transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Second processing (for example, processing to perform an AT lottery, increasing the probability of AT lottery execution, performing an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, counting the number of games to reach the ceiling, etc.) ) is a means of carrying out
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in controlling the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration B5.

According to preferred configuration B5, by setting as the recommended operation mode an operation mode that does not award the first number of gaming values but does not become disadvantageous regarding transition control, the base of the gaming value award in the first gaming state is lowered. , the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In preferred configuration B5,
The notification means executes the predetermined notification regardless of the lottery result when the non-specific operation mode is operated in the first gaming state.
This is designated as a preferred configuration B6.

According to the preferred configuration B6, when an operation in a non-specific operation mode is performed, a predetermined notification regarding the recommended operation mode is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that it is possible to make the operations in the recommended operation mode widely known. can.

In preferred configuration B4,
The specific lottery results include a first specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL). Prepare,
The first specific lottery result is a first specific operation mode (for example, sequential pressing) in which the operating means corresponding to the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first. , the first quantity (for example, 9 pieces) of gaming value is not awarded, and the operation means corresponding to the second reel (for example, middle reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first. is a lottery result in which the first amount of gaming value is awarded when the first non-specific operation mode (for example, middle press) is operated;
When the second specific lottery result is operated in the first specific operation mode, the first amount of gaming value is not awarded, and the third reel among the plurality of reels (for example, If the operation means corresponding to the right reel 112) is operated in a second non-specific operation manner (for example, reverse push), the lottery result is that the first amount of gaming value is awarded. ,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (for example, a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as a lottery result,
The predetermined lottery result is a lottery result in which a predetermined amount of gaming value (for example, 9 tickets, a number less than 9 tickets, etc.) is awarded when operated in the first specific operation mode,
The lottery result means has a first probability that is lower than a third probability that is the sum of a first probability of determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability of determining the second specific lottery result. The predetermined lottery result can be determined with a probability of 4.
This is a preferred configuration B7.

According to preferred configuration B7, the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the first gaming state can be reduced, and the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In preferred configuration B2, preferred configuration B3, preferred configuration B4, preferred configuration B5, preferred configuration B6, or preferred configuration B7,
A second effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second effect display (for example, a discontinuous effect image) on the display unit; ),
The first performance display is a performance display performed in a certain game out of a series of performances performed over a plurality of games (for example, FIG. 100(a) etc.),
The second performance display is a performance display that is not performed over a plurality of games but is performed in a single game (for example, as shown in FIG. 100(b)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first performance display is displayed, the first performance display means displays the first performance display in the game following the first game. It is a means that may display a presentation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 100(a)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in a second game in which the second performance display is displayed, the second performance display means displays the second performance display in a game following the second game. is a means of not displaying (for example, FIG. 100(b) etc.),
This is a preferred configuration B8.

According to preferred configuration B8, if the display overlaps with a predetermined display in the middle of a series of performances, the content of the performance cannot be grasped, so the performance is performed again in the next game, but the performance of a single game is not repeated in the next game. If performed again, there is a risk that the performance will be redundant or that it may be mistaken for a problem with the game machine, so the performance is not performed again. As a result, it is possible to understand the content of the performance and to prevent the player from misperceiving the player.

(3) The gaming machine displays the number of medals obtained in an advantageous condition, and if an advantageous condition starts consecutively within a predetermined period even after the advantageous condition ends, the current advantageous condition is There is a gaming machine that takes over and displays the number of coins acquired from the previous advantageous state in a certain state (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2013-220228).

However, if the number of coins obtained from the previous advantageous condition is taken over and displayed in the current advantageous condition, there is a problem in that it will arouse the desire for gambling.

This example has been developed in view of the above circumstances, and provides a game machine that allows the player to keep track of the number of winning coins while suppressing the desire for gambling.

According to the gaming machine of this example (for example, slot machine 100),
an updating unit (for example, the main control unit 300) that executes an update process regarding a predetermined event (for example, granting a gaming value);
A display unit (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit) that performs a first display (for example, display of acquired numbers d31 and d32) regarding the predetermined event updated by the update unit; 500) and
A gaming machine comprising a gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing S111) that controls transition between a plurality of gaming states,
The plurality of gaming states include a first gaming state (for example, an AT state) that is advantageous to the player,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display in the first gaming state,
The updating means performs the updating process from a first timing (for example, the timing at which the AT state is started) in the first gaming state of the first winning (hereinafter referred to as "the first gaming state of the first winning"). is a means of initiating
The updating means updates the first gaming state after the second consecutive winning from the first gaming state of the first winning (hereinafter referred to as "the first gaming state after the second consecutive winning"). ), means for starting the update process at a second timing different from the first timing (for example, the timing at which the CZ2 state in the advantageous section is started);
This is the third basic structure.

According to the third basic configuration, since the start timing of the update process is different between the first game state for the first win and the first game state for the second and subsequent games, a break is provided for updates related to predetermined events. At the same time, updates can be made taking into consideration the fact that the player is playing consecutive games. That is, it is possible to grasp the updated value of the predetermined event in the first gaming state while suppressing the desire for gambling.

In the third basic configuration,
The plurality of gaming states include a second gaming state (for example, a normal state (CZ2)),
The gaming state control means is a means capable of controlling transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
When a predetermined condition is satisfied in a certain second gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "a certain second gaming state") that has not been transferred from the first gaming state, the gaming state control means (For example, when winning an AT lottery), means for controlling the transition to the first gaming state of the first win;
The gaming state control means is means for controlling a transition to a new second gaming state (hereinafter referred to as "new second gaming state") when the first gaming state of the first win ends. can be,
The gaming state control means is a means for controlling the transition to the second and subsequent first gaming states when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the new second gaming state,
The first timing is the timing at which the first game state of the first win is started,
The second timing is a timing related to the start of the new second gaming state,
This is a preferred configuration C1.

According to the preferred configuration C1, during a series of games, updates can be performed in consideration of the update degree of a predetermined event in a second gaming state in the middle.

In a preferred configuration C1,
At least in the first gaming state after the second game, the display means displays the first gaming state up to the previous time under the situation of consecutive winnings (hereinafter referred to as "the first gaming state of consecutive winnings"). ”) is a means capable of displaying the first display (for example, FIG. 104(d)),
This is a preferred configuration C2.

According to the preferred configuration C2, it is possible to check the history of the first display up to the previous first gaming state under the situation of consecutive games.

In a preferred configuration C2, the consecutive games are when the predetermined condition is satisfied in the new second gaming state and the game shifts to the first gaming state.
This is a preferred configuration C3.

According to the preferred configuration C3, by repeating the transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state, the first display during consecutive games can be displayed as a history.

In a preferred configuration C3,
The predetermined event is related to the provision of gaming value,
The first display is a display regarding the total number of acquired gaming values awarded for each of the consecutive first gaming states;
This is a preferred configuration C4.

According to the preferred configuration C4, the player can grasp the total number of gaming values acquired for each advantageous first gaming state.

In a preferred configuration C1, a preferred configuration C2, a preferred configuration C3, or a preferred configuration C4,
The gaming state control means is capable of controlling transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state in an advantageous section (for example, an advantageous section),
The gaming state control means is a means that may end the advantageous section when the first gaming state of the first win ends (for example, when condition J in FIG. 84 is satisfied),
The gaming state control means is a means for starting the new second gaming state in connection with the start of the new advantageous section (for example, the gaming state in CZ2 after condition J in FIG. 84 is satisfied). digestion),
This is a preferred configuration C5.

According to the preferred configuration C5, a new advantageous section is started when the first gaming state ends, so that it is possible to prevent a decline in gaming interest even in an advantageous section with an upper limit.

In a preferred configuration C5,
The advantageous section is a period that ends when a predetermined limiter condition is satisfied (for example, when condition J in FIG. 84 is satisfied),
The display means is capable of displaying the first display that does not reflect the predetermined event in the certain second gaming state before the predetermined limiter condition is satisfied in the first gaming state of the first win. It is a means of
The display means is capable of displaying the first display reflecting the predetermined event in the certain second gaming state after the predetermined limiter condition is satisfied in the first gaming state of the first win. It is a means of
This is a preferred configuration C6.

According to the preferred configuration C6, when completing the advantageous section, it is possible to give the player a feeling of satisfaction that he was able to acquire gaming value up to the upper limit of the advantageous section.

(4) Some gaming machines impose a penalty when a stop operation that is not recommended is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2011-125640 and 2016-107129).

However, gaming machines that give such penalties are configured to notify a caution message when giving a penalty, but the notification is uniform and does not correspond to the progress of the game. There are cases.

This example has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into account the progress of the game even when a penalty is given.

According to the gaming machine of this example (for example, slot machine 100),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by the player;
Notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
Can execute multiple types of specific events (for example, multiple types of continuous performances (such as a continuous performance in which a master confronts a samurai, a continuous performance in which a master chases an old man, etc.), and performance processing to execute multiple types of continuous performances) Specific event execution means;
A game machine comprising:
The specific event execution means causes the notification means to issue the predetermined notification in a first game in which one of the plurality of types of specific events (for example, a continuous performance in which a lord and a samurai face each other) is executed. When executed, the first specific event may be executed again in the game following the first game,
The notification means executes the predetermined notification in the same notification mode regardless of which type of the one specific event executed in the first game is among the plurality of types.
This is the fourth basic structure.

According to the fourth basic configuration, when a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in the first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so that the player cannot grasp the content of the specific event. I can do it. In addition, since the predetermined notification is executed in the same notification mode regardless of the type of specific event to be executed, it can be clearly recognized as a separate notification from the specific event, and the predetermined notification can be used to create a sense of anticipation. will not mislead.

In the fourth basic configuration,
The operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, sequential pressing (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined notification is a notification regarding the recommended operation mode,
The notification means is configured to notify the predetermined operation mode when a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (for example, middle press (during the first stop operation), reverse press (first stop operation right)) is performed. It is a means of carrying out notification,
The one specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance);
This is a preferred configuration D1.

According to the preferred configuration D1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation in a game in which the first effect process is executed and a predetermined notification is performed, the first effect process is executed again in the next game. Since the process is executed, even if the content of the first performance process cannot be grasped due to an operation error by the player, the content of the first performance process can be grasped in the next game.

In a preferred configuration D1,
The notification means includes a display means (for example, a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157) capable of displaying a predetermined display regarding the recommended operation mode (for example, a left press recommended display d1) as the predetermined notification on a display unit (for example, a display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157). , a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500),
The specific event execution means includes a first effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of displaying a first effect display (for example, a continuous effect effect image) on the display unit based on the execution of the first effect process. device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display (for example, as shown in FIG. 97),
When the display means displays the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 97);
This is a preferred configuration D2.

According to the preferred configuration D2, even if a part of the first performance display cannot be grasped due to the predetermined display, the content of the first performance display can be grasped in the next game.

In a preferred configuration D2,
comprising a lottery result means (for example, main control unit 300, internal lottery process for winning combinations) that determines the lottery result of the winning combination based on the lottery information,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (for example, winning a push order bell) as the lottery result,
The first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of gaming value awarded (for example, the number of medals paid out) differs depending on the operation mode of the operating means,
This is a preferred configuration D3.

According to the preferred configuration D3, by limiting the conditions for re-executing the first effect display, it is possible to prevent the first effect display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration D3,
It includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stop rotation of the plurality of reels,
The specific lottery result is based on a specific operation mode (for example, forward press, first stop operation left ), the award is given more when the stop operation means corresponding to the reel other than the specific reel among the plurality of reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode. The lottery result has a large number of gaming values (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D4.

According to the preferred configuration D4, it is possible to lower the basis for awarding gaming value by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of gaming value awarded differs depending on the operating mode of the stop operation means.

In a preferred configuration D4,
A first gaming state (e.g., normal state) and a second gaming state (e.g., AT state), which is more advantageous than the first gaming state and in which notification of the operation mode is executed. comprising a gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing S111) for controlling the transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation mode is the non-recommended operation mode,
The game state control means causes a transition from the first game state to the second game state when the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Regarding control, the first process (for example, processing that does not perform an AT lottery, lowers the execution probability of an AT lottery, does not perform an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, or suppresses it, increases the number of games to a ceiling) (e.g., not performing an AT lottery, not counting the number of games in the first gaming state, etc.)
The game state control means controls the transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Second processing (for example, processing to perform an AT lottery, increasing the probability of AT lottery execution, performing an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, counting the number of games to reach the ceiling, etc.) ) (for example, performing an AT lottery, counting the number of games in the first gaming state, etc.)
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in controlling the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D5.

According to the preferred configuration D5, by setting the recommended operation mode to be an operation mode that does not award the first number of gaming values but does not result in a disadvantage regarding transition control, the base of the gaming value award in the first gaming state is lowered. , the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In a preferred configuration D5,
The notification means executes the predetermined notification regardless of the lottery result when the non-specific operation mode is operated in the first gaming state.
This is a preferred configuration D6.

According to the preferred configuration D6, when a non-specific operation mode is operated, a predetermined notification regarding the recommended operation mode is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that it is possible to make the operation of the recommended operation mode widely known. can.

In a preferred configuration D4,
The specific lottery results include a first specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL). Prepare,
The first specific lottery result is obtained when the operating means corresponding to the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated in a first specific operating mode ( For example, if the game value of the first quantity (for example, 9 pieces) is not given, and the operating means corresponding to the second reel (for example, middle reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first is a lottery result in which the first amount of gaming value is awarded when the first non-specific operation mode (for example, middle press) is operated;
When the second specific lottery result is operated in the first specific operation mode, the first amount of gaming value is not awarded, and the third reel among the plurality of reels (for example, If the operation means corresponding to the right reel 112) is operated in a second non-specific operation manner (for example, reverse push), the lottery result is that the first amount of gaming value is awarded. ,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (for example, a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as a lottery result,
The predetermined lottery result is a lottery result in which a predetermined amount of gaming value (for example, 9 tickets, a number less than 9 tickets, etc.) is awarded when operated in the first specific operation mode,
The lottery result means has a first probability that is lower than a third probability that is the sum of a first probability of determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability of determining the second specific lottery result. A preferred configuration D7 is that the predetermined lottery result can be determined with a probability of 4.

According to the preferred configuration D7, the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the first gaming state can be reduced, and the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In a preferred configuration D2, a preferred configuration D3, a preferred configuration D4, a preferred configuration D5, a preferred configuration D6, or a preferred configuration D7,
A second effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second effect display (for example, a discontinuous effect image) on the display unit; ),
The first performance display is a performance display performed in a certain game out of a series of performances performed over a plurality of games (such as FIG. 100(a)),
The second performance display is a performance display that is not performed over a plurality of games but is performed in a single game (such as FIG. 100(b)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first performance display is displayed, the first performance display means displays the first performance display in the game following the first game. It is a means that may display a presentation display (such as FIG. 100(a)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in a second game in which the second performance display is displayed, the second performance display means displays the second performance display in a game following the second game. (Fig. 100(b) etc.)
This is referred to as a preferred configuration D8.

According to the preferred configuration D8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of performances, the content of the performance cannot be grasped, so the performance is performed again in the next game, but the performance of a single game is not repeated in the next game. If performed again, there is a risk that the performance will be redundant or that it may be mistaken for a problem with the game machine, so the performance is not performed again. As a result, it is possible to understand the content of the performance and to prevent the player from misperceiving the player.

(5) Some game machines impose a penalty when a stop operation that is not recommended is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2011-125640 and 2016-107129).

However, gaming machines that give such penalties are configured to notify a caution message when giving a penalty, but the notification is uniform and does not correspond to the progress of the game. There are cases.

This example has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into account the progress of the game even when a penalty is given.

According to the gaming machine of this example (for example, slot machine 100),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by the player;
Notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
Specific event execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, 2 sub-control unit 500);
A game machine comprising:
When the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the first game in which the specific event was executed, the specific event execution means executes the specific event again in the game following the first game. (For example, FIG. 97)
The notification means continues to execute the predetermined notification (for example, FIG. 98) until at least a predetermined time (for example, predetermined time T1 in FIG. 98) has elapsed;
This is the fifth basic configuration.

According to the fifth basic configuration, when a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in the first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so that the player cannot grasp the content of the specific event. I can do it. Furthermore, since the predetermined notification continues for a predetermined period of time, it can be distinguished from a performance that is displayed only momentarily in response to an operation.

Furthermore, according to the game machine of this example (for example, the slot machine 100),
A plurality of operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by the player;
Notification means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a predetermined notification (for example, recommended operation notification) regarding the operation means;
Specific event execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of executing a specific event (for example, production processing for executing a production such as a continuous production);
A game machine comprising:
When the notification means executes the predetermined notification in the first game in which the specific event was executed, the specific event execution means executes the specific event again in the game following the first game. (For example, Fig. 97)
The notification means continues to execute the predetermined notification at least until the last operation of the plurality of operation means is performed (for example, FIG. 99);
This is the sixth basic configuration.

According to the sixth basic configuration, when a specific event and a predetermined notification are executed in the first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so that the player cannot grasp the content of the specific event. I can do it. Further, since the predetermined notification continues until the last operation among the plurality of operations, it is possible to distinguish it from a performance that is displayed only momentarily in response to an operation.

In the fifth basic configuration or the sixth basic configuration,
The operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, sequential pressing (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined notification is a notification regarding the recommended operation mode,
The notification means is configured to send the predetermined notification when a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (for example, middle press (during the first stop operation), reverse press (first stop operation right)) is performed. is a means of carrying out
The specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance),
This is a preferred configuration E1.

According to the preferred configuration E1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation in a game in which the first effect process is executed and a predetermined notification is performed, the first effect process is executed again in the next game. Since the process is executed, even if the content of the first performance process cannot be grasped due to an operation error by the player, the content of the first performance process can be grasped in the next game.

In a preferred configuration E1,
The notification means is a display means (for example, a liquid crystal display device 157, a first sub-control unit 400, a second sub-control unit 500),
The specific event execution means includes a first effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of displaying a first effect display (for example, a continuous effect effect image) on the display unit based on the execution of the first effect process. device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display (for example, as shown in FIG. 97),
When the display means displays the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 97);
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E2.

According to the preferred configuration E2, even if a part of the first performance display cannot be grasped due to the predetermined display, the contents of the first performance display can be grasped in the next game.

In a preferred configuration E2,
comprising a lottery result means (for example, main control unit 300, internal lottery process for winning combinations) that determines the lottery result of the winning combination based on the lottery information,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (for example, winning a push order bell) as the lottery result,
The first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of gaming value awarded (for example, the number of medals paid out) differs depending on the operation mode of the operating means,
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E3.

According to the preferred configuration E3, by limiting the conditions for re-executing the first effect display, it is possible to prevent the first effect display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration E3,
It includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stop rotation of the plurality of reels,
The specific lottery result is based on a specific operation mode (for example, forward press, first stop operation left ), the award is given more when the stop operation means corresponding to the reel other than the specific reel among the plurality of reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode. The lottery result has a large number of gaming values (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.),
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E4.

According to the preferred configuration E4, it is possible to lower the basis for awarding gaming value by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of gaming value awarded differs depending on the operating mode of the stop operation means.

In a preferred configuration E4,
A first gaming state (e.g., normal state) and a second gaming state (e.g., AT state), which is more advantageous than the first gaming state and in which notification of the operation mode is executed. comprising a gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing S111) for controlling the transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation mode is the non-recommended operation mode,
The game state control means causes a transition from the first game state to the second game state when the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Regarding control, the first process (for example, processing that does not perform an AT lottery, lowers the execution probability of an AT lottery, does not perform an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, or suppresses it, increases the number of games to a ceiling) (e.g., not performing an AT lottery, not counting the number of games in the first gaming state, etc.)
The game state control means controls the transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Second processing (for example, processing to perform an AT lottery, increasing the probability of AT lottery execution, performing an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, counting the number of games to reach the ceiling, etc.) ) (for example, performing an AT lottery, counting the number of games in the first gaming state, etc.)
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in controlling the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is referred to as a preferred configuration E5.

According to the preferred configuration E5, by setting as the recommended operation mode an operation mode that does not give the first number of game values but does not result in a disadvantage regarding transition control, the base of the game value provision in the first gaming state can be lowered. , the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In a preferred configuration E5,
The notification means executes the predetermined notification regardless of the lottery result when the non-specific operation mode is operated in the first gaming state.
This is a preferred configuration E6.

According to the preferred configuration E6, when a non-specific operation mode is operated, a predetermined notification regarding the recommended operation mode is executed regardless of the lottery result, so that it is possible to make the operation of the recommended operation mode widely known. can.

In a preferred configuration E5,
The specific lottery results include a first specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL). Prepare,
The first specific lottery result is a first specific operation mode (for example, sequential pressing) in which the operating means corresponding to the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first. , the first quantity (for example, 9 pieces) of gaming value is not awarded, and the operation means corresponding to the second reel (for example, middle reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first. is a lottery result in which the first amount of gaming value is awarded when the first non-specific operation mode (for example, middle press) is operated;
When the second specific lottery result is operated in the first specific operation mode (for example, pushing sequentially), the first amount of gaming value is not awarded, and the second specific lottery result is determined by If the operation means corresponding to the third reel (for example, the right reel 112) is operated in a second non-specific operation manner (for example, reverse push), the first amount of gaming value is given. This is the lottery result,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (for example, a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as the lottery result,
When the predetermined lottery result is operated in the first specific operation mode (for example, pressing sequentially), a predetermined amount of gaming value (for example, 9 pieces, a number smaller than 9 pieces, etc.) is awarded. This is the lottery result.
The lottery result means has a first probability that is lower than a third probability that is the sum of a first probability of determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability of determining the second specific lottery result. The predetermined lottery result can be determined with a probability of 4.
This is a preferred configuration E7.

According to the preferred configuration E7, the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the normal state can be reduced, and the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the AT state can be increased accordingly.

In a preferred configuration E2, a preferred configuration E3, a preferred configuration E4, a preferred configuration E5, a preferred configuration E6, or a preferred configuration E7,
A second effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second effect display (for example, a discontinuous effect image) on the display unit; ),
The first performance display is a performance display performed in a certain game out of a series of performances performed over a plurality of games (for example, FIG. 100(a) etc.),
The second performance display (for example, a performance image of a discontinuous performance) is a performance display that is not performed over a plurality of games but is performed in a single game (for example, FIG. 100(b) etc.),
When the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first performance display is displayed, the first performance display means displays the first performance display in the game following the first game. It is a means that may display a presentation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 100(a)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in a second game in which the second performance display is displayed, the second performance display means displays the second performance display in a game following the second game. is a means of not displaying (for example, FIG. 100(b) etc.),
This is a preferred configuration E8.

According to the preferred configuration E8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of performances, the content of the performance cannot be grasped, so the performance is performed again in the next game, but the performance of a single game is not repeated in the next game. If performed again, there is a risk that the performance will be redundant or that it may be mistaken for a problem with the game machine, so the performance is not performed again. As a result, it is possible to understand the content of the performance and to prevent the player from misperceiving the player.

(6) Some game machines impose a penalty when a stop operation that is not recommended is performed (for example, Japanese Patent Laid-Open Nos. 2011-125640 and 2016-107129).

However, gaming machines that give such penalties are configured to notify a caution message when giving a penalty, but the notification is uniform and does not correspond to the progress of the game. There are cases.

This example has been made in view of the above circumstances, and provides a gaming machine that takes into account the progress of the game even when a penalty is given.

According to the gaming machine of this example (for example, slot machine 100),
Operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that can be operated by the player;
Specific event execution means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 400, control unit 500);
Displaying a predetermined display regarding the operation means (for example, left press recommended display d1 of recommended operation notification) at a first position (for example, the center position of the screen) of the display unit (for example, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 157). A possible first display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500),
a second display means capable of displaying an error-related display (e.g., error display d4) at a second position of the display unit (e.g., the center position of the screen);
A third display means capable of displaying a display related to the gaming value (for example, the number of stored coins display d6, the number of inserted coins display d7, the number of paid coins display d8) at a third position of the display section (for example, at the bottom of both left and right ends of the screen) and,
A game machine comprising:
When the first display means displays the predetermined display in the first game in which the specific event is executed, the specific event execution means executes the specific event again in the game following the first game. (For example, Fig. 97)
The first position and the second position overlap, while the first position and the third position do not overlap (e.g., FIG. 101);
This is the seventh basic configuration.

According to the seventh basic configuration, when a specific event and a predetermined display are executed in the first game, the specific event is executed again in the next game, so that the player cannot grasp the content of the specific event. I can do it. Furthermore, since the predetermined display is displayed at a position that does not overlap with the notification regarding the gaming value, the content of the notification regarding the number of bets and payout regarding the gaming value can also be grasped.

In the seventh basic configuration, the operation mode of the operation means includes a recommended operation mode (for example, sequential pressing (first stop operation left)),
The predetermined display is a display regarding the recommended operation mode,
The first display means indicates that when a non-recommended operation mode different from the recommended operation mode (for example, middle press (during the first stop operation), reverse press (first stop operation right)) is performed, the A means for displaying a predetermined display,
The specific event is a first performance process (for example, a performance process for executing a continuous performance)
is,
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F1.

According to the preferred configuration F1, even if the player performs an operation different from the recommended operation in a game in which the first effect process is executed and a predetermined display is performed, the first effect process is executed again in the next game. Since the process is executed, even if the content of the first performance process cannot be grasped due to an operation error by the player, the content of the first performance process can be grasped in the next game.

In a preferred configuration F1,
The specific event execution means includes a first effect display means (for example, a liquid crystal display) capable of displaying a first effect display (for example, a continuous effect effect image) on the display unit based on the execution of the first effect process. device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500),
The first display means is a means capable of displaying the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display (for example, as shown in FIG. 97),
When the first display means displays the predetermined display superimposed on the display area of the first effect display, at least a part of the first effect display is difficult to see (for example, as shown in FIG. 97). ),
This is a preferred configuration F2.

According to the preferred configuration F2, even if a part of the first performance display cannot be grasped due to the predetermined display, the content of the first performance display can be grasped in the next game.

In a preferred configuration F2,
comprising a lottery result means (for example, main control unit 300, internal lottery process for winning combinations) that determines the lottery result of the winning combination based on the lottery information,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a specific lottery result (for example, winning a push order bell) as the lottery result,
The first game is a game in which the specific lottery result is determined as the lottery result,
The specific lottery result is a lottery result in which the amount of gaming value awarded (for example, the number of medals paid out) differs depending on the operation mode of the operating means,
This is a preferred configuration F3.

According to the preferred configuration F3, by limiting the conditions for re-executing the first performance display, it is possible to prevent the first performance display from being repeated unnecessarily.

In a preferred configuration F3,
It includes a plurality of reels (for example, reels 110 to 112) that are decorated with a plurality of types of symbols and are driven to rotate,
The operation means is a plurality of stop operation means (for example, stop buttons 137 to 139) that are provided corresponding to each of the plurality of reels and individually stop rotation of the plurality of reels,
The specific lottery result is based on a specific operation mode (for example, forward press, first stop operation left ), the award is given more when the stop operation means corresponding to the reel other than the specific reel among the plurality of reels is operated in a non-specific operation mode. It is a lottery result with a large number of gaming values (for example, the former pays out 0 or 1 medal, while the latter pays out 9 medals, etc.).
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F4.

According to the preferred configuration F4, it is possible to lower the basis for awarding gaming value by providing specific lottery results in which the amount of gaming value awarded differs depending on the operating mode of the stop operation means.

In a preferred configuration F4,
A first gaming state (e.g., normal state) and a second gaming state (e.g., AT state), which is more advantageous than the first gaming state and in which notification of the operation mode is executed. comprising a gaming state control means (for example, main control unit 300, gaming state control processing S111) for controlling the transition between the first gaming state and the second gaming state,
The specific operation mode is the recommended operation mode,
The non-specific operation mode is the non-recommended operation mode,
The game state control means causes a transition from the first game state to the second game state when the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Regarding control, the first process (for example, processing that does not perform an AT lottery, lowers the execution probability of an AT lottery, does not perform an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, or suppresses it, increases the number of games to a ceiling) (e.g., not performing an AT lottery, not counting the number of games in the first gaming state, etc.)
The game state control means controls the transition from the first game state to the second game state when the specific operation mode is performed in the first game in the first game state. Second processing (for example, processing to perform an AT lottery, increasing the probability of AT lottery execution, performing an additional lottery if an AT lottery has been won in the previous game, counting the number of games to reach the ceiling, etc.) ) (for example, performing an AT lottery, counting the number of games in the first gaming state, etc.)
The second process is more advantageous than the first process in controlling the transition from the first gaming state to the second gaming state.
This is a preferred configuration F5.

According to the preferred configuration F5, by setting as the recommended operation mode an operation mode that does not provide the first number of gaming values but does not result in disadvantages regarding transition control, the base of the gaming value provision in the first gaming state can be lowered. , the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In a preferred configuration F5,
The first display means displays the predetermined display regardless of the lottery result when the non-specific operation mode is performed in the first gaming state.
This is a preferred configuration F6.

According to preferred configuration F6:
If a non-specific operation mode is operated, a predetermined display regarding the recommended operation mode is displayed regardless of the lottery result, so that it is possible to make the recommended operation mode known.

In a preferred configuration F4,
The specific lottery results include a first specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_CLR, CRL) and a second specific lottery result (for example, winning the push order bell_RLC, RCL). Prepare,
The first specific lottery result is a first specific operation mode (for example, sequential pressing) in which the operating means corresponding to the first reel (for example, the left reel 110) among the plurality of reels is operated first. , the first amount of gaming value (for example, 9 pieces) is not awarded, and the operation means corresponding to the second reel (for example, middle reel 111) among the plurality of reels is operated first. is a lottery result in which the first amount of gaming value is awarded when the first non-specific operation mode (for example, middle press) is operated;
When the second specific lottery result is operated in the first specific operation mode (for example, pushing sequentially), the first amount of gaming value is not awarded, and the second specific lottery result is determined by If the operation means corresponding to the third reel (for example, the right reel 112) is operated in a second non-specific operation manner (for example, reverse push), the first amount of gaming value is given. This is the lottery result,
The lottery result means is capable of determining a predetermined lottery result (for example, a common bell, a left bell, etc.) as a lottery result,
When the predetermined lottery result is operated in the first specific operation mode (for example, pressing sequentially), a predetermined amount of gaming value (for example, 9 pieces, a number smaller than 9 pieces, etc.) is awarded. This is the lottery result.
The lottery result means has a first probability that is lower than a third probability that is the sum of a first probability of determining the first specific lottery result and a second probability of determining the second specific lottery result. The predetermined lottery result can be determined with a probability of 4.
This is assumed to be a suitable configuration F7.

According to the preferred configuration F7, the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the first gaming state can be reduced, and the amount of gaming value that can be acquired in the second gaming state can be increased accordingly.

In a preferred configuration F2, a preferred configuration F3, a preferred configuration F4, a preferred configuration F5, a preferred configuration F6, or a preferred configuration F7,
A second effect display means (for example, liquid crystal display device 157, first sub-control unit 400, second sub-control unit 500) capable of displaying a second effect display (for example, a discontinuous effect image) on the display unit; ),
The first performance display is a performance display performed in a certain game out of a series of performances performed over a plurality of games (for example, FIG. 100(a) etc.),
The second performance display is a performance display that is not performed over a plurality of games but is performed in a single game (for example, as shown in FIG. 100(b)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in the first game in which the first performance display is displayed, the first performance display means displays the first performance display in the game following the first game. It is a means that may display a presentation display (for example, as shown in FIG. 100(a)),
When the predetermined display is displayed in a second game in which the second performance display is displayed, the second performance display means displays the second performance display in a game following the second game. is a means of not displaying (for example, FIG. 100(b) etc.),
This is a preferred configuration F8.

According to the preferred configuration F8, if a predetermined display is superimposed during a series of performances, the content of the performance cannot be grasped, so the performance is performed again in the next game, but the performance of a single game is not repeated in the next game. If performed again, there is a risk that the performance will be redundant or that it may be mistaken for a problem with the game machine, so the performance is not performed again. As a result, it is possible to understand the content of the performance and to prevent the player from misperceiving the player.

Although the game machines to which the present invention can be applied have been described above, the game machines to which the present invention can be applied are not limited to the above-mentioned examples, and within the scope of the gist of the present invention, Various modifications and changes can be made to the above-described example, and those accompanied by such modifications and changes are also included within the technical scope of the present invention. Furthermore, the functions and effects described in the above description are merely a list of the most preferable functions and effects resulting from the present invention, and the functions and effects of the present invention are limited to those described in the above description. It is not something that will be done.

100 Slot machine 101 Main body 102 Front door 110 Left reel 111 Middle reel 112 Right reel 700 Reel units 130 to 132 Bet button 135 Start lever 137 to 139 Stop button 140 Rotating device 1401 Rotating body 144L Left side lamp 144R Right side lamp 157 Production image Display device 165 First chance button 166 Second chance button 167 Left button 168 Right button RLT Roulette display RL Roulette wheel image AR Arrow image OP Operation promotion image KR Killing rate display image KRU Killing rate up image SB Scroll bar SBS Slider MS Message area

Claims (2)

a set value setting control means that can be set to one of the plurality of set values;
A production means capable of executing multiple setting suggestion productions;
A game machine comprising:
The plurality of setting values include a first setting value with the lowest ball payout rate among the plurality of setting values, a second setting value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the first setting value, and a second setting value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the first setting value. a third set value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the second set value, and a fourth set value with a ball payout rate one step higher than the third set value,
One setting suggestion effect among the plurality of setting suggestion effects is a setting suggestion effect (hereinafter referred to as a setting suggestion effect) that suggests that the set value setting control means has set a setting value with a higher ball payout rate than the setting value before change. (referred to as "first setting suggestion performance"),
One setting suggestion performance among the plurality of setting suggestion performances is a setting suggestion performance that suggests that the current setting value is the first setting value (hereinafter referred to as "second setting suggestion performance"). and
The production means is
In a game after the setting value is set again from the first setting value to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the third setting value and the setting value is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the second set value is changed to the first set value and set to the first set value by the set value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the setting value is set again from the second setting value to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion effect is executed;
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the third setting value and the setting value is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the first setting value and the setting value is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the setting value is set again from the third setting value to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the first setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the first setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
The probability of executing the first setting suggestion effect when the first setting suggestion effect is executable is the probability of executing the second setting suggestion effect when the second setting suggestion effect is executable. The probability is lower than
A game machine characterized by: The game machine according to claim 1,
One setting suggestion performance among the plurality of setting suggestion performances is a setting suggestion performance that suggests that the setting value has been changed (hereinafter referred to as "third setting suggestion performance"),
The production means is
In a game after the setting value is set again from the first setting value to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the third setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the third setting value and is set to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the first setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the first setting value and the setting value is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the setting value is set again from the second setting value to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the third setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the second set value is changed to the third set value and set to the third set value by the set value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the second setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the first setting value and is set to the first setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. Without,
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the second setting value and the setting value is set to the second setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. can be,
In a game after the setting value is set again from the third setting value to the third setting value by the setting value setting control means, there is no case where the third setting suggestion performance is executed;
In a game after the third setting value is changed to the fourth setting value and the setting value is set to the fourth setting value by the setting value setting control means, the third setting suggestion effect may be executed. be,
A game machine characterized by:

Images